# Hydromax

Windows Version 16

User Manual

© Formation Design Systems Pty Ltd 1984 - 2011

**License and Copyright
**

Hydromax Program © 1985-2011 Formation Design Systems Pty Ltd Hydromax is copyrighted and all rights are reserved. The license for use is granted to the purchaser by Formation Design Systems as a single user license and does not permit the program to be used on more than one machine at one time. Copying of the program to other media is permitted for back-up purposes as long as all copies remain in the possession of the purchaser. Hydromax User Manual © 2011 Formation Design Systems Pty Ltd All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, without the written permission of Formation Design Systems. Formation Design Systems reserves the right to revise this publication from time to time and to make changes to the contents without obligation to notify any person or organization of such changes. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY Neither Formation Design Systems, nor the author of this program and documentation are liable or responsible to the purchaser or user for loss or damage caused, or alleged to be caused, directly or indirectly by the software and its attendant documentation, including (but not limited to) interruption on service, loss of business, or anticipatory profits. No Formation Design Systems‟ distributor, agent, or employee is authorized to make any modification, extension, or addition to this warranty.

iii

Contents

Contents

License and Copyright...................................................................................................... iii Contents .............................................................................................................................. v About this Manual .............................................................................................................. 1 Chapter 1 Introduction........................................................................................................ 3 Input Model .............................................................................................................. 3 Analysis Types ......................................................................................................... 4 Analysis Settings ...................................................................................................... 4 Environment Options ............................................................................................... 4 Stability Criteria ....................................................................................................... 5 Output....................................................................................................................... 5 Chapter 2 Quickstart ........................................................................................................... 7 Upright Hydrostatics Quickstart .............................................................................. 7 Large Angle Stability Quickstart ............................................................................. 8 Equilibrium Condition Quickstart ............................................................................ 9 Specified Condition Quickstart .............................................................................. 10 KN Values Quickstart ............................................................................................ 10 Limiting KG Quickstart ......................................................................................... 11 Floodable Length Quickstart .................................................................................. 12 Longitudinal Strength Quickstart ........................................................................... 13 Tank Calibrations Quickstart ................................................................................. 13 MARPOL oil outflow Quickstart ........................................................................... 14 Probabilistic Damage Quickstart............................................................................ 15 Chapter 3 Using Hydromax .............................................................................................. 16 Getting Started ....................................................................................................... 16 Installing Hydromax .................................................................................... 16 Starting Hydromax ....................................................................................... 16 Hydromax Model ................................................................................................... 17 Preparing a Design in Maxsurf .................................................................... 18 Opening a New Design ................................................................................ 21 Opening an Existing Hydromax Design File ............................................... 22 Effect of Zero Point change ......................................................................... 24 Updating the Hydromax Model ................................................................... 26 Hydromax Sections Forming ....................................................................... 27 Checking the Hydromax model ................................................................... 30 Setting Initial Conditions ............................................................................. 34 Working with Loadcases.............................................................................. 38 Modelling Compartments ............................................................................ 51 Tank sections ............................................................................................... 61 Forming Compartments ............................................................................... 62 Compartment Types ..................................................................................... 68 Sounding Pipes ............................................................................................ 69 Damage Case Definition .............................................................................. 71 Key Points (e.g. Down Flooding Points) ..................................................... 74 Margin Line Points ...................................................................................... 76 Modulus Points and Allowable Shears and Moments ................................. 76 Floodable Length Bulkheads ....................................................................... 77 Stability Criteria........................................................................................... 77 Analysis Types ....................................................................................................... 77 Upright Hydrostatics .................................................................................... 78 Large Angle Stability ................................................................................... 80 Equilibrium Analysis ................................................................................... 87

v

Contents

Specified Conditions .................................................................................... 90 KN Values Analysis..................................................................................... 92 Limiting KG................................................................................................. 95 Limiting KG for damage conditions with initially loaded tanks.................. 98 Floodable Length ....................................................................................... 102 Longitudinal Strength ................................................................................ 105 Tank Calibrations ....................................................................................... 107 MARPOL Oil Outflow .............................................................................. 112 Probabilistic Damage ................................................................................. 115 Starting and Stopping Analyses ................................................................. 137 Batch Analysis ........................................................................................... 138 Analysis Settings .................................................................................................. 141 Heel ............................................................................................................ 141 Trim ........................................................................................................... 142 Draft ........................................................................................................... 144 Displacement ............................................................................................. 145 Specified Conditions .................................................................................. 145 Permeability ............................................................................................... 145 Tolerances .................................................................................................. 146 Analysis Environment Options ............................................................................ 147 Fluids Analysis Methods ........................................................................... 148 Density of Fluids........................................................................................ 150 Waveform .................................................................................................. 152 Grounding .................................................................................................. 153 Stability Criteria......................................................................................... 154 Damage ...................................................................................................... 154 Analysis Output.................................................................................................... 155 Reporting ................................................................................................... 155 Copying & Printing.................................................................................... 157 Select View from Analysis Data ................................................................ 159 Saving the Hydromax Design .................................................................... 159 Exporting ................................................................................................... 160 Chapter 4 Stability Criteria ............................................................................................. 163 Criteria Concepts.................................................................................................. 163 Criteria List Overview ............................................................................... 163 Types of criteria ......................................................................................... 166 Criteria Procedures ............................................................................................... 167 Starting the Criteria dialog ......................................................................... 167 Resizing the Criteria dialog ....................................................................... 168 Working with Criteria ................................................................................ 168 Editing Criteria .......................................................................................... 170 Working with Criteria Libraries................................................................. 172 Criteria Results ..................................................................................................... 174 Criteria Results Table ................................................................................ 174 Report and Batch Processing ..................................................................... 176 Nomenclature ....................................................................................................... 176 Definitions of GZ curve features ............................................................... 176 Glossary ..................................................................................................... 179 Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference ..................................................................................... 181 Windows .............................................................................................................. 181 Assembly View and Property Sheet .......................................................... 181 View Window ............................................................................................ 181 Loadcase Window...................................................................................... 183

vi

.............. 219 Midship and Max Area Sections .................. 197 File Menu ..........................................................................................Contents
Damage Window ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 195 Visibility Toolbar ............................................ 224 Potential for errors in hydrostatic calculations ................................................................................................................................. 204 Analysis Menu ....................................... 185 Graph Window............................................................... 183 Input Window ................. 214 Nomenclature ... 216 Coefficient parameters .................. 221 Waterplane Area Coefficient ............................................................................ 196 Extra Buttons ToolbarToolbar ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 194 File Toolbar...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 223 RM at 1 deg.......................................... 211 Window Menu ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 184 Results Window .......................................................... 200 View Menu ............................................................................................................................................... 207 Data Menu.................................................................................................. 194 View Toolbar ................................. 221 Prismatic Coefficient ...................................................................................................................................................... 196 Render Toolbar ..................... 196 Menus .................................................................................. 191 Toolbars .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 221 Section Area Coefficient ................ 212 Appendix A: Calculation of Form Parameters .................................................................... 195 Design Grid Toolbar ................ 226 Appendix C: Criteria Help.................................................................. 222 LCG and LCB ............... 224 Integration of wetted surface area ..................................................................................................................... 195 Edge VIsibility Toolbar .............................................................................................................................................................. 217 Beam .................................................................................................................................................................................. 228 Parent Calculations..................................................... 196 View (extended) Toolbar ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 197 Edit Menu ......... 224 Appendix B: Criteria file format ......... 188 Report Window ......................................... 194 Analysis Toolbar ............................................................................................................................................................................... 223 MTc or MTi .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 196 Report Toolbar .................................................. 223 Immersion ...................................................................... 214 Definition and calculation of form parameters .................................................................................... 202 Case Menu ...................... 220 Block Coefficient ........................... 228
vii
........................................ 222 Trim angle ................ 194 Edit Toolbar ............................................ 195 Window Toolbar ........... 204 Display Menu.......................................................................................................................... 223 Maximum deck inclination .................................................................................................................. 196 Design Grid Toolbar .......................... 218 Draft ................................................................. 214 Measurement Reference Frames ................................................................. 212 Help Menu ............................................................ 216 Length ....................................................

........................................................................................ 307 Analysis settings reference table ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 312 Beta Testing ....................................Contents
Selecting a calculation in a criterion ...................................... 309 Verification of Algorithms ...................................... 229 Parent Heeling Arms .. 301 ISO 12217-1:2002(E) ...................................................................................................... 228 Angle calculators .............................................................................. 243 Heeling arm criteria (xRef) ...................... 309 Testing of Implementation ............. 297 IMO HSC Code MSC................................................................................ 240 Parent Stability Criteria ... 309 Structured Programming ........................... 264 Multiple heeling arm criteria .....................................................................................36(63) .....................................................................Note on unit conversion ...................................................... 313
viii
........................................... 307 File Extension Reference Table ................................... 312 Index .... 260 Heeling arm criteria ............ 309 Quality Assurance ...............................................................749(18) amended to MSC........................................................ 290 Specific stand alone heeling arm criteria ............................ 302 ISO 12217: Small craft – stability and buoyancy assessment and categorisation.......................................... 299 USL code (Australia) .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 232 Heeling Arm Definition ............................. 232 Parent Heeling Moments ............................................................................................ 275 Heeling arm.................................................................................................................................................................... 295 Dynamic stability criteria ...................................................... ....... 291 Stand alone heeling arm combined criteria ... 297 IMO Code on Intact Stability A............................................................................................................................................ combined criteria............................................................................................................ 312 Version Control.................................................................... 312 Testing of Upgrades .................................. 285 Other combined criteria ................................................. 308 Appendix F: Quality Assurance ............................... 309 Quality Principles ...................................... 292 Appendix D: Specific Criteria ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 312 But we're not Perfect ....................................................... 281 Derived heeling arm criteria ............................................................................................................................................................. 291 Stand alone heeling arm criteria ............................................................. 295 Capsizing moment ............ 242 Criteria at Equilibrium ..................................................................... 304 Appendix E: Reference Tables .............. 242 GZ Curve Criteria (non-heeling arm) ................................................................................................. 228 GM calculators..................75(69)....................... 295 Heeling arms for specific criteria ............................

Page 1
. If you are unfamiliar with Microsoft Windows® interface. Chapter 3 Using Hydromax Explains how to use Hydromax' powerful floatation and hydrostatic analysis routines to best advantage. Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference Gives details of Hydromax' windows and each of Hydromax' menu commands. This will introduce you to commonly used terms and the basic techniques for using any computer program. Chapter 4 Stability Criteria Gives details of the stability criteria that may be evaluated with Hydromax. Chapter 1 Introduction Contains a description of Hydromax functionality and its interface to Maxsurf Chapter 2 Quickstart Gives a quick walk through the analysis tools available in Hydromax.About this Manual
About this Manual
This manual describes how to use Hydromax to perform hydrostatic and stability analyses on your Maxsurf design. please read the owner's manual supplied with your computer.

.

Hydromax‟ analysis tools enable a wide range of hydrostatic and stability characteristics to be determined for your Maxsurf design. Loadgroups may also be created and cross referenced into loadcases. such as downflooding points. A number of environmental setting options and modifiers add further analysis capabilities to Hydromax. the model can be displayed using hull contour lines. key points. Tanks and compartments can be flooded for the purpose of calculating the effects of damage. eliminating the need for time-consuming digitising of drawings or hand typing of offsets. This allows visual checking of compartments and shows the orientation of the vessel during analysis. which makes it easy to use. A number of loadcases can be created. The loadcase allows static weights and tankfillings to be specified and calculates the corresponding weights and centres of gravity as well as the total weight and centre of gravity of the vessel under the specified loading condition. This includes: compartments and key points such as downflooding points and margin line. Hydromax is designed in a logical manner. Hydromax adds extra information to the Maxsurf surface model.Chapter 1 Introduction
Chapter 1 Introduction
Hydromax is a hydrostatics.
Page 3
. This direct transfer preserves the three-dimensional accuracy of the Maxsurf model. immersion and embarkation points. Tanks can be defined and calibrated for capacity. stability and longitudinal strength program specifically designed to work with Maxsurf. Other input consists of: tank sounding pipes. The following steps are followed when performing an analysis:
Input model Analysis type selection Analysis settings Environment options Criteria specification and selection Run analysis Output
Hydromax operates in the same graphical environment as Maxsurf. centre of gravity and free surface moment. rendering or transparent rendering.
Input Model
Maxsurf design files may be opened directly into Hydromax. margin lines and section modulus.

a range of drafts in the case of upright hydrostatics. different analyses may require different settings. For example. For example: the upright hydrostatics analysis simply requires a range of drafts.
Page 4
. or a range of heel angles for a large angle stability analysis. whereas the longitudinal strength analysis requires a detailed load distribution. The following analysis settings are available:
Heel Trim Draft Displacement Permeability Specified condition
The analysis settings are specified prior to running the analysis. Settings that are not relevant to the selected analysis type are greyed out in the Analysis menu.
Analysis Settings
The analysis settings describe the condition of the vessel to be tested.
Environment Options
Environmental options are modifiers that may be applied to the model or its environment that will affect the results of the all the hydrostatic analysis types. The analysis settings for each analysis type are explained in detail in the analysis synopsis below.Chapter 1 Introduction
Analysis Types
Hydromax contains the following analysis tools:
Upright hydrostatics Large angle stability Equilibrium analysis Specified Condition analysis KN values and cross curves of stability Limiting KG analysis Floodable Length analysis Longitudinal Strength analysis Tank Calibrations MARPOL oil outflow Probabilistic damage (Hydromax Ultimate only)
Although common analysis settings are used where possible.

The criterion settings and intermediate calculation data may also be displayed if required. or as graphs of the various parameters across the full range of calculation. gravity and buoyancy are also displayed. Hydromax has a generic set of parent criteria from which virtually any stability criterion can be customized. Results are stored and may be reviewed at any time. The criteria checks are summarised in tables listing the status (pass/fail) of each criterion as well as the margin.Chapter 1 Introduction
Depending on the analysis being performed.
Output
Views of the hull are shown for each stage of the analysis. or output directly to a Word document. complete with immersed sectional areas and actual waterlines. All results are accumulated in the Report window (which can be saved. Heeled and trimmed hullforms and water plane shapes may be printed. different environmental options may be applied to the Hydromax:
Type of Fluid Simulation Density (of fluids) Wave form Grounding Intact and Damage condition
Stability Criteria
Hydromax has the capability to calculate compliance with a wide range of stability criteria. Limiting KG and Floodable length analyses also use stability criteria. In addition. The centres of flotation. For a brief overview of the different analysis that Hydromax has available. Hydromax has an extensive range of stability criteria to determine compliance with a wide range of international stability regulations. continue reading Chapter 2 Quickstart.
Page 5
. copied and printed). either in tabular form. These criteria are either derived from the properties of the stability curve calculated from a Large Angle Stability analysis or from the vessel‟s orientation and stability properties calculated from an Equilibrium analysis.

.

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Chapter 2 Quickstart
This chapter will briefly describe each analysis type and its output. large angle stability. trim is fixed at a user defined value and draft is varied in fixed steps. heel is fixed at zero heel.
Page 7
. The Analysis types section describes each of the analysis types.
Upright Hydrostatics Quickstart
For Upright Hydrostatics. settings and environment options in more detail. limiting KG and Floodable length analysis. Hydromax contains the following analysis types
Upright Hydrostatics Large Angle Stability Equilibrium Condition Specified Condition KN Values Limiting KG Floodable Length Longitudinal Strength Tank Calibrations MARPOL Oil Outflow Probabilistic Damage
Each analysis has different settings that may be applied
Heel Trim Draft Displacement Specified condition Permeability Loadcase Tank and compartment definition
Hydromax offers different environment options that may be applied to the analyses
Fluid Densities Treatment of fluids in tanks: fluid simulation or corrected VCG Wave form Grounding Damage
Hydromax offers an extensive range of stability criteria that are applicable to equilibrium. a list of the required settings as well as the available environment options is given. For each analysis type. Displacement and centre of buoyancy and other hydrostatic data are calculated during the analysis.

Page 8
. including upright GM.
Large Angle Stability Quickstart
For the analysis of Large Angle Stability. For more detailed information please see: Upright Hydrostatics on page 78. A graph of these values at the various heel angles forms a GZ curve. curves for wind heeling and passenger crowding levers and the angle of the first downflooding point. if the model is free-to-trim. A range of heel angles are specified and Hydromax calculates the righting lever and other hydrostatic data at each of these heel angles by balancing the loadcase displacement against the hull buoyancy and. the centre of gravity against the centre of buoyancy such that the trimming moment is zero. the horizontal distance between the centres of gravity and buoyancy. Various other information is often overlaid on the GZ curve. displacement and centre of gravity are specified in the loadcase. Large angle stability requirements
Range of heel angles to be analysed Trim (fixed or free) Loadcase or loadgroup Tank definition in the case of tank loads being included in the Loadcase (and/or for the definition of damage)
Large angle stability options
Fluid Densities Treatment of fluids in tanks: fluid simulation or corrected VCG Wave form Damage Compartment definition (in case of damage) Key points Margin line and deck edge Analysis of stability criteria
The key output value is GZ (or righting lever). These additional data depend on which (if any) stability criteria have been selected.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Upright hydrostatics requirements
Range of drafts to be analysed VCG (for calculation of some stability characteristics such as GMt and GMl only) Trim
Upright hydrostatic options
Fluid Densities Wave form Damage Compartment definition (in case of damage)
The results are tabulated and graphs of the hydrostatic data. curves of form and sectional area at each draft are available.

Hydromax iterates to find the draft.
Page 9
.
Note that some of these graphs have parameters that may be adjusted in the Data Format dialog If large angle stability criteria have been selected for analysis. Any equilibrium criteria will also be evaluated and their results reported. margin line and deck edge. Equilibrium analysis requirements
Loadcase or loadgroup Tank definition in the case of tank loads being included in the Loadcase (and/or for the definition of damage) Compartment definition and damage case (in case of damage)
Equilibrium analysis options
Fluid Densities Treatment of fluids in tanks: fluid simulation or corrected VCG Wave form Grounding Damage Compartment definition (in case of damage) Key points Margin line and deck edge Analysis of equilibrium criteria
Equilibrium analysis result table lists the hydrostatic properties of the model.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
A number of other graphs may be selected from the pull-down list in the graph window. margin line and deck edge will also be computed and tabulated. heel and trim that satisfy equilibrium and reports the equilibrium hydrostatics and a cross sectional areas curve. If a wave form has been specified there will be a number of columns. each column contains the results for a different position of the vessel in the wave as given by the wave phase value.
Equilibrium Condition Quickstart
Equilibrium Analysis uses the Loadcase. The sectional area curve is also calculated. integrated from upright) Variations of other hydrostatic and form parameters may be plotted against heel angle. Downflooding angles for any key points. Remember that you can access this data in tabular form by double clicking in the graph window:
Dynamic stability curve (Area under GZ curve. Maximum safe steady heel angle The sectional area curve at each of the heel angles tested may also be displayed. these results will also be reported in the criteria results table and they may lead to additional curves being displayed on the GZ curve. to calculate the displacement and the location of the centre of gravity. For more detailed information please see: Large Angle Stability on page 80. as is the freeboard to any defined key points.

KN Values Quickstart
KN values or Cross Curves of Stability are useful for assessing the stability of a vessel if its VCG is unknown. KN Values Analysis Requirements
Page 10
. The KN data may then be used to obtain the GZ curve for any centre of gravity height (KG) using the following formula: GZ = KN . you may enter the trim or specify the forward and aft drafts (these are at the perpendiculars as specified in the Frame of Reference dialog).
Specified Condition Quickstart
In the specified condition each of the three degrees of freedom. For more detailed information please see Specified Conditions on page 90.KG * sin(Heel) where GZ is the righting lever measured transversely between the Centre of Buoyancy and the Centre of Gravity. They may be calculated for a number of displacements before the height of the centre of gravity is known. Specified Condition Requirements
Specified Conditions Input Dialog
If fixed trim is specified. and KG is the distance from the baseline to the vessel's effective Vertical Centre of Gravity. can be set. for which the hydrostatic properties of the model are to be calculated. Specified Conditions options
Fluid Densities Wave form Damage Tank and Compartment definition (in case of damage)
The output for the specified condition consists of a curve of cross sectional areas and hydrostatics of the vessel in the specified condition.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
For more detailed information please see: Equilibrium Analysis on page 87.

Limiting KG Quickstart
The Limiting KG analysis may be used to obtain the highest vertical position of the centre of gravity (maximum KG) for which the selected stability criteria are just passed. The computed KN results will then give a more accurate estimate of GZ for KG close to the estimated VCG since the effects of VCG on trim have been more accurately accounted for. Limiting KG Analysis Requirements
Range of displacements to be analysed Range of heel angles to be analysed Trim (fixed or free) Stability criteria for which limiting KG is to be found TCG (if required)
Limiting KG Analysis Options
Fluid Densities Wave form Damage Tank and Compartment definition (in case of damage) Laodcase (in case of initial loading of damaged tanks) Key points (if required for criteria) Margin line and deck edge (if required for criteria)
Page 11
. This may be done for a range of vessel displacements. the centre of gravity is increased until one of the criteria fails. For more detailed information please see KN Values Analysis on page 92.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Range of displacements to be analysed Range of heel angles to be analysed Trim (fixed or free) Estimate of VCG (provides more accurate result if free-to-trim) TCG (if required)
KN Values Analysis Options
Fluid Densities Wave form Damage Tank and Compartment definition (in case of damage)
Output is in the form of a table of KN values and a graph of Cross Curves of Stability. The selected stability criteria are evaluated. this may be specified. Hydromax runs several Large Angle Stability analyses at different KGs. At each of the specified displacements. If the analysis is performed free-to-trim and an estimate of the VCG is known.

If limiting curves are required for each of the stability criteria individually. if the intact condition is used. If the analysis is unable to converge for a certain displacement this will be noted and the next displacement tried.
Floodable Length Quickstart
This analysis mode is used to compute the maximum compartment lengths based on user-specified equilibrium criteria.e.trim to either initial trim or specified LCG) Floodable length criteria to be tested
Margin line and deck edge (required for criteria)
Floodable Length Analysis Options
Fluid Densities Wave form
Page 12
. A check will be made to ensure that any selected equilibrium criteria are passed. this may be done in the Batch Analysis mode. In addition a range of permeabilities may be specified. only intact criteria will be evaluated. Floodable Length Analysis Requirements
Range of displacements to be analysed VCG Range of permeabilities to be analysed Trim (free. such as angle of maximum GZ. if a damage case is chosen. the LCG may be specified directly or calculated from a specified initial trim.to. For more detailed information see Limiting KG on page 95. only damage criteria will be evaluated. i.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
A graph of maximum permissible GZ plotted against vessel displacement is produced as well as tabulated results indicating which stability criteria limited the VCG. Some criteria. however at least one large angle stability criterion is required. The VCG is also required to ensure accurate balance of the CG against the CB at high angles of trim. Only relevant criteria will be used. are very insensitive to VCG and may prevent the analysis converging. As well as the standard deck edge and margin line immersion criteria (one of which must be specified) the user can also add criteria for maximum trim angle and minimum required values of longitudinal and transverse metacentric height. Floodable Lengths may be computed for a range of displacements.

Tank ullages are measured from the top of the sounding pipe to the free surface of the liquid within the tank along the sounding pipe and in a similar manner.
Longitudinal Strength Quickstart
Hydromax calculates the net load from the buoyancy and weight distribution of the model. the position of the fluid in the tank will be computed so that the fluid surface is parallel with the external seawater surface. soundings are measured from the bottom of the sounding pipe to the free surface. Fluid densities and tank permeabilities can be varied arbitrarily. The data is tabulated for each of the stations as defined in Maxsurf. Tabulated results may be customised using the Data Format dialog:
Page 13
. centre of gravity and free surface moment (FSM). Tank calibrations may be calculated for a range of trim and heel angles. graphs of allowable shear and bending moment are superimposed on the graph. Hydromax uses its fluid simulation mode to calculate the actual position of the fluids in the tanks. That data is then used to calculate the bending moment and shear force on the vessel. taking into account the vessel trim and heel. Longitudinal Strength Analysis Requirements
Loadcase (including distributed loads if required) Tank definition in the case of tank loads being included in the Loadcase (and/or for the definition of damage)
Longitudinal Strength Analysis Options
Fluid Densities Treatment of fluids in tanks: fluid simulation is always used for Longitudinal Strength analysis Wave form Grounding Damage Compartment definition and damage case (in case of damage) Allowable shear and bending moment
The longitudinal strength graph and tables contain all information on weight and buoyancy distribution.
Tank Calibrations Quickstart
Tanks can be defined and calibrated for capacity.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
The output is in the form of tabulated Floodable Lengths for each displacement and permeability. The condition to be viewed may be selected from the Results toolbar. the shear force and bending moment on the vessel. The data is also presented graphically. For more detailed information please see Floodable Length on page 102. Tank calibrations may be performed for a range of heel and trims. The results for a single condition are shown in the results table. If defined. For more detailed information please see Longitudinal Strength on page 105.e. i.

For more detailed information please see Tank Calibrations on page 107.117(52). Regulation 12A: Oil fuel tank protection Resolution MEPC. These results are presented in both tabular and graphical forms.141(54). is calculated. the resulting oil outflows will be calculated automatically. a table of capacities. edit any values as required.
Page 14
. Then in the MARPOL results data table.
MARPOL Oil Outflow Quickstart
MARPOL probabilistic oil outflow calculation may be computed according to the following MARPOL regulations: Resolution MEPC.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Tank calibration analysis requirements
Tank definitions Sounding pipe definition (if required) Sounding intervals for calibration levels Trim range Heel range
Tank calibration analysis options
Fluid Densities Treatment of fluids in tanks: fluid simulation always selected Damage: Intact case always selected What to calibrate (Analysis | Calibration options)
For each tank. Regulation 23: Accidental oil outflow performance Seltect the Reolution and tanks to be included in the analysis in the MARPOL options (Analysis menu) dialog. The “Start Analysis” button will send the tabulated results to the Report. volumes etc.

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
For more detailed information please see MARPOL Oil Outflow on page 112
Probabilistic Damage Quickstart
Attained index using probabilistic damage analysis may be computed. Probabilistic damage analysis requirements
Loadcase definitions Tank and compartmentation definition Main probabilistic damage analysis parameters and criteria setup Subdivision definitions Heel angle range for GZ curve calculation Trim
Probabilistic damage analysis options
Treatment of fluids in tanks: fluid simulation or corrected VCG Wave form Key points Margin line and deck edge
For more detailed information please see the Probabilistic Damage section on page 115.
Page 15
.

The following preferences are stored in the registry:
Page 16
. or you may simply want to revert back to the default configuration. To clear the Hydromax preferences.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
This chapter describes
Getting Started Hydromax Model Analysis Types Analysis Settings Analysis Environment Options Analysis Output
Getting Started
This section contains everything you need to do to start using Hydromax
Installing Hydromax Starting Hydromax
Installing Hydromax
Install Hydromax by inserting the CD and running the Setup program. then follow the instructions on screen. Note: Before installing any program from the Maxsurf suite for the first time. start the program with the Shift key depressed. It is possible for this data to become corrupted. Hydromax should be accessible through the Start Menu. click OK.
Starting Hydromax
After installation. You will be asked if you wish to clear the preferences. doing this will reset all the preferences. Simply select Hydromax from the Maxsurf menu item under Programs in the Start menu.
Windows Registry
Certain preferences used by Hydromax are stored in the Windows registry. please read the purchase letter (also referred to as installation manual).

Preparing a Design in Maxsurf Opening a New Design Opening an Existing Hydromax Design File Updating the Hydromax Model Hydromax Sections Forming Checking the Hydromax model
After checking the Hydromax model.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Colour and line thickness settings of contours and background Fonts Window size and location Size of resizing dialogs (alternatively. It is recommended to save your customized densities with your project using the File | Save Densities As command.
Setting Initial Conditions
Depending on the analysis performed. the next step is to check the Hydromax settings and initial analysis conditions. All hydrostatic calculations use this.
Hydromax Model
This section describes how to open a Maxsurf model in Hydromax and provides some important information to ensure that your model is correctly interpreted by Hydromax. these may be reset by holding down the shift key when activating them) Density of fluids Heel angles for large angle stability. KN and Limiting KG analyses Permeabilities for floodable length analysis Location of files Units for data input and results output Convergence tolerance (Error values) Maximum number of loadcases Reporting preferences
Note: The default density for the fluid labelled "Sea Water" is stored in the windows registry. you may need to set up the following additional model data:
Page 17
. Check the density of seawater after resetting your preferences.

The base line is the datum from which the drafts and KG are measured. the vessel‟s bow is on the right. The frame of reference defines the fore and aft perpendiculars. However it is possible to specify upto nine additional locations at which the drafts should be reported. The Frame of reference should not be changed in Hydromax. Down Flooding Points) Margin Line Points Modulus Points and Allowable Shears and Moments Stability Criteria
Preparing a Design in Maxsurf
There are several important checks that must be carried out in Maxsurf before opening a design in Hydromax:
Setting the Zero Point Setting the Frame of Reference Surface Use Skin Thickness Outside Arrows Trimming Coherence of the Maxsurf surface model
Setting the Zero Point
Ensure that the zero point is correctly setup in Maxsurf. A consistent zero point and frame of reference should be used for the model throughout the Maxsurf suite. in the profile and plan views.
Page 18
. midships is automatically defined midway between the perpendiculars. The frame of reference cannot be changed in Hydromax.g. the baseline and the datum waterline. In Hydromax you have the option of displaying longitudinal measurements such as LCB or LCF from the model zero point or amidships. By convention.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Working with Loadcases Modelling Compartments Forming Compartments Compartment Types Damage Case Definition Sounding Pipes Key Points (e.
Setting the Frame of Reference
It is vital that the Frame of Reference is correctly setup in Maxsurf before attempting to analyse the model in Hydromax. This is done through the Data | Draft Marks dialog. The perpendiculars define the longitudinal positions of the vessel‟s draft marks and cannot be coincident.

To include skin thickness. the internal structure surface should be placed to model the inside of the tank if the tank wall has significant thickness. ensure that the thickness and projection direction have been specified for the hull shell surfaces. internal surfaces will be ignored in the forming of hydrostatic sections. Skin thickness for hull surfaces will be treated so that the hull sections go to the outside of the plate whilst any tanks are trimmed to the inside of the plate.
Skin Thickness
Hull Shell
Internal Structure
If skin thickness is to be used in hydrostatic calculations. If a surface is defined as internal structure. it is not included as part of the hull shell by Hydromax.
Surface Use
In Maxsurf you can choose between two types of surface use Hull Hull surfaces are used to define the watertight envelope of the hull. resulting in more accurate hydrostatics.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Note: Draft and Trim specification It should be remembered that the drafts specified for an analysis are the drafts at the perpendiculars (or amidships) and the trim specified (and reported) is the difference between the draft at the AP and draft at the FP. To activate skin thickness in Hydromax ensure that the “Include Skin Thickness” option is selected when reading the file or calculating the hull sections. i. Note Tank boundaries made from internal structures surfaces do not have skin thickness. Thickness can be specified differently for each hull surface.
Page 19
. Internal structure Internal structure surfaces are used for all other surfaces (any surfaces which do not make up the watertight envelope) and also surfaces which are to be used in Hydromax to define the boundaries of tanks and compartments that have complex shapes. The following table describes the difference between each surface use in Hydromax: Included: Hydrostatic sections Selection of tank/compartment boundaries Skin thickness applied to the surface Verify that all surfaces that are to be used as tank/compartment boundaries are defined as Internal Structure.e.

At any longitudinal position on the hull.
Trimming
Ensure that all surfaces are trimmed correctly. The surface direction may be flipped by clicking on the end of the arrow. Ensure that you have used the Outside Arrows command from the Maxsurf Display menu to define which direction points outwards (towards the seawater) for each surface.
Correct section with one opening: this section will be closed across the top. the deck). you should have completely closed transverse sections or sections with at most one opening (e.
Correct Section with no opening.g.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Outside Arrows
The surfaces‟ outside arrows define the orientation of the surfaces.
Also see: Hydromax Sections Forming on page 27 Checking the Hydromax model on page 30
Coherence of the Maxsurf surface model
Hydromax will generally have no problem correctly interpreting your design as long as the following requirements for the Maxsurf model are observed:
Page 20
.

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Make sure that each surface touches its adjacent surfaces at its edge. internal structure surfaces are ignored when forming the hull sections in Hydromax
Note: For groups internal structure surfaces that will be used to define tank (or compartment boundaries) the same requirements apply. Hydromax will automatically look for compartment definition files when you are in a Compartment Definition window and a loadcase in a Loadcase window. then select Open Design from the File menu.e. any surface thickness specified in the Maxsurf Surface Properties dialog may be included.
Include Plating Thickness
At this stage. These will then be used for the Hydrostatics calculations.msd). ensure that the design view window is active.
Opening a New Design
File opening in Hydromax is window specific. if any) is explained in Opening an Existing Hydromax Design File.
Page 21
. trim away the excess regions of the surface. the Use Trimmed Surfaces item should be ticked.e. i. i. To open a design for analysis. Choose a Maxsurf design file (. preferably by bonding the edges together Where surfaces intersect. The following dialog will appear:
Calculate new Sections
Choosing Calculate Sections will calculate the specified number of sections through the hull. Also see: Checking the Hydromax model on page 30. the part of the keel that is inside the hull and the part of the hull that is inside the keel Do not have surfaces that cannot be closed in an unambiguous fashion. a maximum of one gap in a transverse section through the hull.
Use Trimmed Surfaces
If the Maxsurf model has trimmed surfaces. The meaning of (ignore existing data. e. Remember that the inner portions of each intersecting contour will be trimmed off Check surface use.g.

The upper limit for the number of stations is 200. compartment definition. Therefore it is recommended not to change the precision setting when opening the Maxsurf design file in Hydromax.
Surface Precision
The Surface Precision options has two functions:
Setting for calculating the hydrostatic sections Setting used to form new compartments or tanks. sounding pipes etc. Note: Maxsurf surface trimming information may vary for different precisions. For example. Hydromax also allows saving of all input and output files into individual files.
Note: The accuracy of the results depends much more on the number of sections than the accuracy at which the sections are calculated. usually at relatively small impact on the accuracy of the hydrostatics. by specifying one station 1mm aft of amidships and one station 1mm forward of amidships this discontinuity can be modelled very accurately. This is extremely useful for hulls that have features such as keels or bow thrusters that need to be accurately modelled and may need a locally denser station spacing to do so. Reducing the precision of the sections can greatly improve performance. Reducing the number of stations will speed up the analysis time but reduce the accuracy. a “Hydromax Design file” (. The first option allows you to use the station grid created in Maxsurf.hmd) is created. if it was known that a design had a significant discontinuity in its sectional area curve at amidships. To open an existing design. Hydromax recognises this precision setting and will and set the Surface Precision button accordingly. The Hydromax design file will consist of the hydrostatic sections and all input data such as loadcases.msd).
Opening an Existing Hydromax Design File
After saving the Maxsurf design file for the first time in Hydromax.
The precision at which the design was saved in Maxsurf is included in the Maxsurf design file (. avoiding any errors inherent in the integration of evenly spaced stations. there are two options:
Page 22
. conversely increasing the number of stations will increase the analysis time but lead to higher accuracy results. It also allows designs with significant longitudinal discontinuities in their sectional areas to have stations specified either side of the discontinuity. key points. you may select how many stations should be used.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Stations
When calculating stations.

compartment definitions. damage cases. This means that changes to the hull shape in the Maxsurf Design file. You will load your existing sections.msd file. it will look for a .hmd file was saved.e.hmd file. key points etc. the OSV. i.
Hydromax will now open the .
When Hydromax opens a .Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Double click on the .hmd file from any Windows explorer window Use the Hydromax Open command form the file menu and select the .hmd file is found.
Ensure “Read existing data and sections” is selected and click OK. See: Updating the Hydromax Model on page 26 for more information.msd file
An existing Hydromax design consists of a number of files with different file extensions. The Calculate Sections dialog now has the option to read the sections from the file. This contains hydrostatic sections information and all input information from last time the .msd file.hmd file with the same name as the . loadcases. For example: when opening OSV. are not automatically incorporated. Notes: 1) When selecting “Read existing data and sections (do not update geometry)” the Maxsurf surface information is not recalculated.
Page 23
.msd. loadcases and compartment definitions etc.

Hydromax 13 behaviour
It may sometimes occur that the model zero point location is changed in Maxsurf after tank. You will have to reload your individual loadcases and compartment definition files etc after you have selected this option and pressed OK. In previous versions of Hydromax this could cause problems because the loadcase and tank data maintained their position relative to the zero point. The two images from Hydromax 13 show this problem. the tanks and centre of gravity (from the loadcase) have remained in their same locations relative to the zero point.
Original location of data as entered in Hydromax before zero point change in Maxsurf. data is then created in Hydromax and that data all saved in the . The first image shows the model as initially defined in Hydromax with the zero point amidships and at the baseline. For more information on file properties and extensions in Hydromax.hmd file (as is done when you chose Save when the drawing window is top most). Etc. please see: File Extension Reference Table on page 307. loadcase. In the second image.hmd file will be overwritten and any existing data lost. Note that whilst the margin line and key points have remained in their same locations relative to the hull. if any) means that Hydromax will recalculate the hull sections and ignore any data stored in the .hmd file. data is defined in Hydromax.
Page 24
.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
2) Calculate new sections (ignore existing data. The model is closed in Hydromax The model is opened in Maxsurf and for some reason the location of the zero point is changed The model is reopened in Hydromax and the tank and load etc. Do not choose this option if you wish to keep the additional Hydromax data and you have not yet saved them as individual files as if the model is saved in Hydromax the . the zero point has been moved (in Maxsurf) to the aft-perpendicular and the DWL. where as the key points and margin line remained in the same position relative to the hull. data is automatically read from the .hmd file.
Effect of Zero Point change
The description below relates to what happens in the following situation:
A hull model is generated in Maxsurf Tank and load etc.

Now. if the zero point has changed.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Effect of Zero point change in Maxsurf 13.hmd file. This of course means that the numerical values of the various data are changed:
Page 25
. Note that this is only possible with Hydromax models that have been saved from the new version of Hydromax (because the new version of Hydromax now saves the zero point independently so that it can check for changes). Hydromax will display the following message:
If the zero point is moved in Maxsurf.
Selecting “yes” will maintain the position all the Hydromax data relative to the hull. Hydromax 14 behaviour
To rectify this problem. you will now be prompted. Hydromax now detects if the zero point has been modified in Maxsurf when the model is reopened in Hydromax. essentially just the zero point it moved.
Original location of data as entered in Hydromax before zero point change in Maxsurf. when loading a .

it is more likely that this option would be selected if it was realised that the zero point for the tank plan were slightly different than the zero point of the lines plan and a small correction to the zero point was required.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Click “yes” to maintain position of tanks. select “Recalculate Hull sections” in the analysis menu after reloading the Maxsurf Design File with the “read existing data and sections from file” option selected.
Updating the Hydromax Model
To update the hydrostatic sections to the latest Maxsurf Design File. Any tanks and loadcases will also be updated with this command. Thus the tanks and loads etc.
Selecting “no” will move all data other than the margin line with the zero point. but their numerical values will remain the same: The example shown is quite extreme. will move relative to the hull. The “Recalculate Hull Sections” command recalculates Hull surfaces as well as Tank Boundary surfaces (Internal Structure surfaces in Maxsurf). This function can also be used to include/exclude surface thickness or change the number of sections and to change use/not use trimmed surfaces without reloading the Maxsurf Design File.
Click “no” to maintain position relative to zero point.
Page 26
. loads etc relative to the hull.

one opening is acceptable and this will be automatically closed with a straight line. This means that if the model is simultaneously being edited in Maxsurf and Hydromax. This is not an acceptable shape. however. This section outlines the section forming process used in Hydromax and may be helpful when preparing a Maxsurf design for Hydromax. a hull surface with no deck). “hydrostatic sections” or just “sections”. an ambiguity exists as to how the two line segments will be connected. The same is true for groups of internal surfaces that have been selected to define a tank boundary. contours cannot be contained wholly within another contour. Hydromax will automatically form these sections.
If. 4) use the “Recalculate Hull Sections” from the analysis menu. Hydromax will try to resolve any problems with the model definition in the manner outlined in the following sections. called “Hydromax sections”.
Page 27
. compartment definition etc remain part of the Hydromax design file.
Where a section consists of an open shell (e. Note: The golden rule is that for any longitudinal position. Hydromax will automatically close the section with a straight line connecting the opening ends.g. the section is made up of two line segments.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Note: Changes to the Maxsurf design are only recalculated after the new Maxsurf design has been re-loaded into Hydromax. Furthermore. the section must be made up of closed. it is necessary to: 1) save and close the model in Hydromax 2) save in Maxsurf 3) open in Hydromax. non-intersecting (and non-self-intersecting) contours. having both a gap at the centreline as well as an open deck).g. (e. Hydromax deals only with sections that are completely closed. Whilst it is always preferable to give Hydromax a completely closed model with no ambiguities. In practice.
Hydromax Sections Forming
Hydromax works by applying trapezoidal integration to data calculated from a series of cross sections taken through the Maxsurf model surfaces. or can be unambiguously closed. using “Read existing data and sections” to make sure the loadcase.

bonded together or use compacted control points will not cause any problems when opened in Hydromax.
Page 28
. Multiple surfaces that are trimmed correctly. Hydromax will form a closed section through multiple surfaces by linking the curve segments together.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
In the example above. if either the top or bottom gap had been closed in Maxsurf the design would cease to be ambiguous.

Hydromax closes the outside contour and trims remnants
Page 29
.
Ambiguous Sections (e. bulwarks)
A common example of ambiguous sections is a model with multiple decks.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
A section through a multihull containing a single closed contour
A section comprising two closed contours
Hydromax will link curve segments together if they are only separated by a small amount. However this is not always possible so it is much better practice to trim the model correctly manually. decks. Hydromax will make an attempt to remove excess portions of the curve to form a single continuous contour. The user cannot change these tolerances. Hydromax will have difficulties distinguishing the intended main deck. Where surfaces intersect. because there are too many dependencies in the program.g.

This is done by selecting Show Single Hull Section in Body Plan view from the Display menu. the left and right arrow cursor keys will enable you to step through the sections one-by-one.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
The example above has bulwarks.
Checking the Hydromax model
Before starting any analysis you should check whether Hydromax has been able to correctly interpret your design.
Show Single Hull Section
In the body plan view. If the bulwark‟s volume is expected to influence the hydrostatic calculations. You can then click in the inset box to view the sections. This works the same as the Maxsurf body plan window and is an extremely powerful tool to validate your Hydromax model. These sections should be continuous with no gaps and no unexpected lines. The following tools are available to validate the Hydromax model. Incorrect sections in the model will give incorrect results.
Show Single Hull Section Checking the Sectional Area Curve Using Rendering to Check the Model
Note: Sections that are not formed correctly cause the majority of problems with Hydromax models. For more information see the Maxsurf manual. checking your sections after opening the design in Hydromax is strongly recommended. To prevent ambiguities it is recommended to trim the bulwark in Maxsurf. you can step through the sections one-by-one to verify that they have been correctly calculated. Therefore. the bulwark‟s volume has to be properly modelled in Maxsurf by modelling both the outside and the inside of the bulwark.
Page 30
. but this depends on the height of the bulwark relative to the rest of the section. look closely at intersections between surfaces to make sure that Hydromax has interpreted the shape correctly. In particular. generally these will be treated correctly by Hydromax and removed.

If this displays any unexpected spikes or hollows Hydromax may not have correctly interpreted the hull shape. Using Rendering to Check the Model
The model may also be rendered. which makes it easier to see if there are any areas of the model which have not been properly defined.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Checking the Sectional Area Curve
Another way of checking the Hydromax model is to perform a specified condition analysis at quite deep draft and look carefully at the sectional area curve in the graph window. Select Render from the Display menu whilst in the perspective view and turn on the sections:
Page 31
.
This Cross Sectional Area curve indicates there may be a problem with section forming from 12 m to 16 m. This is not a foolproof method since it does not necessarily highlight problems in the non-immersed part of the hull.

As long as the sections are formed correctly. the model is correct.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Note: In rare instances incorrect rendering may occur. This does not necessarily mean that the model is incorrect. To do this go to the body plan view in Hydromax and select “Show Single Section”:
Page 32
. you are interested in whether the sections are correct.
Further detailed checking of hull and tank/compartment sections
When checking that your model is correct.

In the single section view. if there are many it may help to hide some and check a few at a time). leave the view as it is. but turn on the visibility of all the tanks of interest (if there are few tanks. then you can show all of them.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Then to check that the tanks are OK. only tank sections near the current hull section are shown:
Page 33
.

Hydromax uses the aft perpendicular and forward perpendicular together with the baseline and the zero point for all calculations and gives the results in the units specified in the display menu. it is important that you set up the required initial conditions for the design.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Setting Initial Conditions
All Hydromax calculations are performed in the frame of reference of the model.
Coordinate System
Hydromax uses the Maxsurf coordinate system:
Longitudinal Transverse Vertical View window
Page 34
+ve forward +ve starboard +ve up View direction
-ve aft -ve port -ve down
. Note: Before you run any analysis using Hydromax.

Draft and trim are measured on the forward and aft perpendiculars. looking fwd From above. Drafts are always measured to the Baseline in the centre plane of the vessel. Immersed depth measurements are made perpendicualar to the free-surface. you may specify upto nine additional locations at which the drafts should be reported. Changing the zero point after you have started analysing the model in Hydromax is not recommended. loadcase and other input values. If these are not in the correct positions. some analysis results will be meaningless or may even fail to complete. See: Setting the Zero Point and Setting the Frame of Reference on page 18. bow to the right. This should be done in Maxsurf and not in Hydromax.
Frame of Reference and Zero Point
It is essential that a frame of reference be specified.
Draft Marks
Drafts are automatically calculated at the perpendiculars and amidships.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Body plan Plan Profile
From the stern. Port side above the centreline (this the opposite direction to Maxsurf) From Starboard.
Difference between “Immersed depth” and “Draft” measurements
Page 35
. This is done through the Data | Draft Marks dialog. should you require drafts to be calculated at other locations. Note: Changing the zero point in Maxsurf will not update the compartment definition.

Customising Coefficients
In Hydromax you may choose between the length between perpendiculars and the waterline length for the calculation of Block.
User-defined draft locations and new toolbar button
Note: Draft and Trim specification It should be remembered that the drafts specified for an analysis are the drafts at the perpendiculars (or amidships) and the trim specified (and reported) is the difference between the draft at the AP and draft at the FP. Finally you can chose whether you want the LCB and LCF to be displayed as a length or as a percentage of the waterline or LPP length as specified in the Length for Coefficients. beam and sectional area to be used for calculation of these coefficients. i. Prismatic and Waterplane Area Coefficients. neither of these values has changed and neither are affected by the user-defined draft locations. You may also select the draft. You can also specify whether you want the forward (towards the bow) or the aft (towards the stern) to have a positive sign. Middle or fwd end of the actual waterline.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
User-defined Draft Marks
Note that the Trim is still defined as the difference between the drafts at the perpendiculars and the Midship draft (used to define the range of immersions for the Upright Hydrostatics analysis) is the mean of the drafts at the perpendiculars.e. Aft Perpendicular. Amidships location. Drafts can only be defined when the vessel is rotated to the DWL (Display | Set vessel to DWL).
Page 36
. Fwd Perpendicular or from the Aft. The LCB and LCF can be displayed in the Results windows relative to the specified Zero Point.

criteria) and the angular units to be used for areas under GZ curves.
Page 37
. Units may be changed at any time. may also be set.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Data | Coefficients dialog Setting Units
The units used may be specified using the Units command. units for force and speed (used in wind heeling and heeling due to high-speed turn etc. In addition to the length and weight (mass) units. The angular units for measuring heel and trim angles are always degrees.

Loadcases automatically contain all the tanks defined in the Tank definition. Static weights that make up the vessel lightship are specified here as well as tank filling levels. expressed as either a percentage of the full tank capacity or as a weight.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Other Initial Conditions
See: Fluids Analysis Methods on page 148 Density on page 150
Working with Loadcases
Loadcases define the loading condition of the vessel. The loadcase will normally update the column totals automatically as weights or tank loadings are changed. Any changes to the loadgroup are then automatically incorporated into any loadcases that reference them. The exception to this is if tanks have not yet been formed or the vessel is still rotated from the result of an analysis. Loadgroups are special loadcases that contain no tanks. A loadgroup is included in a loadcase simply by specifying the loadgroup name in the “Item Name” column. If the loadcase does not update. These may be used to define groups of fixed weights (such as the steel weight or lightship weight) in a single location which may then be cross-referenced into a loadcase. click on the update Loadcase button and ensure that the hull is at the DWL by selecting “Set vessel to DWL”:
Page 38
.

A new load spreadsheet will be displayed in the Loadcase window. switch to the loadcase view by selecting Loadcase from the Loadcase sub-menu in the Window menu.
Page 39
. Then select “New Load Case” from the File menu or press Ctrl+N.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
The individual loads can be displayed graphically:
Creating a new Loadcase File
To create a load case. The default loadcase will contain a lightship entry and an entry for each tank (with a default filling of 50%).

select the Loadcase you wish to use as a template
Bring the loadcase you wish to use as a template to the front for example by clicking on the tab on the bottom
select File | New
First. you will be asked for a new Loadcase name after which the following dialog appears:
Page 40
.
In the loadcase window. an existing loadcase may be used as a template when creating a new loadcase. To do this.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
The tabs in the bottom of the window can be used to skip through the different loadcases in the design.
Create New Loadcases based on Template
To avoid rework.

you should either increase the maximum number of loadcases (see below).
Select Edit Loadcase from the Case menu
Changing the name in the Loadcase Properties dialog.
Select File | Open Load Case
Page 41
. Number of Loadcases command. If there are no blank tabs left.
Loading a Saved Loadcase
You can load a saved loadcase into your loadcase window by:
Select an empty tab in the loadcase window that you wish to load the loadcase into
Empty tab.
The next time you use the File | Save Loadcase command you will be asked to confirm the loadcase file name.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
A new loadcase will appear in one of the blank (…) loadcase tabs. or add more loadcases using the Case | Max. or close an existing loadcase.
Naming and Saving a Loadcase
A loadcase can be given any name by saving it to a separate file where the loadcase filename will be used as the loadcase name and displayed on the tab in the loadcase window. changes made in the template are NOT automatically changed in the loadcase derived from it. Once a loadcase has been created from a template loadcase.
If there are no empty tabs. Note The template is only used during the creation of the loadcase. Alternatively. you will either have to close an existing loadcase.

click and drag so that all of the loading rows that you wish to delete are selected. Note: When loading a design that has more loadcases than the maximum you have currently set in Hydromax. If you want to remove a load from the table. a sensible number is recommended.hml file you wish to open. You can repeat this process for as many loads as you wish. If you wish to delete several loads simultaneously. You may then enter the maximum number of load cases you require.
Setting the Maximum Number of Loadcases
The maximum number of loadcases (up to twenty-five) that can be loaded in Hydromax at any one time is set by selecting “Max. and press the Tab key to go to the next column in the table (or simply click directly in the cell you wish to edit).
Select Add Load from the Edit menu or press Ctrl+A. For example: if the item was “crew” with a weight per unit. For each item in the list you can specify a quantity. simply click anywhere in the row you want to remove. Number of Loadcases” from the Case menu. you will receive a warning and the file will not be loaded. This is used to calculate the total weight of that item.
Page 42
. you will only need to set this once to the maximum number of loadcases you are ever likely to use. and the total weight of crew would be automatically calculated. You must increase the maximum number of allowable loadcases and restart Hydromax before you can load the design. then select Delete Load. effectively allowing you as many loadcases as you require. Each loadcase can be selected and used for analysis. for example "Lightship".
You must restart Hydromax for this change to take effect.
Editing Loads
Click on the cell containing the load name and type in a name for this load. The weight of each item should be entered in the next column. you could specify the quantity and unit weight. For convenience of use. Each may be saved and loaded independently. In most cases.
Closing a Loadcase
Select the tab of the loadcase you wish to close in the Loadcase window Select File | Close Load Case
Adding and Deleting Loads
To add an extra load to the loadcase. and choose Delete Load from the Edit menu (or highlight the complete row by clicking the grey cell to the left of the row and press the Delete key).
A new load will be inserted into the table above the currently selected row.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Select the .

Tab to the next column and enter the horizontal lever for the item. The CG position will also be shown and updated in the View windows if Large Angle Stability. as with all other measurements in Hydromax.) character in the Item Name field. you can do so by entering a negative quantity – this can be useful if you want to apply a pure moment to the model by applying equal magnitude. After you type in this number. fluid type (for tanks) etc. Adding Component or Heading Lines Components or headings can be included in a load case by preceding the text with a period (. heading or sub-total lines in the table. press enter and the total LCG will be automatically re-calculated and displayed in the bottom row of the table. are measured from the Zero Point.
Page 43
. apostrophe („) or full-stop(. you may have to use Analysis | Update Loadcase ( button) to update the subtotals and subsubtotals.
Loadcase Formatting
Hydromax allows you to improve the presentation of the Load Case window by adding blank. subtotals and subsubtotals. Longitudinal Strength or Equilibrium analysis are selected.
Loadcase Sorting
A number of tools are available for controlling the order in which items and tanks occur in the loadcase. Note: Levers. Adding Blank Lines A blank line can be added into the load case by placing a dollar ($). You may move selected items and tanks up and down in the loadcase. you may also sort selected items by name. To ensure data consistency.
Insert row | Delete row | Sort rows | Move row(s) up | Move row(s) down
Sort selected columns
After moving loads. but opposite sign loads to the vessel in the loadcase.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
The weight must always be positive. Hydromax does this automatically prior to running an analysis. If for some reason you wish to have an upward (negative) load.) character.

Sub-subtotals Sub-sub-totals may also be inserted.
Quantity and Unit mass for sub total rows
If a sub total includes only tanks. Sub-subtotals must start with the text “subsubtotal”. then the quantity and unit mass items will be included.
Loadcase Colour Formatting
Different colours can be defined for fixed mass items and tanks. alternatively. Grouping Similar Tanks Use the move items UP or Down commands in the Edit menu to adjust the row order in the loadcase.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Adding Totals or Subtotals A subtotal can be displayed for several loads within a load case. Use the Display | Data Format dialog:
Page 44
. The unit mass is the sum of all the masses of the full tanks and the quantity is the sum of the masses divided by the sum of the full tank masses. When tanks are grouped by fluid type this can be useful for calculating the total tank capacity for that fluid type.
View | Colours and lines menu when Loadcase window is frontmost
Loadcase format
It is possible to select which columns are displayed in the loadcase window. To do this the item name field must commence with the word „total‟ or „subtotal‟. tanks may be displayed in the same colour as the fluid they contain (As defined in Analysis | Fluids dialog).

the fore and aft limits define the longitudinal extents of the load. Arm” column defines the longitudinal position of the centre of the load.
Page 45
. This can be useful for vessels such as product carriers which may have cargos of different types of fluids with different densities. Moment columns (mass * lever) can be displayed if desired. the centre of gravity should be midway between the forward and aft limits. the forward and aft limits will be moved by the same amount.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
The Relative density and Fluid Type which allow you to override the default tank densities as defined for each tank in the Compartment Definition window.
Longitudinally Distributed Loads
Distributed loads can be entered in the Loadcase window in the aft limit and forward limit cells. For an evenly distributed load.
If the longitudinal arm is changed in the Loadcase window. The aft limit and forward limit columns only appear when Longitudinal Strength analysis is selected and the distributed loads will only have an effect on the results in this analysis mode. The “Long.

For trapezium shaped distributed loads the centre of gravity is not midway between the boundaries.
Page 46
. Red = green and divided in the centre. at these extrema. Red = Green divided within middle 1/3 of centre.
Note: Since the load is distributed as a trapezium. the centre of gravity should lie within the middle third between the forward and aft limits of the load.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Evenly distributed loads. the load distribution becomes triangular.
Tank Loads
When you create tanks using the compartment definition. they will be automatically included in the loadcases (but not in Loadgroups which do not contain tanks).
Trapezium shaped distributed load. Tanks will be automatically treated as distributed loads for the longitudinal strength calculations. but within the middle third 1/3 of the centre.

question marks may be shown in the loadcase momentarily while the tank‟s new volumetric properties are being calculated. we have defined the following rules:
A special type of Loadcase called a Loadgroup has been defined. expressed as a percentage of the full capacity and a weight column.
For the example above this means that the lightship mass distribution would be defined as a Loadgroup and then this Loadgroup could be referenced in any number of loadcases. Also see: Update Loadcase on page 206
Loadcase cross-referencing. This is useful if you wish to define a detailed lightship mass distribution but do not want to have it displayed in full in each loadcase.
Updating tank values in the loadcase
Irrespective of whether you have updated the values in the Loadcase Condition. Tank level can be given as either a percentage of full capacity.
When a tank is changed in the Compartment definition table. Loadgroups
It is possible to cross-reference one loadcase from another. To prevent the problems of recursively including the same loadcase and also prevent tanks from being included more than once. A Loadcase can reference any number of Loadgroups A Loadgroup is referenced in a Loadcase by typing the name of the Loadgroup to be referenced in the Item column You can factor the referenced Loadgroup by changing the value of the Quantity column in the Loadcase. It also means that this lightship mass distribution would only need to be defined and edited in one location instead of in each loadcase. A Loadgroup does not contain tanks Only a Loadgroup can be referenced Only a Loadcase can reference a Loadgroup. select Update Loadcase from the Analysis menu or toolbar. a sounding or a weight. To update the loadcase for changes in tank loads. Loadgroups may be analysed in the same way as Loadcases – but remember the tanks are implicitly empty in a Loadgroup. volume. The Loadcase properties dialog (Case menu) is used to define a loadcase as a Loadgroup:
Page 47
.
The tank Unit Mass is the tanks mass at 100% filling.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Tanks have a quantity value. the Loadcase will be automatically updated as the first step of any analysis using the Loadcase information.

The Lightship load group can then be cross-referenced into any loadcase
Page 48
.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
This lightship Loadgroup contains the lightship mass distribution along the ship.

for instance. This allows you to load the same tanks with different fluids in different Loadcases – as might be the case for a product carrier.
Loadcase density override
It is now possible to override the default tank fluid densities as defined in the Compartment definition window. By default use tank defined densities:
Page 49
.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
The referenced Loadgroup is automatically calculated and the appropriate values included in the Loadcase:
Note: Loadgroup naming The cross-referencing of loadgroups in a loadcase is case insensitive.

Page 50
.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Type in a valid (>0.0) specific gravity and it will override the tank value:
Type in any string that doesn‟t begin with an “L” for the fluid and it will revert back to the tank value:
Type in some thing that begins with an “L” and it will revert back to the “Private” density of the loadcase item.

no correction is made to the upright VCG.
Workshop structure
Workshop can save a Loadgroup that contains the masses of all the structural parts. For other shapes and fillings of tanks it will not correctly approximate the free surface moment. When the corrected VCG method is selected in the analysis menu. thus the actual vessel CG is recalculated accounting exactly for the static shift of the fluids in slack tanks. divide by the total displacement to obtain the VCG correction and adjust the VCG accordingly to obtain the corrected fluid VCG.(69) Ch 3. Besides a general explanation on how to model tanks using the compartment definition table.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Free surface correction
If the corrected VCG fluid option has been chosen. Actual Hydromax uses the free surface moment for the current fluid level of the tank in upright condition. the Loadcase will sum the free surface moments.
Modelling Compartments
This section will describe in detail how to model different types of tanks and compartments. making the tanks‟ free-surface parallel to the sea surface. This can be loaded into Hydromax and referenced in any Loadcase. The options available are Maximum Hydromax will use the maximum free surface moment of the tank in upright condition for all fluid levels. this section contains a number of important sections that the user should be aware off when modelling tanks:
Number of Sections in Tanks on page 67 Tank and Compartment Permeability on page 59
Creating a Compartment definition file (. IMO Hydromax uses IMO MSC75. User specified A user specified value is used for all levels and heel angles. Fluid simulation If the Fluid simulation option is selected in the analysis menu. Select New Compartment Definition from the File menu
Page 51
. Instead.htk)
Select the Compartment Definition table by clicking on the Compartment Definition tab at the bottom of the Input window. Hydromax calculates the actual position of the fluid in the tanks taking into account heel and trim.3 for the calculation of the free surface moment. box-shaped-tank. This method approximates the movement of fluid due to heeling and is based on the fluid shift in a 50% full rectangular. at every step of the analysis. it is possible to choose the type of free surface moment to be applied for each tank in a Hydromax Loadcase.

the top and bottom. The 'F' and 'A' abbreviations stand for Forward and Aft.
Add will add a tank after the currently selected compartment and Delete will delete the currently selected compartment(s). 'A Top'. 'F Port' and 'A Starboard'. and the port and starboard limits of the tank. Thus it is not necessary to make the tanks fit the hull manually – this is done automatically by Hydromax. Each value defines one of the six planes of the tank. When the “Update Loadcase” command from the Analysis menu is used. resulting in a parallel tank. see above. make sure you have created a Compartment definition file. Compartments may be added or deleted by
Select Add or Delete Compartment from the Edit menu.
Box shaped compartments can be formed from the numerical values in the compartment definition table. in other words the two ends of the compartment.
Page 52
. This box will be called the Boundary Box. You will notice that aft columns contain the word "ditto". This is done by finding the intersection of the tank bounding box and the hull.
See Longitudinal Extents of Boundary Box on page 67 for some recommendations regarding setting the boundary box.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
This will give you a new set of compartment definitions with one default tank. The accelerator keys Ctrl+A and the Delete key may also be used to add and delete entries respectively.
Modelling Box Shape Tanks
Simple tanks and compartments are created by specifying six values that define a boxshaped boundary for the tank. The boundary box is made up of the fore and aft extremities of the tank. The column headings in the Compartment Definition table include terms such as 'F Bottom. This means that the value is identical at the aft end of the tank to the forward end.
Adding and Deleting Compartments
Before you can start adding compartments. Hydromax will form the sections that define the tanks and compartments. or an analysis started.

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Modelling Tapered Tanks

The default is for compartments to have parallel sides. If you wish to define tapered compartments, it is possible to enter different transverse and vertical values for the points defining the forward and aft ends of the compartment. If a different value is entered in one of the “ditto” columns, a tapered tank will result. Tanks can be tapered or sloped in Plan or Profile views. Hydromax does not have a mechanism for creating a sloped tank boundary in the Body Plan view.

By changing the “ditto”-input fields, tapered tanks can be formed

Note: Tapering can be done in Plan and in Profile view. Tapered tanks in Body Plan view have to be created using a boundary surface. See Modelling Tanks Using Boundary Surfaces on page 54.

Linked Tanks

Tanks and compartments may be linked. This means that although they are defined as separate tanks, they act as a single tank with a common free surface. To link tanks, compartments or non-buoyant volumes, first make them the same type as the parent and give them the same name. The easiest way to do this is to copy and paste the name from the Name column of the parent row into the Name column of the linked tank row. They may then be linked to the parent by typing l or linked in the Type column. Linked tanks and compartments do not have to be physically linked in space. However, the fluid in a linked tank or damaged compartment is always assumed to be able to flow freely between the linked volumes.

Page 53

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Modelling Tanks Using Boundary Surfaces

Tanks, compartments and non-buoyant volumes may have their boundaries defined by surfaces as well as being constrained to particular dimensions. This allows for the modelling of arbitrarily shaped tanks.

Forming tanks using boundary surfaces

The surfaces to be used to define the tank boundaries are selected by clicking in the Boundary Surfaces column in the middle of the Compartments Definition table. A dialog will appear that allows you to select which surfaces form the boundary of the tank. If a tank uses boundary surfaces, the cell in the Boundary Surfaces column is coloured blue.

Page 54

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

If you wish to use a Maxsurf surface to define a tank or compartment, tick next to the surface name in the Boundary Surface list. Note that symmetrical surfaces appear twice as there will be a starboard and a port side copy of the surface. The Starboard surface is first in the list and the Port surface second. The port surface is also identified with the suffix (P) after the name. Note: Only internal structure surfaces appear in the boundary surfaces list. Symmetrical surfaces are duplicated, with the port-side surface having “(P)” appended to the surface name. After selecting the internal surfaces, it is necessary to type in the extents of the boundary box. Hydromax will automatically set the “Fore” and “Aft” limits of the boundary box to just within the longitudinal limits of the Boundary Surface. This ensures that at least 12 sections are inserted in the tank. Also see: Forming Compartments on page 62 Number of Sections in Tanks on page 67 Longitudinal Extents of Boundary Box on page 67

Modelling External Tanks

External tanks may not be modelled in Hydromax. However, it is normally possible to add "Hull" surfaces in the Maxsurf model, which will enclose the external tanks. The tanks can then be modelled in Hydromax.

Additional box-shaped hull surfaces used to define deck tanks

Page 55

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Modelling Non-Buoyant Volumes

Non-buoyant volumes are effectively permanently flooded compartments. These parts of the hull can normally be modelled using trimmed hull surfaces. However, there are occasions where it is more convenient to use non-buoyant volumes. In some cases, where the volume to be flooded forms sections within the hydrostatic section, this is the only option, e.g. waterjet ducts. The choice whether to use trimmed surfaces or nonbuoyant volumes is primarily determined by the length of the non-buoyant volume relative to the length of the vessel. Using trimmed hull surfaces When the length of the non-buoyant volume, relative to the length of the model, is large enough; the non-buoyant volume can be calculated accurately from the hull sections. If possible, trimmed surfaces should be used. The picture below is a good example of when to use trimmed surfaces.

Propeller tunnels modelled with trimming surfaces

Using tank type: Non-buoyant volume In some cases using trimmed surfaces is just not possible. For example, when the sections of the non-buoyant volume are entirely enclosed within the hull sections (as is the case for a water jet duct) the use of a non-buoyant volume is the only way in which these features can be modelled.

Water-jet ducts modelled as non-buoyant volumes

Page 56

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Another occasion when non-buoyant volumes should be used, is when the length of the compartment relative to the length of the hull is too small to calculate its volume from the hull sections. A good example of this is a bow thruster on a long ship. If the vessel is very long, and the thruster duct is of small diameter, there may not be sufficient sections to model it accurately (even if you use the maximum of 200 sections for the Hydromax model). In this case you are better off modelling the thruster duct as internal structure and using these surfaces to define a non-buoyant volume. For example: in the image below the bow thruster volume is only calculated with one section.

For more information, see Number of Sections in Tanks on page 67. Tip: Besides increasing the number of sections through the bow thruster from 1 to 12, modelling the thruster duct as a non-buoyant volume has the additional advantage of being able to specify a Tank and Compartment Permeability, and hence also account for the thruster.

Bow thruster tube modelled as two non-buoyant volumes Tanks within Compartments

When a tank is defined within a compartment, Hydromax will automatically deduct the volume of the tank from the compartment volume using a “linked neg. (negative) compartment”. This is necessary for damage cases where the compartment is flooded and the volume of the tank should be treated completely separately from the compartment. Linked negative compartments are deleted and recreated whenever a tank or compartment is added, deleted or modified. Negatively linked compartments are displayed on the bottom of the Compartment Definition table solely for reference purposes and are not under direct user control. This means that linked negative compartments cannot be added, deleted or modified.

Page 57

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Linked negative compartments are named based on both the parent compartment as well as the tank from which the linked negative compartment was derived. For example a linked negative compartment might be named “Compartment3 (Stbd Hydr Oil)” to reflect that it is derived from the intersection of Compartment3 with the Stbd Hydr Oil tank.

Tanks Overlapping

As mentioned earlier in this manual, only compartments and non buoyant volumes or tanks can overlap with each other. Tanks or compartments of the same type (eg two tanks) can not overlap. A tank and a non-buoyant volume are also not allowed to overlap. Hydromax will first try to form tank sections and then check whether these sections overlap tank sections of adjacent tanks. When two conflicting or overlapping tanks or compartments are detected during the forming process, you will receive an error message:

Notice that the compartment definition row number of the tank is given in brackets i.e. tank #8 intersects tank #3.

Troubleshooting Overlapping Tanks Sometimes the reason for the conflict can be quite simple: eg an overlapping boundary box. However, when you are modelling tanks using boundary surfaces, the surface boundaries act as a boundary between two adjacent tanks and the bounding box extents are allowed to overlap. In these cases, it can be quite difficult to see why the tanks overlap, especially if you have a large number of tanks already defined.

By temporarily deleting all tanks except for the one that does not form, it often becomes clear why the tank overlaps. In the case of the image above, the tank‟s fwd most section goes all the way to the CL (probably because the fwd boundary box extent is just fwd of the boundary surfaces or exactly on the edge of a boundary surface). This causes this particular tank to “overlap” with surrounding tanks.

Page 58

In case of large variations in permeability within a compartment it is recommended to model separate linked compartments with separate permeability to increase accuracy. 60% and the upper compartment a permeability of 95%. In the case of damaged tanks and compartments. thought it is listed in both columns. one. the permeability fraction is also applied to the free-surface-moment contribution of that tank or compartment. compartments typically have structure (other than plate stiffeners) and equipment inside. Save & move on to next compartment. for example. eg by selecting additional boundary surfaces Close comp def file. inspect tank sections Try to fix tank definition. Depending on the level of accuracy required.and an upper engine room compartment.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Procedure to Fix Overlapping Tanks:
Save Model Go into Comp def window Save comp def Delete all tanks except for one you wish to investigate form tanks.
Relative Density of Tank Fluids
Relative Density (Specific Gravity) values can be typed directly into the Relative Density column of the Compartment Definition table. Permeability of Compartments As opposed to tanks. Compartments and non-buoyant volumes have only one permeability. The compartment permeability is applied when the compartment is flooded in a damage condition and the non-buoyant volume permeability is applied at all times since it is always flooded.
Page 59
. Do NOT save!! Open saved Comp def file Fix compartment..
Now that you know how to fix it. For example an engine room with engines and auxiliaries at the tanktop could be divided up in a lower. and the other when it is damaged. the engines and equipment could also be modelled individually as empty tanks. The lower compartment will have a permeability of. which is used when the tank is intact.
Tank and Compartment Permeability
Tanks may have two permeabilities.

all entries for that fluid in the compartment definition are automatically updated. Select the rows you wish to use and use the Edit | Move Items Up or Down commands (there is no provision for sorting tanks alphabetically). Whenever values are changed in the Density dialog (see Density of Fluids on page 150). auto complete is used. or if you prefer.
Page 60
.
Assembly view can be used to show and hide tanks/compartments
Using damage cases. it is often useful to check individual tanks. the default density specified here in the compartment definition may be overridden in the loadcases. turn off the display of intact tanks and compartments. If the tank defines a cargo tank that will carry different liquid cargoes. selected tanks may be displayed in the following manner:
Define a damage case Select only damaged tanks and compartments for display. hence you should design these surfaces to the inside of the tank. so it is normally only necessary to type the first few letter of the name).Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Alternatively the fluid type can be entered into the Fluid Type column.
Compartment and Tank Ordering
The tank definition order can be adjusted in a similar way to loads in the loadcase. You can either control the tank visibility through the Assembly window. Groups of linked tanks and compartments will be moved together. Note: Thickness of boundary surfaces are not taken into account. you can use damage cases to quickly change the display to show certain tanks. the relative density value is obtained from the value specified in the Density dialog.
Compartment and Tank Visibility
When creating complicated tank plans. the tanks.
Tanks and Surface Thickness
If you have specified that Hydromax should include the surface thickness. If a fluid type is entered. either as the name or as one of the single letter codes (when entering the name. compartments and non-buoyant volumes will correctly account for the surface thickness and its projection direction: the tanks will go to the inside of the hull shell.

Using a damage case to quickly change the tank and compartment visibility
Tank sections
When in Tank Calibration mode. Use this to quickly turn tanks on and off by changing their damage status.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Select whether you want to see the tank outline or the tank sections (tanks sections are preferable when checking that tanks have been formed correctly since it is these sections which are used to determine the tank volume and other properties). tank sections are also displayed in the Bodyplan view when the “Show single section” option is selected.
Page 61
. Only tank sections that lie on or near the current station are shown – this makes it easier to verify that the tanks have been formed.
You can make the damage case window quite small and tile it next to the perspective view. Choose the damage case from the Analysis toolbar Set any of the tanks and compartments you wish to be visible to damaged in the damage case window.

Step-by-Step Tank Forming Process
As an example.
An example of a port and starboard waterballast tank with a pipe tunnel at the centreline. the starboard waterballast tank below will be created using boundary surfaces.
Hydromax uses three input items to form the compartment
Boundary surfaces (if defined) Boundary box Hydromax Hull sections
Starting position The starboard tank margin plate is modelled using an Internal Structure surface from Maxsurf.
Starting point: Hydromax Hull sections with an internal surface and a bounding box
Also see: Modelling Tanks Using Boundary Surfaces on page 54 and the Maxsurf manual on internal structure surfaces
Page 62
. followed by the tank section insertion process.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Forming Compartments
Tanks and compartments are formed automatically by Hydromax (once the tank extents and any boundary surfaces have been defined) by selecting Recalculate Tanks and Compartments from the Analysis menu. First a step-by-step outline of the tank forming process is given. The formed status of a tank (yes or no) is shown in the last column of the compartment definition table. This section describes the internal tank-forming process that Hydromax uses to form tanks. The water ballast tanks have a margin plate on the side. Understanding these processes may assist you in rare situations where the tank forming does not work as expected.

the surfaces selected to form the tank boundary must form closed section contours at all longitudinal positions through the tank. Hydromax will use the trimmed internal structure surface. Often a tank is not formed as expected because only one side of the internal structure surface was selected for example the portside (p). Step 2: Clip to Boundary Surface Using the closed surface section contour Hydromax can now form a closed compartment section.
Hydromax uses the same method for forming the tank section from the boundary surfaces as for forming the hydrostatic sections through the hull. The area inside the selected surfaces will define the tank contour. Another common cause of unexpected results is trimming. Usually the internal structure surfaces are best to be left untrimmed. Make sure that the boundary surfaces:
Form a closed section contour.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Step 1: Close Internal Structure Surface
Hydromax will close the Internal Structure Surface contour by drawing a straight line between the ends of the opening. As with the hull sections. or There is no more than one opening – the opening will be closed with a straight line
Note: Hydromax will close the section contour of the selected boundary surfaces only. The tank or compartment looks like this at this stage:
Page 63
. If you selected “use trimmed surfaces” while opening the Maxsurf model.

In this example the vessel has both wing and double bottom tanks with non-rectangular cross-sections thus requiring them to be defined by boundary surfaces – see blow:
Page 64
.
More realistic surface-bounded tanks
Whilst the above example shows the principles by which surface-bounded tanks are formed. it is not really realistic because it would not be possible to define a tank above the surface-bounded double bottom tanks.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Step 3: Clip to Hull Hydromax will clip the compartment section to the hull. In practice additional surfaces would be required. The boundary box is formed from the numerical input in the Compartment definition table. A more realistic example is shown in the following section.
Step 4: Clip to Boundary Box Finally the compartment section is clipped to the boundary box.

TankBilgePlate (P) Double Bottom (S) TankTop (S). TankWing (P). OuterClosure (P). TankTop. OuterClosure (S). TankBilgePlate (S) Wing Ballast (P) TankWing (P). TankBilgePlate (P) Wing Ballast (S) TankWing (S).Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Sketch of tank cross-sections
Five surfaces have been defined to define the tank boundaries:
Tank Boundary surfaces defined in Maxsurf
The following surfaces need to be selected for the different tanks so that closed sections are generated (or at most one section) Hold (C) TankWing. BottomClosure (P). TankBilgePlate (S)
Page 65
. BottomClosure (S). TankTop (P) Double Bottom (P) TankTop (P).

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Hydromax tank definition
Surfaces for Hold (C) (top is closed automatically)
Page 66
.

In most cases.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Surfaces for double bottom tanks
Surfaces for wing tanks (top is closed automatically)
Number of Sections in Tanks
The volume of a tank or compartments is calculated by integrating section properties along the length of the tank. Thus it is important to have a sufficiently large number of sections to accurately model the tank. Also see Longitudinal Extents of Boundary Box on page 67
Longitudinal Extents of Boundary Box
For tanks near the ship‟s extremities it is good practise to set the “Fore” and “Aft” limits in the compartment table to just inside the hull surface (say 1mm). additional sections will be inserted into the tank so that the tank section spacing match the hull section spacing. Hydromax will normally place twelve sections between the forward and aft limits defining the tank. this will be done automatically by Hydromax. The following example illustrates why:
Page 67
. If this results in a section spacing greater than the spacing for the hull spacing.

the longitudinal extents should not be set to extreme values. they should be set to just inside the extents of the hull surfaces to ensure that at least 12 sections are used to calculate the tank volumes.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
If the boundary box is set like this:
The number of hull sections is dependent on the section spacing in the model. compartments.tanks.
But if the boundary box is set just inside the forward limit of the bulbous bow:
To recap – Near the ship‟s extremities. linked compartments and non-buoyant volumes. This ensures that at least 12 sections are inserted in the tank. linked tanks. Note that transversely and vertically there are no such restrictions. Hydromax will automatically set the “Fore” and “Aft” limits of the boundary box to just within the longitudinal limits of the boundary surface.
Page 68
. For internal structure surfaces that are used as boundary surface. Also see Number of Sections in Tanks on page 67 Forming Compartments on page 62
Compartment Types
Five compartment types can be created using the Compartment Definition table .

moon pools. This will automatically set the tank/compartment to the correct type. In addition.
Sounding Pipes
Hydromax allows sounding pipes to be defined for each tank. This allows you to damage a complex compartment configuration by linking compartments together and damaging the parent compartment. To change the type of a tank. One sounding pipe per tank is permitted and up to nine vertices per sounding pipe. shown below. bent or curved sounding pipes to be modelled. c or n) in the Type column of the Compartment Definition table and then press Enter. allowing inclined. the bottom of the tank is flat either longitudinally or transversely) the default sounding pipe location is placed at the aft-most low point and as close to the centreline as possible. you need to use the Sounding Pipes table in the Input window.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Tanks Will be included in the tank calibration output and are automatically added to the loadcase. type the first character of the tank type (t. Hydromax creates a default sounding pipe when the tank is formed (either by running an analysis. etc. The default sounding pipe is placed at the longitudinal and transverse position of the lowest point of the tank. Linked Compartments Work in the same way as linked tanks. They do not have a separate entry in the loadcase. any tank that it is linked to will also be regarded as damaged. Compartments Are only used to specify compartmentation for damage.
Edit Sounding Pipes
To customise a sounding pipe. Tanks need not be adjoining to be linked. or using one of the following commands: Analysis | Recalculate Tanks and Compartments. If the lowest point of the tank is shared between several locations (e. They are ideal for defining water-jet ducts.
Page 69
. Automatically created sounding pipes will be recalculated if the tank geometry changes.g. they can be remote from one another. or Analysis | Update Loadcase. Linked Tanks Will have their volume added to the parent tank with the same tank name. Non-Buoyant Volumes Are only used to specify compartments of the vessel which are permanently flooded up to the static waterline. The top of the sounding pipe is taken to be level with the highest point of the tank and the default sounding pipe is assumed to be straight and vertical. They are not included in the tank calibration output and will not be added to the loadcase. In this case the tank linking simulates tanks with cross connections. They are not included in the tank calibration output and will not be added to the loadcase. if a tank is damaged. any changes to the sounding pipe due to tank geometry changes will also have to be made manually. once the sounding pipe has been edited manually. However. and essentially behave as damaged compartments.

Unwanted vertices can be deleted by clicking on the relevant row in the table and selecting Edit | Delete or by hitting the Delete key.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
You can activate this window by selecting from the Windows | Input | Sounding Pipes menu. it is not acceptable to have S-bends in the sounding pipes. This is done by specifying a numerical value for the increment for each tank in the Calibration Spacing column of the Sounding Pipes Input window. offset and height of the vertex can be edited. A new row will be added to the sounding pipe and the longitudinal position. To add vertices to create a bent sounding pipe.e. by clicking on the tabs at the bottom of the Input window. or by clicking on the icon in the window toolbar.
Calibration Increment
Hydromax allows user definable increments (or: intervals) for tank soundings. Hydromax uses its default value based on a reasonable division of the depth of the tank. make the sounding pipe type User Defined. then click on the first row of a particular sounding pipe and choose Edit | Add or use the Ctrl+A key combination. In this case the Sounding Pipes table will display “Auto” in the Calibration Increment column for the tank. Note that each successive vertex in a sounding pipe must be no higher than the previous vertex i.
Type the value of the desired calibration increment in the Calibration Spacing cell for the tank calibration you wish to modify.
If no increment is entered.
Page 70
.

You may specify a name for the Damage Case in the dialog. the current damage case is selected from the Analysis toolbar – see below. The new damage case is added after the currently selected damage case column. Volumes that are permanently flooded should be defined as non-buoyant volumes. soundings will step evenly along the inclined length of the sounding pipe.
Deleting a Damage Case
To delete damage cases. select the intact case column.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Note Increments are measured along the sounding pipe. If the sounding pipe is inclined or if it has multiple angles. simply select the columns to be deleted in the Damage Window and select Delete Damage Case from the Case menu. not along the vertical axis of the tank. Hydromax allows the user to set up a number of damage cases. Note that it is not possible to delete the intact case. to insert a damage case immediately after the intact case. Each new damage case will have a column in the Damage Window and a tick may be placed to indicate which tanks and compartments are damaged for that particular Damage Case. make the Damage window active and select Add Damage Case from the Case menu.
Page 71
.
Adding a Damage Case
To add a damage case.
Damage Case Definition
In all but the floodable length and tank calibration analysis modes.
Renaming a Damage Case
The name of the current damage case may be changed by selecting Edit Damage Case when the damage case window is active. Several damage cases may be added in one go by selecting a number of columns. Hydromax is capable of including the effects of user-defined damage.

This is because Hydromax uses the “Lost buoyancy” method rather than “Added mass”.
Displaying Damage Cases
When a damage case is selected. These colours can be specified in the View | Colours and lines menu. To perform analyses for the intact vessel. their weights and levers are no longer displayed in the Loadcase window and the word „Damage‟ is displayed in the quantity column. turning off all damage in all the damage cases (use the fill down command) and then pasting back in the original data from where it was stored in the spreadsheet. Note: Hydromax uses the “Lost buoyancy” method rather than “Added mass”. Note that carrying out a Tank Calibration analysis will force the intact case to be selected. This is also the case for the Floodable Length analysis which effectively sets up its own longitudinal extent of damage. and all values set to zero. When tanks have been damaged. select Intact as the current damage case. Flooding is considered to be instantaneous up to sea level. Any subsequent analyses will take into account the damaged compartments. If you have linked tanks or compartments or added tanks within compartments after the definition of a damage case. Hydromax assumes that all compartment definition has been done after the tanks have been defined. This is simply done by copying all the damage case data to a spread sheet.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Selecting a Damage Case
The current damage case is selected from the Analysis toolbar.
Page 72
. Any tank fluids are treated as having been completely replaced by seawater up to the equilibrium waterline.
The Loadcase and View windows will reflect the damage defined in the current damage case. you should toggle the damage status of the damaged tanks. In the Loadcase Window damaged tanks are displayed with the label 'Damaged' in the Quantity column. all damaged tanks and compartments will be displayed in damaged tank or damaged compartment colour respectively.

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
The Loadcase Window displays damaged tanks and excludes them from any calculations. Select the column of the damage case you wish to specify the extent of damage for and choose Extent of Damage from the case menu:
Page 73
. Extent of Damage Cases
The damaged compartments can automatically be set by using the Case | Extent of damage command.

select New Key Points from the File menu. Down Flooding Points)
Key points such as downflooding points and hatch openings can be defined in Hydromax using the Key Points window. The other types of points have their freeboard measured but are not used for the evaluation of the downflooding angle and are for information only.
Deleting Key Points
To delete a Key point. a positive offset is to starboard and a negative offset is to port. Vessels which have symmetrical key points on starboard and port sides must have both key points added to the table.
Specify the extent of the damage – any tanks or compartments that lie partially or wholly within the extent of damage will be automatically flagged as damaged:
Automatically generated damage case from using Extent of Damage command.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Defining the damaged compartments by specify the extent of damage.
Adding Key Points
To start adding downflooding points go to the Key Points table. To delete more than one point at a time. You will be given a default point. To add additional key points to the table.
Key Points (e. click anywhere in the row of the point to be deleted and select Delete. choose Add from the Edit menu or press Ctrl+A. click and drag over the rows you want deleted. Immersed key points will be displayed in the same colour as flooded tanks or compartments. which is used in criteria evaluation. The points may be displayed in the Design View window and will be displayed in different colours depending on whether or not they are immersed. There are several types of Key Points:
Down Flooding points Potential Down flooding points Embarkation points Immersion Points
Only downflooding points are used in determining the downflooding angle.g.
Page 74
. Key points may be placed asymmetrically. A new point will be inserted below the currently selected row in the table.

Select the tank or compartment from the combo-box in the Linked to column of the Down Flooding Points table in the Input window:
Downflooding points that are linked to tanks or compartments.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Select Delete from the Edit menu. a longitudinal position. These downflooding points will appear italicised and an asterisk (*) is postfixed to the downflooding point‟s name in the DF Angles table of the Results window:
Page 75
. and the selected rows will be deleted. a transverse offset from the centreline. and a height. which are damaged in the currently selected damage case. Click in any cell and enter the name or value you require. The type of Key Point may be selected from the combo-box in the Type column of the Down Flooding Points table in the Input window:
Links to Tanks or Compartments
Downflooding points may be linked to tanks or compartments. All points are entered relative to the zero point. will be ignored when computing the downflooding angle.
Editing Key Points
Key points are defined by entering a name.

It is only necessary to modify the height value of the margin line points.
Modulus Points and Allowable Shears and Moments
The Modulus window can be used to enter maximum allowable shear forces and bending moments for each section. Asymmetric margin lines and deck edges are not supported. immersion angles or freeboards (depending on the analysis) are also given for the margin line and deck edge.
Margin Line Points
The margin line is used in a number of the criteria. Once this has been done for all the points that need to be changed. In the Name column the longitudinal position where immersion first takes place (or the lowest freeboard) is given. In addition to the Key Points results. the points on the margin line may be edited manually in the Margin Line Points window (the deck edge is automatically updated so that it is kept 76mm above the margin line). Allowable shear force and/or bending moment can be specified at each point. ensuring that the margin line follows the hull shape precisely. Note: Linking a downflooding point to a tank does not mean that Hydromax will consider a tank damaged when the downflooding point is submerged.
Page 76
. selecting Snap Margin Line to Hull in the Analysis menu will project all of the points horizontally onto the hull surface. Hydromax automatically calculates the position of the margin line 76mm below the deck edge when the hull is first read in. If necessary. the freeboards after an Equilibrium or Specified Condition analysis. This form of automatic flooding is not supported in Hydromax yet.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
The downflooding angles for each of the points are displayed in the results window. Points may be added or deleted as required using the procedure described in Adding Key Points and Deleting Key Points on page 74. The modulus value is not currently used as deflections are not calculated. Immersed points are highlighted in red in the Freeboard column. One or more points can be entered in this window. The downflooding angles are computed during a large angle stability analysis.

These allowable values are displayed as lines on the longitudinal strength graph.
Stability Criteria
Stability criteria may be evaluated after a Large Angle Stability analysis and after an Equilibrium analysis. some general information is given on:
Page 77
. bring the Modulus table to the front and choose New Modulus Points from the File menu with the Modulus window frontmost. New allowable values can be inserted by selecting Add from the Edit menu and entering a longitudinal position as well as an allowable shear and/or moment. The following analysis types are available in Hydromax:
Upright Hydrostatics Large Angle Stability Equilibrium Analysis Specified Conditions KN Values Analysis Limiting KG Floodable Length Longitudinal Strength Tank Calibrations MARPOL Oil Outflow Probabilistic Damage
Also. Points may be added or deleted as required using the procedure described for the key points. In this section the different analysis types available in Hydromax will be described.
Analysis Types
After specifying the input values and checking the Hydromax model.
Floodable Length Bulkheads
Bulkheads entered in the Input window are used for Floodable Length analysis in order to optionally plot the compartment lengths in the floodable length graph for easy verification that the critical compartment lengths are not exceeded. Stability criteria are required to perform a limiting KG and Floodable Length analysis. For more information see Floodable Length on page 102. The allowable values can be saved and recalled as text files by using Open and Save from the File menu. Please refer to Chapter 4 Stability Criteria starting at page 163 for information on defining and selecting criteria. The Bulkheads are automatically sorted by longitudinal position. the analysis can be performed.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
To start a table of allowable shear forces and bending moments.

specify range of drafts for analysis Trim from the Analysis menu.
Choosing Upright Hydrostatics
Select Upright Hydrostatics from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar. The Data Format dialog can be used to specify what is displayed in some graphs and tables.
Upright Hydrostatic Analysis Settings
The following analysis settings apply for Upright Hydrostatic Analysis:
Draft from the Analysis menu. you may specify a fixed trim for all drafts
A range of drafts for upright hydrostatic calculations can be specified using the Drafts command from the Analysis menu. Following each analysis.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Starting and Stopping Analyses Batch Analysis
The required analysis settings and environment options will be discussed separately and in more detail in the next two sections of this chapter.
Page 78
. the available options depends on the current results table or graph:
Data format dialog for Upright hydrostatics table and graph
Upright Hydrostatics
Upright hydrostatics lets you determine the hydrostatic parameters of the hull at a range of drafts. one or more graphs may be shown – select the graph to be displayed from the pull-down menu in the Graph window. at zero or other fixed trim.

When a design is first opened.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Initial and final drafts can be entered. The Vertical Centre of Gravity is also required for the calculation of GM etc (if the vessel is trimmed.
Upright Hydrostatics Environment Options
The following environments can be applied to the upright hydrostatics analysis:
Density from the Analysis menu Wave Form (if any) Damage (or Intact) from the Analysis toolbar
Upright Hydrostatic Results
Page 79
. together with the number of drafts to be used. Similarly the VCG defaults to the height of the DWL. the LCG also affects these measurements). the initial draft defaults to the draft at the DWL in Maxsurf.

to ensure accurate evaluation of the criteria.
Large Angle Stability Settings
The following analysis settings apply for Large Angle Stability Analysis:
Displacement and Centre of Gravity using the Loadcase window Heel from the Analysis menu.
Large Angle Stability
Large angle stability lets you determine the hydrostatic parameters of the hull at a range of heel angles either with or without trim or free-to-trim.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
The curves of form are shown on a separate graph and the sectional area may be show for any of the drafts: see Select View from Analysis Data on page 159. select range for analysis Trim (fixed or free) from the Analysis menu
If criteria are being evaluated.
Page 80
.
Choosing Large Angle Stability
Select Large Angle Stability from the Analysis menu or toolbar. the heel range and heel angle steps should be chosen accordingly.

Large Angle Stability Environment Options
The following environments can be applied to the large angle stability analysis:
Fluid simulation of tank fluids centre of gravity Density Wave Form (if any) Damage (or Intact) from the Analysis toolbar Stability Criteria
Large Angle Stability Results
Large Angle Stability Analysis results are:
Hydrostatic data table for each angle of heel GZ curve Dynamic stability (GZ area) curve Graph of hydrostatic parameters against heel angle Graph of max. However. safe steady heel angle Stability Criteria evaluation Downflooding angles to key points. Some criteria require calculations of GZ at negative heel. the one that would be reported in the criteria would be the one with a positive heel angle (even if the one at negative heel occurred at an angle closer to zero). The criteria are only evaluated on the side of the graph that corresponds to positive heel angles.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Note You can select positive heel direction (port or starboard). Also see: Heel on page 141 in the Analysis Settings section. For example: when using a -180 to 180 heel range. you can enter negative values and test full 360 degrees of stability if you wish. deck edge and margin line Curve of areas at each heel angle
Page 81
. the results may be two angles of vanishing stability.

features such as downflooding angle are also included on the graph. Shows the variation of hydrodynamic properties with heel angle. Large Angle stability Graph. Curve of Areas Shows the curve of areas for the currently selected heel angle (use Display | Select view from data to chose the heel angle from the GZ results table). for example the angle of downflooding or angle of deck edge immersion. Curves of Form.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Dynamic stability Graph A graph of the GZ area integrated from upright may be plotted. Once a GZ curve has been calculated. you can display the maximum safe heeling angle curves by selecting the graph type in the pull-down menu.
Page 82
. Graph of maximum safe steady heeling angles for sailing vessels These calculations are derived from the value of GZ at a critical heel angle.

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
The parameters for the calculation can be modified in the Display | Data Format dialog (this graph must be selected in the topmost window):
Page 83
.

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Analysis options for the calculation of Maximum steady heel angles (Display | Data Format). MCA require downflooding but you can include additional criteria if desired.
Page 84
.
The first part of the dialog is almost exactly the same as the “Angle of equilibrium . In the lower-left. You can also change the shape of the heeling arm curve and the gust ratio.derived wind heeling arm” criterion. This allows you to specify the critical condition that should not be exceeded due to a gust or squall. This will give you the same result as for the gust limiting line. Finally you can adjust the axis limits. This is because normally you will have computed a GZ curve for a wider heel range than you would wish to display in this graph – it is uncommon to sail a vessel with a steady heel angle of greater than 40 degrees. you can specify the squall wind speeds (you can add any number) The default gives three wind speeds of 30. It can often be useful to duplicate this criterion in the GZ criteria that are evaluated. 45 and 60kts.

it may not be possible to evaluate the curves. Full details of the calculations can be found in:
Page 85
.
To obtain smooth curves. especially at the lower heel angles – typically steps of 1degree. Under some circumstances. the GZ curve should be calculated at small intervals of heel.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
The same safe angle of heel to prevent downflooding in the event of a gust (16.5 deg) is found. the most common reason for this is that the GZ curve has not been calculated up to a sufficiently high angle of heel and downflooding angle cannot be found.

the first downflooding point is marked on the large angle stability graph. the Key Points Data table lists the downflooding angles of the margin line. and an asterisk (*) is postfixed to the downflooding point‟s name in the Key Point Data table of the Results window. Only the positive downflooding angles are displayed.gov. Adison Wesley Longman 1998. These downflooding points will appear italicised. For the margin line and deck edge the longitudinal position at which immersion first occurred is provided. Claughton. ISBN 0-582-36857-X STABILITY INFORMATION BOOKLET available from the MCA. becoming wet.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Sailing Yacht Design: Practice. Downflooding Angle After a Large Angle Stability analysis. A downflooding angle of zero degrees indicates that the key point is immersed at zero degrees of heel.mcga. In addition.uk Stability Criteria Evaluation The criteria results are displayed in the Criteria tab in the results window. Wellicome and Shenoi. For more information on how to customize the display of the criteria results. will be ignored when computing the downflooding angle. www. ed. Important: For important information on varying displacement while evaluating criteria. Emergence angles of the key points is also calculated – this is where they cross the waterline in an upward direction to become dry. deck edge and defined Key Points. please refer to the Results Window on page 185 in the reference section. the large angle stability analysis should be carried out heeling both to starboard and to port. Also see: Select View from Analysis Data on page 159. as opposed to the immersion angle which is when the cross the waterline in a downward direction. hence if there is any asymmetry.
Page 86
.
Downflooding points that are linked to tanks or compartments that are damaged in the currently selected damage case. see: Important note: heeling arm criteria dependent on displacement on page 240.

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Equilibrium Analysis

Equilibrium analysis lets you determine the draft, heel and trim of the hull as a result of the loads applied in the table in the Loadcase window. The analysis can be carried out in flat water or in a waveform.

Choosing Equilibrium Analysis

**Select Equilibrium from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu.
**

Equilibrium Analysis Settings

Displacement and Centre of Gravity using the Loadcase window

**Also see: Setting the Frame of Reference on page 18
**

Equilibrium Analysis Environment Options

**The following environments can be applied to the Equilibrium analysis:
**

Fluid simulation of tank fluid centre of gravity Density Wave Form (if any) Damage (or Intact) from the Analysis toolbar Grounding (if any) Criteria

Equilibrium Results

**Equilibrium Results are:
**

Hydrostatic data Freeboard of key points, deck edge and margin line Criteria evaluation Wave phase animation Curve of areas

Page 87

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Hydrostatic data

Height/freeboard above free surface The freeboard of each Key Point is also calculated. The freeboard is for the vessel condition currently displayed in the Design view and is recalculated after each Equilibrium and Specified Conditions analysis. The freeboard calculated is the vertical distance of the Key Point above the local free surface; hence the local free surface height if a waveform is selected will be taken into account.

Freeboard of key points.

Negative freeboards, i.e. where the Key Points are immersed are displayed in red. The longitudinal positions at which the minimum freeboard for the margin line and deck edge occurred are also specified. Stability Criteria Evaluation The criteria results are displayed in the Criteria tab in the results window.

Page 88

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Equilibrium Animation in Waves If performed in conjunction with analysis in waves, the Equilibrium analysis will automatically phase-step the waveform through a complete wavelength. This gives ten columns of results, one for each position of the wave crest. If necessary the results of this phase stepping can be animated giving a simple, quasi-static simulation of the hull motion in waves (Display | Animate). Note: This simulation only includes static behaviour at each wave phase, and does not cover dynamic or inertial forces. This can be done using Seakeeper.

Equilibrium Concept

The definition of equilibrium is “Position or state where object will remain if undisturbed”. You can distinguish equilibrium into two types:

Stable, when disturbed the object will return to its equilibrium position Unstable, when disturbed the object will not return to its equilibrium position

Stable equilibrium

Unstable equilibrium

With ships, an unstable equilibrium can exist when the KG > KM, i.e. the centre of gravity is above the metacentre (negative GMt). In real world a ship in unstable equilibrium will roll from the upright unstable equilibrium position to a position of stable equilibrium and assume an “angle of loll”. Since Hydromax starts the equilibrium analysis in upright position, it has no way of determining whether the equilibrium is stable or unstable. This means that unstable equilibrium may be found instead of the stable equilibrium. Therefore it is recommend to check the value of GMt yourself after doing an equilibrium analysis or perform a Large Angle Stability analysis and look at the slope of the GZ curve through the equilibrium heel angle.

Page 89

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Unstable equilibrium

Stable equilibrium ”Angle of loll”

The graph above shows the results of a Large Angle Stability analysis for a vessel with negative initial GMt. In practice this vessel would have a loll angle of approximately 25 degrees. If an equilibrium analysis is performed for this vessel with the transverse arm set to zero, Hydromax will find the unstable equilibrium position with zero degrees of heel. In practice, it is desirable to find the stable equilibrium position. To do this, first ensure that the tolerances (Edit | Preferences) are set as sensitive as possible. This will ensure that the smallest possible heeling moment is required to find stable equilibrium position. Then create a very small heeling moment by offsetting one of the weight items in the loadcase window TCG by just a fraction. The equilibrium analysis will now find the stable equilibrium position. Note: It is good practice to always perform a Large Angle Stability analysis as well as the equilibrium analysis to check if the vessel is in stable or unstable equilibrium. This is most likely to occur if the VCG is too high and the vessel has negative GM when upright. The problem can be overcome by offsetting the weight of the vessel transversely by a small amount.

Specified Conditions

Specified Condition analysis lets you determine the hydrostatic parameters of the vessel by specifying the heel, trim and immersion. Heel can be specified by either the angle of heel or the TCG and VCG. Trim can be specified by the actual trim measurement, or the LCG and VCG. Immersion can be specified by either the displacement or the draft.

Choosing Specified Conditions

Select Specified Conditions from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar.

Page 90

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Specified Conditions Settings

**The settings required for Specified Condition analysis are:
**

Specified Conditions from the Analysis menu

Three Sets of variables are provided, labelled Heel, Trim and Immersion. One choice must be made from each of these groups. Hydromax will then solve for the vessel hydrostatics at the conditions specified.

Values from the current loading condition can be inserted into the Centre of Gravity and Displacement fields by clicking on the Get Loadcase Values button. Also see: Setting the Frame of Reference on page 18 Specified Conditions on page 145 in the Analysis Settings section. Note: If the fluid simulation has been turned on in a previous analysis mode, then the VCG obtained from the loadcase will not include the free surface correction; the “Get Loadcase Values” button will return exactly the displacement and CG as displayed in the current loadcase window. The specified condition analysis itself ignores tank fillings and does no correction to VCG.

Specified Conditions Environment Options

**The following environments can be applied to the Specified Condition analysis:
**

Density Wave Form (if any) Damage (or Intact) from the Analysis toolbar

Specified Conditions Results

The specified conditions results are the same as equilibrium analysis results except that criteria are not evaluated, i.e. hydrostatic data and key points freeboard are calculated.

Page 91

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

KN Values Analysis

KN Values Analysis allows you to determine the hydrostatic properties of the hull at a range of heel angles and displacements to produce the cross curves of stability diagram.

Choosing KN Values Analysis

**Select KN Values from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar.
**

KN Values Analysis Settings

**The analysis settings required for KN Values analysis are:
**

Heel from the Analysis menu, select range for analysis Trim (fixed or free) from the Analysis menu Displacement from the Analysis menu, select range for analysis and specify estimate of VCG if known

The heel angles used may differ from those used in the Large Angle Stability and Limiting KG analyses. To set the range of angles, select Heel from the Analysis menu. A range of displacements for KN calculations can be specified using the Displacement command from the Analysis menu. Initial and final displacements can be entered, together with the number of displacements required.

Displacement range dialog

Page 92

see: Trim on page 142 Also see KN Value Concepts on page 94
KN Values Analysis Environment Options
Density Wave Form (if any) Damage (or Intact) from the Analysis toolbar
Page 93
.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Trim dialog
The VCG can also be entered (specified from the vertical zero datum). KN calculations are calculated assuming the VCG at the baseline (K). the KN values are still presented in the normal manner with the KN values calculated as follows: KN(φ) = GZ(φ) + KG_estimated sin(φ) For information on Trim settings for KN Analysis. If a VCG estimate is specified. However if the analysis is being calculated free-to-trim and an estimate of the VCG is known. Traditionally. the accuracy of the KN calculations (for VCGs in the vicinity of the estimated VCG) may be improved by calculating the GZ curve using the estimated VCG position – this will reduce the error in the trim balance due to the vertical separation of CG and CB because this vertical separation is specified more accurately than simply assuming the VCG at the baseline.

GZ = KN .Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
KN Values Analysis Results
KN curves calualated at each heel angle
Immersion angles calculated at each displacement KN Value Concepts
The righting lever. GZ. may be calculated from the KN cross curves of stability (at the desired displacement) for any specified KG using the following equation: .KG sin(φ)
Page 94
.

See Large Angle Stability on page 80 for further details. To set the range of angles. For information on Trim settings for Limiting KG Analysis.
Limiting KG Settings
The initial conditions required for Limiting KG analysis are:
Displacement from the Analysis menu. When comparing the results of a limiting KG analysis to that of a Large Angle Stability analysis.
Limiting KG
Limiting KG analysis allows you to analyse the hull at a range of displacements to determine the highest value of KG that satisfies the selected stability criteria. see: Trim on page 142
Page 95
. After each cycle. select Heel from the Analysis menu. are extremely sensitive to the heel angle intervals that have been chosen.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
M
Z G
B’ B
N
K
Note: KN values can also be referred to as “Cross curves of stability”. select range for analysis Heel from the Analysis menu. Some criteria.
Choosing Limiting KG
Select Limiting KG from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar. the selected criteria are evaluated to determine whether the CG may be raised or must be lowered. select range for calculation of GZ curves Trim (fixed or free) from the Analysis menu
The range of displacements to be used is set in the same way as they are set in the KN analysis. The heel angles used may differ from those used in the Large Angle Stability and KN analyses. notably angle of maximum GZ. it is essential that the same heel angle intervals are used and that the free-totrim options and CG are the same. GZ curves are calculated for various KG values.

draft amidships. the minimum GM.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Note: Since Limiting KG can be quite a time consuming analysis. you must still have at least one Large Angle Stability criterion selected.
Page 96
. so if there is any form of asymmetry. Limiting KG vs displacement graph
The Limiting KG value is measured from the baseline. The Limiting KG analysis also checks that any selected equilibrium based criteria are passed at each VCG that it tries. it may be necessary to run the analysis heeling the vessel to both starboard and port (this can be done automatically in the Batch Analysis). (However this will cause some loss of accuracy. Criteria are only evaluated on the positive side of the GZ curve. However. you may wish to use a smaller number of heel angles than for the Large Angle Stability calculations.
Limiting KG Environment Options
Density Wave Form (if any) Damage (or Intact) from the Analysis toolbar Criteria
Limiting KG Results
Limiting KG analysis results are
Limiting KG values. for each displacement and the limiting criterion.) Limiting KG calculations will be significantly faster if the trim is fixed. which is not necessarily the same as the zero point. As well as the limiting KG. trim and centre of gravity are given in the results table.

Also see: Convergence Error on page 146 in the Analysis Settings section.1mm.g. Some criteria may depend on the vessel displacement and or vessel‟s VCG. the heeling arm will remain constant for all displacements (where it is perhaps desired that the heeling arm should vary with displacement. If the criteria pass. Hydromax will lower the KG and try again. If any of the criteria fail. If this tolerance is not achieved in a certain number of iterations. the correct values of displacement and VCG will be used in the evaluation of these criteria. Hydromax will move on to the next displacement. since the heeling arm is not related to the vessel displacement in its definition within Hydromax.
Page 97
. Important: For important information on varying displacement while evaluating criteria see Important note: heeling arm criteria dependent on displacement on page 240. However. this can be done in the Batch Analysis.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
After a Limiting KG analysis has completed. this is because they do not necessarily refer to the final KG and would be misleading. run a large angle stability analysis and check the selected criteria. Hydromax will raise the KG value and try to make the criteria fail. For example in the case where the heeling moment. Hydromax will continue doing this until the limiting KG value has been iterated to within 0. problems can arise if the criterion is only available in its generic form – most commonly heeling arm criteria where the heeling arm is specified simply as a lever and not as a moment. If you require the limiting KG for each criterion individually or wish to perform a Large Angle Stability and Equilibrium analysis at each of the displacements and the corresponding limiting KG. Where these values are explicit in the criterion‟s definition in Hydromax.
Limiting KG Concepts
Hydromax will iterate to a KG value that just passes all criteria you have specified in the criteria dialog. the results in the Criteria results table display “Not Analysed”. rather than the heeling arm is constant). In this case. 1 meter). Hydromax will start with a set start KG value (e.

the intact vessel is upright (zero heel). this is because when they are damaged the ballast or cargo is assumed to be totally lost from the vessel. This is not necessarily the case for equilibrium-based criteria such as freeboard requirements or for GZ-based criteria such as Angle of maximum GZ. Note that all results and input data will be assumed to be for the intact vessel. Hydromax assumes that damaged tanks lose all liquid cargo or ballast that they may have been carrying and their buoyancy is lost from the vessel – analysis is done by the lost buoyancy method rather than the added mass method. this is not seen as an additional mass because damage is computed by the lost buoyancy method.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
When performing a Limiting KG analysis.e. However. if only these types of criteria are selected. this should be zero). This is used to compute required TCG. this can be specified below (if the vessel is symmetrical and initially upright. 2.) Two methods of specifying the required TCG are possible. This functionality has been in Hydromax for many years. If the vessel has an off-centre intact TCG. Current loadcase specifies initial loading of damaged tanks: This means that the currently selected Loadcase will be used to define the volume of cargo or ballast in tanks before damage is applied. it is often required to specify a required TCG. For Limiting KG calculations for a damaged vessel where some of the damaged tanks were initially non-empty. the mass and CG of the intact vessel after deducting the masses of cargo or ballast in any tanks that will be damaged. (Although seawater enters these damaged areas. at least one GZbased criterion must also be selected. The tanks would generally provide a transverse moment that must be balanced by the mass of the vessel. That is the specified displacement will be that of the intact vessel and that the resulting LCG. Hydromax will evaluate any equilibriumbased criteria that are selected for testing and act accordingly. The second option is for the used to specify the required TCG directly. which must therefore be offset. Note that we are only concerned about the tanks that will be damaged and that initially contain cargo or ballast. TCG and KG will also be for the intact vessel.
Example calculations
It is probably simplest to explain this functionality by means of an example. The second method was available in older versions of Hydromax and it is the first method that provides the additional functionality: 1.
Limiting KG for damage conditions with initially loaded tanks
The set up of the Limiting KG analysis parameters has been modified to facilitate setting up the required TCG when calculating the Limiting KG for a damaged vessel where liquid cargo tanks initially carrying cargo or ballast water are damaged. In this case. This is because under most circumstances.
Page 98
. If this method is selected Hydromax will look at the mass and CG of cargo or ballast in tanks which will be damaged during the analysis. Hydromax may have difficulty in finding a true limiting KG and specify convergence errors. This is because to perform a sensible search. i. Hydromax assumes that raising the VCG will make criteria more likely to fail and that reducing the VCG will make the criteria more likely to pass. however the specified displacement and CG corresponds to that of the intact vessel with damaged tanks empty. Hydromax must have at least one criterion that will improve by reducing the VCG.

Importantly we shall also specify that the current loadcase should be used to determine the required TCG and because the vessel is symmetrical. A vessel with a port-side tank that are initially full will have this tank damaged. This is done by defining a loadcase and switching to the intact mode to specify the tank filling levels. but with an initial vessel trim of 0. This is done in the Displacements dialog:
Displacement dialog Setting the Trim options
We now need to specify the trim options we wish to use. the specified TCG is zero:
Page 99
.25m by the stern.
Use a loadcase to specify the initial quantities of fluids in tanks Setting the Displacements
Secondly we need to define the displacement range we wish to calculate the Limiting KG for.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
The following sample calculations demonstrate how the new Limiting KG options may be used. We wish to find the maximum VCG that the intact vessel may have in order to pass the selected stability criteria. Here we have specified that the tank is 80% full before the damage is applied.
Initial tank loadings
First we need to define how much cargo is in the tanks that will be damaged. In this case we shall use free to trim.

the stability criteria that need to be passed and a suitable range of heel angles to be computed to evaluate the criteria. so the analysis should be done in this direction. It must be remembered that these are KG results not VCG so when checking the VCG must be calculated. We also need to determine which way we should heel the vessel and in doubt should try heeling the vessel in both directions to see which will give the worst result.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Trim and TCG specification Running the Analysis
We now need to select the damage case to be evaluated. In this case the baseline (K) is at – 356.845mm
Page 100
.
Results from Limiting KG analysis
Limiting KG results Validation of results
The results can be validated by completing a Large Angle Stability analysis with the specified displacement and CG. In this case large port-side tanks are to be damaged. these are filled significantly above the waterline so loss of ballast from these tanks will cause a list to Starboard.

it can be seen that (as expected) the stability criterion is passed with a very small margin.
Page 101
.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Model baseline
Computed VCG values
We can now set up a loadcase for one of the displacements. Remember that these are the intact vessel displacement and CG:
Loadcase to check calculated Limiting KG
When the analysis is run.

Traditionally the criterion of margin line immersion is used to compute the Floodable Length curve. either initial trim or specified LCG) Displacement. but the centre of gravity can either be specified directly in the Trim dialog or it is computed from the specified initial trim. The permeability dialog is used to specify the permeabilities to be used for the Floodable Length analysis. The results are presented as the maximum length of compartment plotted (or tabulated) against the longitudinal position of the compartment‟s centre. For information on Trim settings for Floodable Length Analysis.
Page 102
.
Floodable Length Analysis Settings
The initial conditions required for Floodable Length analysis are:
Trim (free-to-trim. The range of displacements to be used is set in the same way as they are set in the KN and Limiting KG analyses. This means that the vertical separation of CG and CB is accounted for in the trim balance.
Choosing Floodable Length
Select Floodable Length from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Criterion is passed with a small margin
Floodable Length
The Floodable Length analysis allows you to calculate the longitudinal distribution of maximum length of compartments that can be flooded with the vessel still passing specified equilibrium criteria. the permeability is applied over the entire length of the vessel and is also applied to the free-surface when calculating the reduction of waterplane area and inertia. The analysis is always carried out free-to-trim. The VCG must also be specified since the Floodable length analysis is very sensitive to accurate trim calculations. see: Trim on page 142. select range Bulkhead location (if applicable)
1. The Floodable Length may be computed for a range of displacements and compartment permeabilities. select range and specify VCG Permeability.

All compartment standards up to the maximum specified will be plotted. Hydromax will treat the vessel sinking or the trim exceeding +/-89º as a criterion failure.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
This permeability is unrelated to the permeability when defining compartments and is only used for floodable length calculations.
Floodable Length results
The results of the analysis are given in tabulated format at the stations defined in the Maxsurf Design Grid as well as graphical format.) There are several graph plot options available in the Data | Data format dialog (when the floodable length graph is topmost).
Floodable Length Environment Options
Density Wave Form (if any) Damage: no damage case may be selected as this is automatically defined by the analysis. The vessel profile (centreline buttock) may also be displayed. These are used to compute the Floodable Lengths. The tabulated data is linearly interpolated from the graphical data.
Note that internally.
Page 103
. (The raw graph data can be accessed by double clicking the graph. select which criteria should be evaluated
Criteria must be specified from the analysis menu. The Intact condition is automatically selected and the Damage toolbar is disabled Criteria from the Analysis menu.

The length of this flooded compartment is increased section-by-section until one of the criteria is failed. The compartment is then moved progressively forward along the vessel. you can quickly adjust the bulkhead locations so that the vessel meets the required compartment standard.
Floodable Length Concepts
The analysis is performed by defining a flooded compartment. The vessel sinking or the criteria failing in the intact condition could cause this. Vessel profile (shown in light grey) Floodable Length Bulkheads locations are specified in a table in the Input window.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Floodable lengths graph options:
Fix the y-axis so that it is the same scale as the x-axis. with the centre of the compartment at a section under investigation.
Page 104
. Plot the different compartment standards up to a specified maximum value.
If the analysis is unable to find a condition where the vessel passes the selected criteria. This process may be visualised by turning on the display of the Hydromax sections. The graph updates in real time as you adjust the bulkhead locations so once you have calculated the floodable lengths. the following dialog will be displayed.

See the Loadcase Longitudinally Distributed Loads section on page 45 for more details.
Longitudinal Strength
Longitudinal Strength lets you determine the bending moments and shear forces created in the hull due to the loads applied in the Loadcase window. A trapezium shaped distributed load is derived from the centre and fore and aft extents of the load.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Note: Speed versus Accuracy The analysis will be both considerably more accurate and slower with a larger number of sections in the Hydromax model. The speed of the analysis can be increased quite considerably by increasing the allowable tolerances in the Edit | Preferences dialog. The analysis can be carried out in flat water or in a specified waveform. These are used to specify the longitudinal extents of the load. it is recommended that a minimum of 100 sections be used for most situations. allowable shears and moments from Input window
Page 105
. two extra columns appear in the Loadcase window.
Choosing Longitudinal Strength
Select Longitudinal Strength from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar.
Longitudinal Strength Environment Options
Density Wave Form (if any) Damage (or Intact) from the Analysis toolbar Grounding (if any) Criteria.
Longitudinal Strength Settings
The initial conditions required for Longitudinal Strength analysis are:
Displacement and Centre of Gravity using the Loadcase window Distributed loads using the Loadcase window
When the Longitudinal Strength analysis mode is selected.

Upward acting forces such as buoyancy and grounding reactions are given negative values. Downward acting masses. allowable shear forces and bending moments are overlayed on the graph. From these. damage and non-buoyant volumes and grounding loads. are given positive values. Damaged tanks and compartments reduce the buoyancy. buoyancy. For more information on how Hydromax can take fluids in tanks into account see Fluids Analysis Methods on page 148. shear force and bending moment along the length of the hull are computed. such as normal masses in the loadcase or lost buoyancy due to damage. Grounding reaction Loas buoyancy due to damaged tanks and compartments and Non-Byoyant Volumes (NBV) Mass + Buoyancy + Grounding + Damage (and NBV)
x
Shear Force =
NetLoad ( x)dx
AftSt
Page 106
.
Longitudinal Strength Results
The output from the longitudinal strength calculations is a graph of mass.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Note that Hydromax will always use the fluid simulation method when performing a longitudinal strength analysis. If defined.
Name of Curve Mass Buoyancy
Grounding Damage/NBV Net Load Shear
Description Vessel mass / unit length Buoyancy distribution / unit length = immersed cross sectional area * density. the net load.

Note: For the purposes of strength calculations. Also see:
Page 107
. Tanks are taken into account as distributed loads as well based on their mass distribution that is calculated from the tank sections. Without this. at a range of capacities.
Tank Calibration Input
Tank definitions and boundaries Permeability Fluid type
The above data are specified in the Compartment and Sounding Pipes definition tables. any point loads in the loadcase will be applied as a load evenly distributed 100mm either side of the position of the load.
Choosing Tank Calibrations
Select Tank Calibrations from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar.
Tank Calibrations
Tank Calibration allows you to determine the properties of the tanks you have defined in the Compartment window. alternatively double-clicking in the graph will give you all the data as plotted. You can display this table by choosing Longitudinal Strength from the Results sub-menu under the Window menu.
This data is also displayed in the “Long. Note Make sure you have defined sections in your model in Maxsurf. the longitudinal strength table will be empty. Strength” tab in the Results window.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Moment Bending Moment = Allowable shear and moment
x
ShearForce( x)dx
AftSt
Allowable shear and bending moments as specified in the input Modulus table.

If Compartments or Non-buoyant volumes have also been calibrated.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Relative Density of Tank Fluids on page 59
Tank Calibration Settings
Trim range.
You may chose which columns are displayed using the Data Format dialog:
Page 108
. they are shown in grey. angle or trim measurement Heel angle range Which items to be calibrated: Analysis | Calibration options dialog
Analysis | Calibration options dialog: Compartments and Non-buoyant volumes may be calibrated if desired Tank Calibration Environment Options
Calibration intervals – see Sounding Pipes
Tank Calibration Results
If a range of heel (and / or trim) angles have been defined. you may select which are displayed in the results table and graph using the Results toolbar.

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
In the Window | Graphs menu each tank can be selected for display in the Graph window. These include the tank inertias about their centre of gravity.
Tank calibration calculations
A number of data are calculated for the tanks. the wetted surface area of the tank and the free-surface area.
Page 109
. For more information see Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference.

there are ranges of tank volumes that will show the same sounding/ullage. nearempty tank
Figure c Trim by bow. (The same effect can occur if the sounding pipe does not reach the lowest or highest point in the tank – remember that this can change as the vessel trims. the top of the tank is only included when the tank is pressed-full. The following notation is used: x longitudinal-axis y transverse-axis z vertical axis
Calculation of tank inertias. Here all tank filling levels will have a valid sounding. Sounding pipes and tank calibration results
If the vessel is trimmed. with the vessel at zero trim.
Page 110
. which is effectively what is happening in the figures below).Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
The wetted surface area of the tank includes only that part of the tank that is wet by the fluid in it at the corresponding sounding level. These points occur when the tank is near empty or near full. near-full tank
Figure a shows a sounding pipe that extends the whole height of the tank. will exacerbate this phenomenon):
Figure a Zero trim
Figure b Trim by bow. The inertias are in fact “volume inertias” in that they are not multiplied by the density of the fluid in the tank. Figure b shows the vessel with (bow down) trim and a small amount of fluid in the tank. see below (increasing the trim. Here there will be a range of tank filling levels which all show zero sounding. where M and dm indicate an integration over the volume of fluid in the tank.

not the vertical step of the tank level). the last two results are below the bottom of the sounding pipe. 95%. sounding pipe does not cover full range of tank capacities.0m). there are four results which all have a sounding of 1. 0.9%.9%. the sounding will be given as zero. 10%. this gives intervals of {0%. 99. In the results out lined in red.
Sounding intervals
The sounding intervals for the calibration table may be:
Automatic.9%. Here there will be a range of tank filling levels that all show maximum sounding.0m but different capacities – the fluid levels are all above the top of the sounding pipe.1%. type “A”.1%. see below. 0. To specify the interval. if the 1% level does not intersect the sounding pipe.
In a similar way. Similarly if the 97. … . In the blue results. but with the tank nearly full.
Tank calibrations for severely trimmed vessels. 97. The profile view of the tank in the trimmed vessel is shown on the right. 99. you will get readings which have the same capacity but different soundings. 10%. These effects will be noted in the tank calibration results if they are extreme enough since Hydromax always adds calibrations at 1%. giving soundings of 0. Alternatively you may specify a precise sounding step (this is the step along the sounding pipe. 95%. the maximum sounding will be displayed. … . if the sounding pipe extends above or below the maximum and minimum fluid levels. 98% and 100% full. User defined Fredyn – {0%. 5%. 90%. 85%. 98% and 100% full levels do not intersect the sounding pipe.9%. “Max” or a numerical value in the “Calibration Spacing” column of the Sounding Pipe definition table. 5%. the sounding pipe is in the middle of the tank and extends from the bottom to the top of the tank. only – {100%}
In automatic mode the increments along the sounding pipe are chosen depending on the height of the tank to give approximately 20 soundings. 85%. 100%} of the full capacity of the tank.
Page 111
. 90%. 100%} Max. Finally a “Fredyn” sounding list may be generated.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Figure c shows the vessel with the same trim.0m but different capacities (the last but one calibration point is the fluid remaining in the tank when the sounding is 0. “F”.

this sounding pipe starts at the vessel zero point and projects vertically upwards. To use these intervals.0. Regulation 12A: Oil fuel tank protection Resolution MEPC.
Fredyn calibration intervals
The tank calibrations normally follow regular length intervals along the sounding pipe. 10.
Fredyn sounding pipe
The tank calibration intervals required by Fredyn are (as a percentage of full capacity) {0. 95.0. If only the 100% full values are required “Max” may be specified for the calibratin spacing.1. A common sounding pipe is used for “Fredyn tanks”. ….Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Note: Backward compatibility with earlier versions of Hydromax If the model is saved with Fredyn calibration intervals and is loaded into an earlier version of Hydromax.
Page 112
. all soundings for “Fredyn tanks” use this common sounding pipe.0. you must change the calibration intervals to Automatic or a positive value otherwise Hydromax will crash during the tank calibration analysis. Regulation 23: Accidental oil outflow performance Define the tanks in the Compartment definition window then choose the MARPOL analysis mode.117(52). 90.0.
MARPOL Options dialog (Analysis menu)
The MARPOL options dialog allows the user to select the tanks that should be included in the analysis for both MARPOL Regulations.141(54).
MARPOL Oil Outflow
MARPOL probabilistic oil outflow calculation may be computed according to the following MARPOL regulations: Resolution MEPC. 99. 5. type “Fredyn” in the Calibration Spacing column of the Sounding Pipes Definition table:
Specification of Fredyn calibration intervals
Note that Compartments and non-buoyant volumes are always calibrated at the calibration intervals required by Fredyn. Seltect the Reolution and tanks to be included in the analysis in the MARPOL options (Analysis menu) dialog (see below).9}.

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Tank selection for the MARPOL analysis
The list of selected tanks is different for both Regulations since Regulation 12A is for fuel tanks and Regulation 23 applies to cargo tanks. When you select a Regulation with the radio buttons. Further each tank has the option for being included in the computation for outflow due to side. For this reason the data input and results are combined in one table. Due to the nature of some of the measurements. the corresponding list of selected tanks will be displayed in the grid. The table is in the MARPOL tab of the Results window:
Page 113
.
MARPOL Tank measurements
If the “Update all tank measurements” check-box is ticked.
MARPOL Results and additional Input
Because the calculations of the MARPOL analysis are very quick they are done in realtime as input data is edited by the user. then Hydromax will attempt to measure the required tank parameters (over-writing any that have previously been manually edited). it is not possible to guarantee that Hydromax will be 100% accurate in interpreting the measurements as defined in the MARPOL documents.and bottom-damage. for this reason the user should carefully review the values generated by Hydromax.

Parameters that can be edited are shown in black.
Page 114
. which affects bottomdamage outflow in Regulation 12A. Furthermore the inert gas overpressure may be specified for Regulation 23. please refer to the relevant IMO instruments. Regulation 23 calculates the nominal oil density as the deadweight divided by the total tank capacity.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
MARPOL calculations: Results Window
The table is split into three parts: main Hull parameters. the nominal fuel oil density is specified by the user. the deadweight is computed as the difference in displacements between the deepest loadline draft and the lightship draft (or may be specified directly). those which cannot are shown in grey. the lightship draft is used to calculate the deadweight for Regulation 23 and the partial draft.
Main Hull Parameters
Different parameters are shown depending on the Regulation being used. For Regulation 12A. If a parameter is modified. The deepest loadline draft is taken as the DWL draft. the default being 1000kg/m3. oil outflow due to Side damage and finally oil outflow due to Bottom damage. it is possible to revert back to the Hydromax calculated value or default by typing „H‟ or double clicking:
Reverting back to default/calculated parameter values
For full definitions of the parameters.

Note: Hydromax will overwrite user-edited tank parameters! Remember that any data that you change manually will be overwritten by Hydromax if the “Update all tank measurements” option is ticked in the MARPOL options dialog. It is advisable to copy any manually edited data to a spreadsheet or text file if you only want to update the measurements of some tanks. The user-editable tank parameters are the main dimensions which affect the probability of damage. it is also saved in the main . MSC. then bottomdamage tanks. For tanks which are to be considered for both side.216(82) and IMO MSC.19(58) is applicable to dry cargo vessels only.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Main hull parameters required for each Regulation Tank Parameters
Calculations are shown further down. these values are linked so it is only necessary to edit them in one location.
For full definitions of the parameters.
Page 115
.damage. These should be carefully checked since these can be difficult for Hydromax to automatically measure in some cases. listing first side-damage tanks.
Probabilistic Damage
IMO Probabilistic damage
Hydromax support for Probabilistic damage according to both IMO MSC. please refer to the relevant IMO instruments Saving
With the MARPOL sheet active. the MARPOL data may be saved.19(58) .hmd file when the design is saved.and bottom.216(82) can be applied to both dry cargo and passenger ships whilst MSC.

Maxsurf model is loaded as normal User defines (first selecting File | New to open the Probabilistic damage data table) other ship data required for the probabilistic damage analysis in the Damage window | Global table. The vessel‟s attained subdivision index is the sum of the products of the pfactors with their corresponding s-factors. The same log file is used for each analysis so it is important to either change the name or copy the file at the end of the analysis if the results are to be kept.
Flow through – Typical Use-case
The following section shows how the probabilistic damage analysis might typically be used. The attained subdivision index can then be compared with a required subdivision index to see if the vessel achieves a sufficiently high degree of safety. the p-factors Damage window | p Factors table are automatically calculated and displayed as the zone data is modified. the user may decide to refine the zone arrangement. a p-factor can be calculated. A first pass at this can be automatically generated using the Case | Extent of damage command.
During the analysis each GZ curve and details on the evaluation of the s-factor may be saved in a log file. The GZ curves are calculated for a large number of different damage conditions and several load cases. When the Zones have been defined the user can then define which tanks are damaged in each zone in the Damage window | Zone damage table. The user can then perform the probabilistic damage analysis. User defines the bulkheads and deck values for single and groups of adjacent zones. The log file parameters may be specified in the Edit | Preferences dialog:
Page 116
.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Probabilistic damage – Principles
Essentially the probabilistic damage analysis performs a number of large angle stability analyses and uses the IMO criterion to determine an s-factor that depends on certain parameters of the GZ curve. User defines the damage zones they wish to consider in the Damage window | Zones table Once 2 and 3 have been completed. This is then compared with the required index. It is useful to have this interaction because if the p Factor is too large for a particular zone. Hydromax runs a large angle stability analysis for each combination of loadcase and damage and collates the results to calculate the attained index. For each condition.

Page 117
.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Probabilistic damage result logging options (Edit | Preferences) Finding the probabilistic damage input sheets.
The probabilistic damage input sheets are in the damage window after the normal damage condition sheet.

these data would be lost.
Bring one of the probabilistic damage tables to the front to enable File menu items Probabilistic damage – Inputs
In this section we shall look at the input parameters required for the probabilistic damage analysis. For this reason it is also possible to save the probabilistic damage data as a separate file (in a similar way to the other Hydromax input data). most of the settings that are applicable to the Large Angle Stability analysis are also applicable to the Probabilistic Damage Analysis. However this is new to version 14.1 and if the file were read into an earlier version of Hydromax and saved. ensure that one of the probabilistic damage data sheets in the Damage window is on top.hmd file. To load or save the probabilistic damage data as a separate file.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
A Probabilistic Damage toolbar button is available in the Windows toolbar which will take the user back to the last used probabilistic damage input table:
Probabilistic damage – Saving input parameters
The probabilistic damage data is saved in the .
Settings for Probabilistic damage GZ curve calculation
Since the analysis essentially consists of a large number of GZ curve calculations. Chose the Probabilistic Damage analysis mode from the pull-down or Analysis menu:
Page 118
.

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Selecting Probabilistic Damage anlysis mode

Once you have selected the probabilistic damage analysis mode, you can define the heel angle range and trim settings to be used as well as any environmental parameters such as waveform (as well as the fluid analysis method to be used). During probabilistic damage analysis, it is possible to check the vessel heeling to both port and starboard. This is useful if the tanks contain ballast or cargo and it is uncertain in which direction the vessel will list when damaged (or indeed the vessel may list to different directions depending on the loadcase and damage). Hydromax will calculate the GZ curve in both directions and, if the criteria can be evaluated in both directions, the lowest s-factor will be taken. If the criteria can only be evaluated in one direction, then this value for the s-factor will be taken. It is recommended to evaluate at least one negative heel angle and the direction of heel should correspond to the side of the vessel that is being damaged (see below):

Page 119

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Heel angle specification (as per Large Angle Stability)

Use either fixed trim or free to trim to loadcase. s-factor calculation

The s-factors are calculated by stability criteria. The Probailistic damage analysis has its own set of criteria (though the same parent criteria are also available in the large angle stability analysis criteria). When the analysis mode has been set to Proababilistic Damage, you will see the criteria that are used for this analysis. The number of parent criteria is reduced to only those which can calculate the s-factor. Also some “Default” criteria are supplied, you can add or modify these should you so desire. When running the analysis, Hydromax will look at the probabilistic criteria that have been selected and warn you if there are any problems.

Page 120

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Probabilistic Damage Criteria Manager with Parent and Default criteria

**The following rules should be observed when defining the probabilistic damage criteria:
**

As with the normal criteria manager, changes made to the parent (bold) criteria are not saved. If you need to modify any of the criteria you should make your own copies of the parent criteria A set of Default criteria are provided – these can be modified and changes will be saved. Only one criterion should be selected and it should correspond to the IMO Resolution being used. (Strictly, you may have up to one of each MSC.216(82) or MSC.19(58) criteria selected and Hydromax will automatically use the appropriate one – according to the selected Resolution in the Global sheet – but for clarity, it is probably best practive to just have a single criterion selected.) The criteria should always be selected for Damage analysis. Hydromax will automatically update some of the criteria parameters according to corresponding parameters in the probabilistic damage setup. However it is still good practice to review criteria parameters before starting the analysis. This is particularly true for the MSC.216(82) Resolution where the vessel type and heeling moments must be defined correctly. The criteria window can be closed with either of the close buttons.

For further information on how the s-factors are calculated and the different parameters, please refer to the Criteria Help section for the appropriate criteria (and heeling arms).

Main parameters and calculation of required subdivision index

The other parameters required for the probabilistic damage analysis are defined in the last four tables in the Damage window:

Page 121

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Additional tables in the Damage window define the remaining Probabilistic damage input data

Depending on the selected IMO Resolution, different rows and columns will be displayed in the tables; both MSC.216(82) and MSC.19(58) are provided, A.265 VIII is not included. Tool tips have been added to provide a more detailed explanation of the input parameters and also the options available.

Tool tips for Global data sheet Global table

This table is used to define the main parameters for the probabilistic damage anlysis as well as provide some intermediate calculations. Input data are shown in black whilst results are shown in grey. Depending on the Resolution and vessel type, some rows may be hidden.

Page 122

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Global table – MSC.216(82) Dry Cargo vessel and Passenger vessel

Page 123

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax

Global table – MSC.19(58) Dry Cargo

Row Resolution -MSC.216(82) or MSC.19(58) Deepest subdivision draft (summer loadline) Loadcase Partial subdivision draft Loadcase Light service draft Loadcase Type -- Cargo or Passenger Lifeboat capacity N_1 Permitted max. num. of persons in excess of N_1: N_2 max. moulded breadth at or below deepest subdivision draft: B max. number of adjacent zones to consider min. p-Factor of damage to consider

Page 124

Description IMO Resolution to be used.

Name of loadcase that defines the vessel at the deepest subdivision draft. Name of loadcase that defines the vessel at the partial subdivision draft. Name of loadcase that defines the vessel at the light subdivision draft. not required for MSC.19(58). Vessle type. not required for MSC.19(58). Number of persons for whom lifeboats are provided. required for MSC.216(82), pax. Vessel only. Number of persons inclusing officers and crew that the vessel is permitted to carry in excess of N_1. required for MSC.216(82), pax. Vessel only. Parameter not currently used.

Specifies the upper limit of the number of adjacent zones that should be damaged. If you wish to limit the analysis by p-factor only, then specify the number of zones here (see min p-factor below). Specifies the minimum p-factor for which an analysis should be performed. The maximum a condition can contribute to the

use Edit | Add or Delete (or Ctrl+A or Del key. trim angle to consider Limit vertical extent of damage? max. The extent of damage is assumed to go all the way to the centreline but you may specify which side of the vessel is damaged. If the vessel trim exceeds this value. The subdivision length is taken as the limits of the length defined by the zones. Conditions whose pfactor is below this minimum will not be evaluated. If desired the vertical extent of damage (when automatically generating the zone damage) can be limited.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
max. Fore and aft extents of the zone boundaries are input by the user and the length and centre of the zone is automatically calculated. This can speed up the analysis. If the the p-factor is very small the contribution to the attained index will be negligible and there is little point in carrying out the analysis. It is normal to begin the Zone numbering at the stern. this can speed up the analysis. as are the zone names. the boundaries of adjacent zones are automatically updated if required. If you wish the analysis to be purely limited by the number of adjacent zones (see above) then specify a small negative value.
Damage zones defined by fwd and aft boundaries
Zones may be shown in the drawing views (this display option is only available in Probabilistic Damage analysis mode):
Page 125
. This will ensure that conditions with zero p-factor will still be evaluated. vertical extent of damage Damaged side -Starboard or Port
Zone 1 located at bow or stern?
Longitudinal Zone definition
attained index is the p-factor. with a number of complete rows selected) to add or delete zones. Specifies which side of the vessel will be damaged (when automatically generating the zone damage). As for other similar tables. The heel direction in the Heel setup should correspond to the side of the vessel being damaged. then the s-factor will be taken as zero (irrespective of the GZ curve). If desired the vertical extent of damage (when automatically generating the zone damage) can be limited. but the option to start from the bow is also allowed in Hydromax
The next table (Zones) allows for the definition of the longitudinal damage zones.

The last column shows whether a particular condition will be tested (if the p-factor is sufficiently large and the maximum number of adjacent zones is not exceeded). This will help the user to determine the maximum number of adjacent zones that should be analysed. A subtotal for the pfactor for a given number of adjacent zones is given as well as a cumulative to total for all the p-factors. All combinations of adjacent zones are calculated at this point. side damage) shown in pink. it probably makes more sense to limit the analysis by specifying a desired minimum p-factor rather than a number of adjacent zones. In practice.216(82) or MSC.19(58) made in the Global table. This can easily be done by specifying the maximum number of adjacent zones as the number of zones defined. The columns displayed depends on the choice of Resolution: MSC. P-Factors
From the damage zone calculations.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Probabilistic damage zones (stbd. the probability of damaging a longitudinal zone or group of adjacent zones is calculated as well as the cumulative probability.
Page 126
.

I have followed IMO notation by specifying the penetration depth from the side-shell (rather than specifying the offset from the centerline). This is because where the side-shell or bulkhead is not parallel to the centerline. the inner limit being at a distance side-shell offset minus b from the centreline.
Page 127
. A column is provided for the user to specify the side-shell offset (from the centerline) and this is used only to draw the transverse extents of the damage zone. it is also possible to define sub-zones due to longitudinal bulkheads (transverse subdivision) and decks (vertical subdivision). Note that there is one extra r-factor than the number of bulkheads – this represents the probability of damaging to the centerline. The b-values are defined not only for each individual zone.
Transverse sub-zone definition and R-Factors
Transverse sub-zone definition allows the user to limit the damage penetration to a certain distance into the vessel towards the centerline. but also for groups of adjacent zones. the zone will be damaged up to (but not across) the centreline. The r-factors are then calculated for each of the b-values that have been defined. If no b-values are specified. there is a special way of calculating the b-value and this needs to be done for each set of adjacent zones. The side-shell offset value defaults to the maximum halfbeam of the vessel. measured from the side-shell.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
p-factor calculations for individual and groups of zones Sub zones due to transverse and vertical subdivision
As well as the main longitudinal subdivision. The sum of all r-factors should be unity (a check is provided).

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Longitudinal bulkhead definition and corresponding r-factors
Page 128
.

The currently selected zone or sub-zone is shown in bold as well as any damage for that zone.
Clicking in a zone or sub-zone in the table highlights the zone graphically
Page 129
. selected zone shown in bold.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Visualisation of zones and sub-zones: sub-zones shown dashed. This can also be seen in rendered view to quite effectively visualize the damage.

the v-factors will be automatically recalculated for the loadcase under consideration.
Page 130
. Thus we introduce the concept of the currently selected Loadcase for the displayed vfactors. The corresponding v-factors are calculated. but these also depend on the draft of the vessel. Note that during the full probabilistic damage analysis.
Loadcase for v-factor calculations is selected by clicking on the desired loadcase in the Global table.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Vertical sub-zone definition and V-Factors
Similarly decks may be defined to create vertical subdivision of the zones. The loadcase for v-factor calculations is selected by clicking on the desired loadcase in the Global table.

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Deck definition and corresponding v-factors
Page 131
.

Definition of whats damaged in each zone
Once the zones are defined the user can select the Case | Extent of damage command and this will automatically generate the zone damage according to which tanks lie within the zone boundaries. This stage is not required for the probabilistic analysis. Once the automatic damage is defined.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Zone damage
The zone damage sheet specifies which tanks are damaged for a given zone.
Automatic definition of damage for each zone
Additionally the user may automatically generate damage cases for the Zone damage that has been defined damage configurations within the maximum number of adjacent zones range and above the minimum p-factor will be added. if the pfactor exceeds the minimum values specified (again in the Global tab). Damage cases will be added up to the maximum number of adjacent zones specified in the Global tab. The “Zone damage” tab of the Damage window must be on top to enable this command. but has been added for convenience should the user wish to manually run large angle stability analyses for the same damage cases. From this Hydromax can work out what should be damaged for any combination of adjacent damaged zones. this can be modified by the user should this prove to be necessary (or it can be defined from scratch by the user). The Damage window must be on top for this command to work.
Page 132
.

but those of the currently selected zone. The zone is selected by clicking in the corresponding column of the Zone Damage table.
Page 133
.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Automatic creation of damage cases using the damage defined for each zone Visualization of zone damage
When in Probabilistic damage analysis mode the damaged tanks and compartments displayed are not those of the current damage case.

but they are not updated if they are then changed in the Compartment definition window.216(82) Regulation 7-3. When you generate new probabilistic damage data.216(82) Regulation 7-3.2:
MSC. By default.
Page 134
. the permeabilities are the same as the damage permeabilities given in the Compartment Definition table. the permeability values are copied from the Compartment definition.2
Thess values are defined in the Permeabilities table in the Probabilistic Damage window.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Zone damage visualisation Probabilistic damage permeabilities
It is possible to define different permeabilities to be used for tanks and compartments for the different load conditions – as required for “cargo compartments” in MSC. but these can be overridden (for the probabilistic damage analysis only) for each draft if desired.

Hydromax will make several checks to see if the analysis parameters have been correctly set up. The following checks are made:
Page 135
. the permeability used for any damaged tanks is shown:
Probabilistic damage – Analysis
Once the analysis parameter data has been defined.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
In the log file. These are not exhaustive tests but should pick up critical errors. it is worth checking that the heel direction (Analysis | Heel) is correct and also check that the s-factor calculation parameters are corerect (Analysis | Criteria)
Pre-run checks
When trying to run the probabilistic damage analysis.

Page 136
. Basic data pertinent to calculation of the s-factor is also presented as well as a total Attained subdivision index at the bottom of the table.216(82) is being used) That the correct s-factor criterion has been selected. The required index is also shown as well as pass/fail status.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
That loadcases that have been specified exist That the vessel type is correct in the criteria (if MSC. excessive trim occur or the large angle stability analysis fail to converge. Note that only one criterion may be selected. Should the vessel sink. this is reported and the s-factor given as zero. If Hydromax finds no criteria selected but a suitable one is available (but unselected) then it will prompt the user to use this one:
Analysis
Large angle stability analyses are computed for each combination of loadcase and zone damage up to either the specified maximum number of adjacent zones or the minimum specified p-factor.

There may be a slight time delay on all of these operations while the current cycle is finished. pause and resume functions are also available in the Analysis toolbar:
Probabilistic damage Log file
All the intermediate results. Hydromax will flash and beep to indicate that the analysis has been completed. switch to a table window and maximise it to speed up the analysis. Hydromax will step through the parameter ranges specified.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Probabilistic analysis results Probabilistic damage – Future developments
The probabilistic damage analysis is still under development and new features will be added in subsequent versions of Hydromax. floating the hull to equilibrium conditions where required. If you are not interested in seeing the progress of the analysis. Hydromax will continue to calculate in the background although its speed will be reduced. Hydromax will redraw the contents of the windows to display the current hull position for each iteration. The start. Should the analysis take longer than about 45 seconds. you can resume calculation by selecting Resume Analysis from the Analysis Menu or toolbar. The logfile location is specified in the Preferences dialog:
Page 137
. Calculations may be interrupted at any time by selecting Stop Analysis from the Analysis menu or toolbar.
Starting and Stopping Analyses
To start the analysis. If you have stopped the analysis. including all the GZ results and criteria evaluation for each loadcase / damage case combination are logged during the analysis. The drawing of the vessel at each step of the analysis can be quite time consuming. choose Start Analysis from the Analysis menu or toolbar. You can also switch application by clicking in the window of any background program.

You may also choose to perform a Large Angle Stability and Equilibrium analysis at the final VCG. There are other options which allow the analysis to be performed heeling to both port and starboard. With a single command. Limiting KG and KN calculations can be made for each damage condition. The aim of the batch processing function is to:
Page 138
. Hydromax will run Large Angle Stability and Equilibrium analyses for all combinations of load and damage cases. Further.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Probabilistic Damage analysis logging
Batch Analysis
Batch Analysis Concepts
Hydromax has basic batch processing capability. For the Limiting KG analysis you may also check the Limiting KG for each criterion individually.

especially where results for all individual criteria are required. the Batch Analysis is started
Analysis | Start Batch Analysis
Page 139
. Facilitate export of the data from Hydromax and import into MS Excel for post processing and report generation.
Before you can perform a Batch Analysis it is recommended that you run a number of Analyses manually to check whether the Model has been defined correctly and all Analysis Settings and Environment conditions have been set correctly.
Batch Analysis – Procedures
Once the loadcases. Enable Limiting KG and KN analyses to be performed automatically for all damage cases. i.e. Facilitate testing with heel to port and starboard for vessels with asymmetric loading and/or damage conditions (or hulls). Facilitate time consuming Limiting KG analyses. criteria and analysis parameters for the required analyses have been set up.: analysis parameters. damage cases.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Provide the user with a simple and consistent way of carrying out Large Angle Stability and Equilibrium analyses on a large number of load and damage cases. file name etc. key points. Provide all relevant results and the data required to be able to reproduce the runs.

When the option for Sending the results to Word is selected in the Edit | Preferences dialog.
Tip: Under most operating systems. For example. heel angles etc. it is not possible to go back to the results for a specific analysis from within Hydromax.5 m then select Analysis | Batch Analysis
Batch Analysis Environment Options (Criteria)
Any Analysis Environment Options specified prior to a Batch Analysis will be used during the Batch Analysis. see Important note: heeling arm criteria dependent on displacement on page 240. are set in the normal way for each analysis type included in the Batch analysis. Also see: Reporting on page 155. it is advisable not to include the results in the report. it is possible that your computer will become very slow to respond and under some circumstances with certain operating systems even cause Hydromax to crash. you will be prompted to enter the name and location of the file where Hydromax will write the results of the batch analysis. For large batch analysis.
Page 140
.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Batch analysis runs all combination of loadcases and damage cases. graphs and tables is avoided.
Batch Analysis Settings
Analysis parameters such as trim. Once the analysis is complete. if you want the Large Angle Stability to use a fixed trim of 0.
Batch Analysis Results
Before analysis starts. only the results of the final analysis will be stored in Hydromax. Important: For important information on varying displacement while evaluating criteria. the batch analysis will automatically create a Word document. Because the analyses are simply carried out one after the other. minimising Hydromax can reduce the time required to perform the calculations. Warning: Sending the results to the Report can slow down analysis considerably and also consume considerable system resources. this tab delimited text file may be imported directly into MS Excel for further processing.5 m:
first select the Large Angle Stability analysis type from the analysis menu set the trim to Fixed trim and 0. Any criteria that have been set are evaluated at the end of each analysis and the results of these are also output to the text file. The report is stored in memory and if you have insufficient memory. This is because time consuming redrawing of the design windows. At the bottom of the dialog is a check box which allows users to select whether the results of a batch analysis should go to the Report window in Hydromax as well as the batch analysis text file.

simply put 0 in the other steps. Heel angles between 180 and +180 may be specified. In hydrostatic analysis. This way the volume of the displaced hull matches the required mass and the centres of gravity and buoyancy lie one above the other in a vertical line. Combinations of both are also possible. trim and draft by varying the displacement and centre of gravity. For an equilibrium analysis all degrees of freedom are derived from the centre of gravity and Displacement. In this case the LCB and TCB (and therefore the required LCG and TCG) are calculated from the underwater hullshape at each draft. there are three degrees of freedom: Trim. In the Specified Condition Analysis any combination of the variable pairs may be specified. heel and draft with the vessel‟s mass and centre of gravity or visa versa. because vertical centre of gravity is also important and also because most of the variables are coupled. Hydromax matches the trim. or it can match a specified displacement and centre of gravity by varying the heel. The heel steps must be positive. The following table is a very simplified representation of the degrees of freedom and their weight counterpart: Degree of Freedom Draft Trim Heel Weight Displacement Longitudinal Centre of Gravity (LCG) Transverse Centre of Gravity (TCG)
1 2 3
In fact it is a rather more complicated situation than that suggested by the table above. If only one set of steps is required.
Page 141
. trim and draft. Heel and Draft. The various analysis types and settings can be thought of as setting one variable in each pair to a fixed value and deriving the others from the analysis. For example: it can match a specified heel. This section will describe the following analysis settings:
Heel Trim Draft Displacement Specified Conditions Permeability
Hydromax will allow specification of only those analysis settings that apply to the currently selected analysis type.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Analysis Settings
In the previous sections opening and preparing a model in Hydromax was discussed together with descriptions of the different Analysis types.
Heel
The Heel dialog from the analysis menu is used to specify the range of heel angles to be used for Large Angle Stability. KN and Limiting KG analyses. For example: the Upright Hydrostatics analysis consists of fixing heel and trim and stepping through a series of fixed drafts.

Hydromax will not do any curve fitting and linear interpolation will be used.. KN Analysis Limiting KG. Hydromax will fit a cubic spline to the GZ curve and use this to interpolate for values between the tested heel angles. Select Trim in the Analysis menu to bring up the Trim dialog. This is to allow roll back angle criteria to be evaluated correctly. at say -5 degrees. loading. to ensure that the equilibrium angle is identified. If any step is greater than 10 deg. (For the Specified Condition analysis. then the analysis should be carried out for both heel to starboard and heel to port to find the most pessimistic condition. damage.
Page 142
. key points.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
If there is any asymmetry in the vessel due to either: hull shape. Trim may be specified for Upright Hydrostatics. If all the heel angle intervals are 10 deg or less. This can be a source of apparent differences in the results from the different analyses. Floodable Length and Tank Calibrations. Note: For the angle of equilibrium to be found (when analysing criteria). It is good practise to start the heel range at an angle of approximately -30°.
Trim
For most analyses you may specify whether the vessel is free-to-trim or has fixed trim. It is possible that the GZ at zero heel may be very slightly positive (due to asymmetry or rounding error) for this reason. it is advisable to test at least one negative heel angle. Large Angle Stability.) Equilibrium and Longitudinal Strength analyses always use a free trimming (and free heeling) analysis so that there is no trimming (or heeling) moment applied to the vessel at the final equilibrium.
Note: The heel angles to be used are specified independently for each analysis mode. etc. and there is any doubt as to which will be the worst heel direction. it is essential that the GZ curve crosses the GZ=0 axis with positive slope. the trim may be specified in the Specified Conditions dialog.

3. Probabilistic Damage) as well as Upright Hydrostatics and Tank Calibrations 2. Free to trim to loadcase – the analysis trims the vessel to the CG specified in the loadcase. This applies to all analyses that carry out a large angle stability-type analysis (Large Angle Stability. Free to trim to specified CG – this is again free-to-trim but the CG is specified in the dialog. For the Floodable Length analysis. intact vessel floats at a specified trim. Longitudinal Strength. the vessel is not free-totrim as it heels. heel is not considered thus TCG cannot be specified. the VCG is being found by the analysis. This option is available for all analyses that have a loadcase: Large Angle Stability. the LCB of the intact vessel at the specified trim and zero heel is computed. This is for when a range of displacements is used for the analysis: Limiting KG. Fixed trim – the analysis is carried out at a fixed. This it is possible to specify the LCG either directly or so that the upright. so cannot be specified. Probabilistic Damage. for each displacement. Free-to-trim using a specified initial trim value Using this method. for each displacement. all three components of the CG need to be know.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Essentially there are three options for trim: 1. The LCG is calculated using this value and the VCG. KN. the upright. In the case of the Limiting KG analysis.
Fixed trim (KN and Limiting KG analyses only). The analysis is carried out with the specified fixed trim. Floodable Length. Limiting KG. but the LCG will be different. specified initial trim. In this case. Equilibrium.
Specification of different trim options is dependent on the type of analysis currently selected. this analysis will tend to overestimate ship stability properties such as GZ. KN. Thus. intact vessel trim will be the same. Calculations at each heel angle of the large angle stability analysis are then done free-to-trim using the derived LCG and VCG. The TCG and VCG are specified directly.
Page 143
. Although considerably faster.

The TCG can be either specified directly or calculated from the tank loadings defined in the current loadcase. Thus. any liquid cargo should also be removed from the model. This is especially useful when evaluating the Limiting KG of a damaged vessel that had cargo or ballast in tanks which are subsequently damaged. It will be used to determine the LCG if an initial trim value is specified. but the upright vessel trim will be different. for each displacement. so to be consistent. It will also be used to improve the accuracy of the KN results. (As the trim angle increases the longitudinal movement of the centre of gravity due to its vertical position becomes more important. because the analysis is very sensitive to trim.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Free-to-trim to a specified LCG value With this method. which are always calculated free-to-trim. TCG value The TCG option allows you to specify an off-centreline centre of gravity for Limiting KG and KN calculations. For Floodable Length calculations.
Draft
The draft dialog is used to specify the range of drafts to be used for the Upright hydrostatics analysis. measured from the vertical zero datum (not necessarily KG). Also.
Current Loadcase specifies initial loading of damaged tanks (los mass during analysis)
Finally. the actual VCG is used and the VCG input field will state “not applicable”. the VCG will be used to calculate the LCG if an initial trim value is specified. the VCG will only have an effect if the analysis is free-to-trim. the VCG is needed to provide an accurate balance of the trimming moment.) In the case of the Limiting KG analysis. VCG for trim balance The VCG. may be specified. For KN analysis. for the Limiting KG analysis. there is an option to automatically adjust the displacement and LCG of the vessel so that liquid cargo of damaged tanks is removed from the model. the LCG will be the same.
Page 144
. This is for consistency with the lost buoyancy analysis method: the buoyancy contribution of damaged tanks is removed from the model. This LCG is then used to compute the free-to-trim vessel orientation at each heel angle as the large angle stability analysis is performed. a specified constant LCG is maintained for each displacement.

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
The VCG specified in the draft dialog is used for the calculation of upright stability characteristics such as GMt only. tank and non-buoyant volume permeabilities are used when calculating the effects of damage. tank or non-buoyant volume permeability and is only used for floodable length calculations.
Permeability
The Permeabilities are set in a table in the Permeability dialog. The permeabilities may be sorted by double clicking on the permeability column heading. The compartment.e. The last set of permeabilities used will be recalled from the registry when Hydromax is started.
Specified Conditions
The specified conditions analysis setting is only available for the specified condition analysis.
Page 145
. and is specified in terms of KG – i. This permeability is unrelated to compartment.
The Permeability dialog is used to specify the permeabilities to be used for the Floodable Length analysis. Use the Add and Delete buttons to add or delete rows from the table. See Specified Conditions on page 90. and/or calculating the weights of fluids in tanks in the loadcase. from the baseline.
Individual Permeability of Tanks and Compartments
The individual permeability of each compartment (or tank) is specified in the Compartment definition table. which is not necessarily the vertical zero datum.
Displacement
The displacement dialog is used to specify the range of displacements to be used for the KN. the permeability is applied over the entire length of the vessel. Limiting KG and Floodable Length calculations.

0%.
One of the most common causes of non-convergence is if the specified displacement exceeds the volume of the completely submerged vessel and it sinks. If this is not achieved within a certain number of iterations.00001% and 0. Also convergence may be poor if the trim angle approaches 90 .1% (1 gram in 10 tonnes of displacement). but the acceptable error has been achieved. The warning is also not shown when accessing Hydromax from a VBA macro using the Automation interface
Page 146
. Hydromax will continue. The specified displacement and the actual displacement at the current iteration are provided for information. If Hydromax thinks that it is likely that the model has sunk (waterplane area is zero at the current condition) the following dialog will be displayed.001% to 1. This defines the tolerances that Hydromax uses to determine when to finish iteration during
Large Angle Stability Equilibrium analysis Specified conditions KN calculations Floodable Length Longitudinal Strength
Ideal tolerances can range between 0. If convergence to within the acceptable error has not been achieved. Hydromax will display a warning.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Also see: Modelling Compartments on page 51
Tolerances
In the Edit | Preferences dialog. Note This warning is not displayed during batch analysis. calculation tolerances can be set. instead the warning is written in the batch file. Acceptable tolerances should always be greater than Ideal tolerances.
Convergence Error
Hydromax will attempt to solve most analysis to within the ideal tolerance. Acceptable tolerances can range from 0.

heel angle curve. If you choose to continue. then the following dialog will be displayed. Other causes of non-convergence can be non-linear moment to trim vs. but will allow you the option of continuing the search. trim angle curve or moment to heel vs. this section describes the analysis environment options available in Hydromax in more detail:
Page 147
. The analysis will also fail to converge if the trim becomes excessive. in the case of the Floodable Length analysis.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
If there is a convergence problem. this limit is increased to +/-89º. If the search is unsuccessful after a reasonable period of time. Hydromax will search for the equilibrium position indefinitely. All analyses other than Floodable Length will fail if the trim exceeds +/-45º. Note: There are occasions when convergence will not necessarily occur within the maximum allowable number of iterations. producing a highly non-linear waterplane area vs. which appears not to be due to sinking.
This problem can sometimes occur if the specified displacement is extremely small and the vessel has a large flat bottom. you can interrupt Hydromax by pausing the analysis.
Analysis Environment Options
The analysis can be performed in different environments. If Hydromax fails to converge it will give you a warning. draft plot.

You may set different limits for each of the different free surface moment types other than “User Specified”. The upper limit is clearly stated by IMO as 98%.e. This is applicable to the “IMO” free surface moment type only. but the code provides some flexibility in interpretation for the lower limit.
In addition it is possible to ignore the free surface moment if the VCG correction for a single tank. This functionality is accessed through the Analysis | Fluids dialog:
Fluid Analysis dialog
If the corrected the VCG method is used. filling level is 98% or above.3. Free surface effects need not be considered where a tank is nominally full . provided that the total of such residual liquids does not constitute a significant free surface effect.i.3.10 The usual remainder of liquids in empty tanks need not be taken into account in calculating the corrections. the free surface moment will be zero. This requires that a nominal minimum displacement be specified. if the filling level is less than or equal to the lower limit or the filling level is greater than or equal to the upper limit. due to the free surface moment is less than a specified amount. It is possible to specify the range of filling levels for which free surface moments should be applied in the loadcase. the FSM is applied if the filling level is within the exclusive range specified. Selecting Fluids in the Analysis menu opens the Fluids Analysis dialog. i.2 Free surface effects should be considered whenever the filling level in a tank is less than 98% of full condition. (see IMO IS Code)
Page 148
.
3. (see IMO IS Code) 3.e.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Fluids Analysis Methods Density Waveform Grounding Stability Criteria Damage
Fluids Analysis Methods
Hydromax allows you to specify two different ways of simulating any fluids contained in tanks or compartments.

01m
min
where M fs is the free surface moment of the tank in question and
is
the ship displacement at the minimum mean service draft of the ship without cargo. need not be included in the correction:
M fs /
min
0. This method should be used when compiling a stability booklet for a design. For more information. authorities have not adopted this more accurate calculation of the shift in centre of gravity due to fluid movement.
Page 149
. as it corresponds with the traditional approach used by naval architects and classification societies worldwide. the loading window will include a column for free surface moment and cells for corrected fluid VCG. with 10% stores and minimum water ballast.9 Small tanks which satisfy the following condition using the values of "k" corresponding to an angle of inclination of 30°.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
3. calculated in the upright condition. see Working with Loadcases on page 38. Note that the upright free surface moments as shown in the loadcase are used. This is because the actual free surface moment to be used to determine the VCG in a loadcase depends on the method being used and also the heel angle in question (in the case of the IMO correction).
Note Most documented stability criteria assume that the corrected VCG method has been used. In this case. if required. The effective rise in VCG due to the tanks' free surface is calculated by summing the free surface moment of all the tanks and dividing by the total vessel displacement (the free surface moment to be applied is specified in the loadcase).3. not those from the actual second moment of area of the inclined tank waterplane. It is reasonably accurate at low angles of heel and trim. There are several FSM types available. Although the computational potential is available.
Fluid analysis method: Use corrected VCG
Tank capacities and free surface moments are calculated for the upright hull (zero trim and zero heel).
Note: Calculation of GM GM values always use the centre of gravity corrected for free surface moments even if the “simulate fluid” option has been chosen. Note: Tank Calibration results In the tank calibration results the free-surface moment based on the transverse second moment of area of the tank waterplane is given for all filling levels. These values are automatically calculated from the maximum free surface moments of the tanks.

Density of Fluids
Where necessary. free surface moments and corrected fluid VCG are normally not displayed in the loadcase. Every tank is rotated to the heel and trim angle being analysed. The penalty of using this approach is that the calculation time is longer.
Page 150
. i. VCG and TCG are calculated for the whole design and used in the calculation of GZ. Equilibrium Condition and Longitudinal Strength (the Longitudinal Strength analysis always uses fluid simulation). Hydromax iterates to find the fluid level for the rotated tank at the specified capacity. Alternatively. the density of sea water (the fluid in which the vessel is floating) and fluids commonly carried on board can be adjusted using the Density dialog.0 kg/m3. will be displayed in the View window. the actual fluid level in the tank. fluid simulation is used for analyses that use a loadcase. however the results are significantly more accurate. or wide shallow tanks). KG.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Fluid analysis method: Simulate fluid movement
This method is a faithful simulation of the static movement of the centre of gravity of the fluid in each tank. may be specified.e. and GM. Large Angle Stability. filled to the volume specified in the loadcase. Specific gravity is calculated relative to a fluid having a density of 1000.
When selected. The new LCG. The new centre of gravity is calculated for each tank and used in the analysis. It is particularly useful at high angles of heel or trim. or non-dimensional relative density (specific gravity). or with tanks whose heeled water plane area may be significantly different from the upright case (i. density may be specified using Barrels as the unit of volume. When fluid simulation is used in one of these analyses. Density using the current units. Otherwise the complete tank will be shown.e.
When fluid simulation method is selected. tall narrow tanks. This approach is used when the stability of a vessel is being investigated and the closest possible simulation of the hull's behaviour is required. Conversions are performed automatically.

specific gravity.9443 0. it is necessary to change the density of this fluid. cannot be changed (any changes made will be ignored). Tanks that have been specified as containing one of these fluids will be updated automatically when the density of the fluid is changed in the Density dialog.0250 1. There is one row for each of the 18 fluid types. if you wanted to carry out an analysis for a vessel in fresh water. The name and code for the first entry. fluid code. All other entries may be edited (the same restrictions area applied as when editing through the Density dialog).
Sea Water Water Ballast Fresh Water Diesel Fuel Oil Lube Oil ANS Crude Gasoline leaded S B W D F L C G 1. you would change the density of "Sea Water" to 1000. colour respectively (the colour is in hexadecimal for the red. blue components and are probably much more easily edited in the Density dialog.0 kg/m3. Sea Water. Tank calibrations results and loading conditions will also be updated.8883 0.0250 1.
Saving and Loading Densities
Densities listed in the Density table can be saved and loaded using the File menu. This is the first fluid in the list printed in bold font. The four columns. If the vessel is to float in a different fluid. Note The vessel's hydrostatics are always calculated assuming the vessel is floating in the fluid labelled "Sea Water". These are fluid name. The densities file may be edited manually if desired.9200 0. Thus. Note that only the custom fluids may have their names changed.8400 0.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
By assigning a code to the fluid you can easily apply the fluid type in the Compartment Definitions table. green. each separated by a tab character.0000 0.7499 6D00FF00FF00 6D006D00FF00 FF005F005F00 FF005B00FF00 6D00FF006D00 7F007F007F00 3F003F003F00 FF0000007F00
Page 151
.

7471 0.0000 1.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Unlead. Also see: Windows Registry on page 16
Waveform
Hydromax is capable of analysing hydrostatics and stability in arbitrary waveforms as well as for a level water plane. the waveheight reduces linearly with wavelength given by the formula: Wave height = 0. wave height and phase offset can be specified. If a waveform is specified. the wavelength.607 √ Wavelength [m] This is the metric equivalent of the US Naval standard wave height: Wave height [ft] = 1.0000
FF007F007F00 7F007F00FF00 F600FA00C900 FF00FF007F00 FF006F00FF00 D6000300D600 D600D6000300 0300D600D600 D60003000300 DF00DF00DF00
If you make an error. Gas.9130 1. If the wavelength is modified the wave height defaults to a value in metres of: Wave height [m] = 0.075875 Wavelength
Page 152
. or as a sinusoidal or trochoidal waveform.0000 1. The wavelength defaults to the waterline length of the hull at the DWL.0000 1.8203 0.1 √ Wavelength [ft] For short waves of wavelength less than 64m.8524 0. To specify a waveform. JFA MTBE Gasoil Slops Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 Custom 4 Custom 5
U J M GO SL C1 C2 C3 C4 C5
0.7499 0. select the Waveform command from the Analysis menu:
The water plane can be specified as flat. you can always reset the densities to their default values in the Densities dialog.0000 1.

If the vessel touches one or both grounding points.
Page 153
. The value of KG. Damage can be specified concurrently with grounding. GMt and GMl are all calculated to the effective centre of gravity.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Once a wavelength has been set. a phase offset of 0. It is possible to specify grounding on one or two points of variable length. The phase offset governs the position of the wave crest aft of the forward end of the DWL. this will bring the effective centres of gravity and the centre of buoyancy in line vertically. both of which correspond to a wave crest at the forward end of the DWL. as a proportion of the wavelength. Remember that KG is measured in the upright vessel reference frame (normal to the baseline). will give a single wave crest at amidships. this will be reflected in the results: The displacement column will show the total grounding reaction force in brackets. the sum of the buoyancy and the grounding reactions equals the loadcase displacement. with a wavelength equal to the waterline length. The Equilibrium analysis will determine whether the hull is grounded or free floating and will trim the hull accordingly. For example.
The effective centre of gravity will be modified by the grounding reactions – a mass is effectively being removed from the vessel. whilst GMt and GMl are the actual vertical separation of the metacentres above the centre of gravity in the trimmed reference frame normal to the sea surface.5. The phase offset varies between 0 and 1.
Grounding
Grounding is an additional analysis environment option for the Equilibrium or Longitudinal Strength analysis. the wave height may be modified.

Damage
You can specify whether the model is to be analysed in intact or damaged condition using the Analysis Toolbar.
Note: Fixed zero heel during grounding analysis The equilibrium analysis will only consider the longitudinal balance of moments. The vessel is considered to pivot at the centre of the grounding point.
Stability Criteria
Stability criteria may be seen as the “environment of authorities” that the ship will be deployed in. When two grounding points are entered. the vessel will not be balanced in heel and the vessel will remain upright (zero heel) even if the transverse metacentric height is less than zero. For more information see Chapter 4 Stability Criteria starting at page 163. i. The length of the grounding points is only used when considering the load distribution for Longitudinal Strength analysis and not to determine the pivot point. Also see: Damage Case Definition on page 71
Page 154
.e.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Note: Grounding points are considered to span the transverse extents of the hull and therefore constrain the heel to zero. the second grounding point is the aft grounding point. the first point (edit boxes on the left) must refer to the forward grounding point.

Select the option to send the results to the report window if you require Graphs. After you have run an analysis a Word document is created and opened automatically.
Streaming results to Word
It is possible to stream the Analysis results directly to Word. This then allows you to validate the results at the same time. if the option to Stream the report to Word has been selected in the Edit | Preferences dialog a word document is automatically generated after a Batch Analysis.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Analysis Output
Hydromax will produce the following output data:
Hydromax model visualisation Result data tables per analysis Graphs per analysis Report o o o Report window Streamed directly to a Word document Report Templates
In this section:
Reporting Copying Select View from Analysis Data Saving the Hydromax Design Exporting
Reporting
Hydromax has several options to do your reporting:
Batch Analysis text file and/or streaming to Report window Automatically generate a report in the Report Window for each analysis run Automatically Streaming results to Word Manually copy and paste tables and graphs from the Results Window and Graph Window
The most efficient method depends on the number of loadcases and damage cases you have to analyse and the output you require. Additionally. it is recommended to use batch analysis. To do this:
Edit | Preferences Select the option to Send the Report to Word
This will send the Report document to Word instead of to the Report window. Batch Analysis results saved as text files do not include graphs. For large numbers of cases. Form small number of loadcases and damage cases you can do a manual copy and paste of the results into a report. This also applies to Batch Analysis.
Page 155
.

Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Report Templates
Hydromax offers the ability to customise reports through a Report Template. This feature is only available when sending reports to Microsoft Word. You can use one of the sample templates provided.dot or .dot
Page 156
. Simply tick the box „Use Word Templating‟. Please note that Send Report to Word must be enabled before you can enable this option. instead of just dumping the results of each analysis into a Word document. This gives you much greater control over how the analysis results are output than with the normal Send Report to Word option and allows you to customise your own report template document. it is possible to use template keywords to specify where in the document the analysis results go and where each element of the output (such as graph. With report templates. See the dialog box below as an example:
The Word Template File specified should be in . tables. Two Report Templates have been included to get you started: StabilityBooklet. or you can build your own template.dotx/dotm (for Word 2007) format and will be used when creating any future reports. To turn on Report Templating you need to select it in the Preferences dialog box. etc) is placed.

These allow you to easily add and remove the analysis keyword blocks. copying and pasting data to and from Excel spreadsheets allows you to use the full spreadsheet capabilities of Excel on your Hydromax model. due to new security changes we‟ve had to move this to an alternative location that every user has write access to – so you can find it at: C:\Users\Public\Documents\Maxsurf\Maxsurf14\Report Templates\
Tips:
See: Copying Tables on page 158 for tips on how to include the table header in a copy paste to for example Excel Graph Formatting on page 190 for tips on how to format your graph prior to copying to another application.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
This is an example of a complete Stability Booklet template – this document is the default Word Template file for new users and is recommend for users wanting to quickly create a Stability Booklet.
Copying & Printing
A range of options for transferring data from Hydromax to other programs such as spreadsheets and word processors is provided through copy and paste functions.
Note: To edit a report template in Microsoft Word you will need to start Microsoft Word and then open the template directly using the File menu.g. It contains an introduction to how templates are created and configured. Users can start with StabilityBootlet. Data Format on page 207 for tips on how to specify what should be displayed and customise how to display tables (vertical or horizontal).
The location of these report templates varies depending on which operating system you are using.dot and then use it customise their own report template. On Windows XP/Server 2003 the default location for the report templates is: C:\Program Files\Maxsurf 14\Report Templates\ On Windows Vista. The image copied is as per the image displayed in the Hydromax view window.
Page 157
. HMReportTemplate. This data transfer works both ways: e.dot This document is a good starting point for creating your own customised template. Simply double-clicking on a template document opens up a new document based on the template (which is not what you want).
Copying Hull Views
Pictures of the hull in the View windows may be copied to the Clipboard using the Copy command from the Edit menu. It also includes all of the basic analysis blocks and variables to get you started. Both of these templates contain macros and toolbar items to make life easier when you design your own template.

The data copied from the table will be placed on the clipboard and can then be pasted into a spreadsheet or word processor for further work.
Graph Printing to Scale
When printing the graph. use Ctrl+I. Note: Copying data from the table with the Shift key depressed. 5.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
These pictures can then be pasted into other applications or the Hydromax Report window. but the selection will be reflected in the printout.): 1. range of cells or the whole table and then choose the Copy command or Ctrl+C. Prior to printing you may wish to set up the paper size and orientation by using the Page Setup command from the File menu. it is possible to ensure that the graph is plotted to a sensible scale so that measurements can be made directly from the graph. row. then the graph will be plotted so that the grid lines are at one of the following intervals (If the current length units are imperial then similar intervals will be used. The printing may be forced to be black and white. The titles may be edited by clicking the Titles button.0cm. 2. but they will be inches instead of cm. will also copy the column headings.
Page 158
. You will be asked if you want to print the graph to scale or to fill the page:
The scale used will depend on the length units that are currently selected. To copy a simple bitmap image of the view at the current resolution. additionally. Views of the hull in the View window may be printed to scale as in Maxsurf. Simply bring the window you wish to print to the front and choose Print from the File menu. Simply select a cell. a bitmap of the current image may be saved by pressing Ctrl+Shift+I
Copying Tables
Tables may be copied to the clipboard.0cm. Note that the print preview is not refreshed after these changes. column. To do this.5cm. otherwise click the Cancel button. hold the shift key down when selecting the print command for the graph.
Printing
Each of the windows in Hydromax may be printed. To print the page click the Print button. 2.
Print Preview
The page to be printed is initially displayed in print preview mode.0cm. If these are metric. Choose the Colours button and select the options required.

it is recommended to also save the Hydromax input files separately. The Select View from Data can also be used to display the Curve of Areas graph for each intermediate analysis stage. E.
In the View window the hull will be displayed in the selected position. The Hydromax data is saved in a . see Graph type on page 189. This gives the option of loading common data into different design files.hmd file with the same name as the design.hmd file automatically every time you press Save from any of the design windows. key points etc.
Select View from Analysis Data
For most analyses.
Saving the Hydromax Design
Hydromax design data may be saved
Saving in a Hydromax Design File Saving Input Files separately
Saving in a Hydromax Design File
To save the design in one file. compartment definition.g. For more information on file properties and extensions in Hydromax. For example: the angle of downflooding can be visualised by returning to the Stability table in the results window.
Page 159
. Note Although all Hydromax model data is saved in the . may also be saved separately. selecting the column at the required heel angle and select “Select View From Data” in the Display menu. please see: File Extension Reference Table on page 307. each step from the analysis can be visualised when the analysis has completed. the data in the individual tables such as loadcases. for comparing the characteristics of vessels which have only minor differences in hull shape and identical tank layouts and loadcases. ensure that the View window is topmost and select Save from the File menu. damage cases.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Exporting a Bitmap Image
You may also export a bitmap of the rendered perspective view with the File | Export | Bitmap Image command. This can also be done for Upright Hydrostatics and the different wave phase calculations for an Equilibrium analysis in a waveform..
Saving Input Files separately
In addition to saving all the data together.

Excel or other programs. ensure the Results window is topmost on the screen and choose the table containing the data you wish to save. Saving Input Window Tables To save a input window table to a file. You will be asked to name the file and select where it is to be saved. This allows for further calculations to be done in a spreadsheet or for formatting to be done in Word. Selecting this option saves all the loads displayed in the current tab in the Loadcase window. Select Save or Save As from the File Menu. meaning that they can be read directly into spreadsheets such as Excel with values being placed in individual spreadsheet cells.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Saving Loadcases to a File Once you have set up a loading spreadsheet.
Page 160
. Saving Damage Cases to a File Bring the Damage window to the front and select Save Damage Cases or Save Damage Cases As from the file menu. To save the data.
Exporting
The data export function in Hydromax is similar to Maxsurf. Selecting this option saves all the data currently displayed in the Results window. Saving Compartment Definitions to a File To save a compartment definition to a file. Some Hydromax-specific export features are described below.
Saving Results to a File
Once you have performed an analysis. the data generated may be saved as a text file. You will be asked to name the file and select where it is to be saved. you can save it in a file on disk. bring the Input window to the front and choose the required input table. The Results files are saved as tab delimited text. ensure the Loadcase window is topmost on the screen and choose Save Load Case from the File Menu. To save the loadcase table. select Save Compartment Definition from the File menu. bring the Input window to the front and choose the compartment definition table. This allows the same loading spreadsheet to be recalled at any time for use with the same design or with any other hull. select Save from the File menu.

each tank. Note: The layer name is the same as the compartment name.0
After Hydromax version 8. In addition. so it is important to have unique compartment names. All key points will become downflooding points in the version 8 file and any tank sounding pipe information will be lost.Chapter 3 Using Hydromax
Data export dialog in Hydromax.
Exporting the Model to Hydromax Version 8. compartment and non-buoyant volume is exported on a separate layer. please see the “Output of Data” section in the Maxsurf manual. Hydromax models created in versions greater than version 8. For more information on data export of DXF and IGES.0 can be exported using the File | Export menu so that it is compatible with Hydromax version 8.
Page 161
. This export function is particularly useful to export tank arrangement drawings.0.
DXF export Contains all lines displayed in the active design window as closed poly-lines. a major change to the Hydromax file structure was made.

.

These custom criteria files may be easily transferred via email. However. Criteria results are added to the Report after a Large Angle Stability or Equilibrium analysis. similarly for the damage cases. DNV. Users may save. i. Parent criteria. import and edit their criteria sets.e. HSC. and after a Large Angle Stability analysis only GZ based criteria are added to the report. explanation how to work with the Hydromax criteria dialog to create your own custom set of criteria. an overview of what capabilities Hydromax offers with regards to stability criteria. ISO and more. only the criteria that are selected for evaluation during an intact analysis will be evaluated and added to the report. This section describes how this list of criteria can be divided up in to Parent heeling arms. Criteria Procedures. Hydromax uses a single dialog to control all the stability criteria. predefined custom criteria and user created custom criteria. Criteria Results. i.
Page 163
.
Criteria List Overview
Hydromax includes a wide range of criteria. Stability criteria are evaluated for Large Angle Stability.: if the intact case is being computed. The following sections will be discussed:
Criteria Concepts. Equilibrium and Limiting KG calculations. after an Equilibrium analysis only those criteria that are evaluated from Equilibrium data are added.e. explanation of terms and definitions
See also:
Appendix B: Criteria file format Appendix C: Criteria Help Appendix D: Specific Criteria
Criteria Concepts
Hydromax includes a wide range of template criteria (or: parent criteria) as well as predefined custom criteria such as IMO. simplified dialog. Help information relating to the use and parameters of each criterion is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the dialog. Criteria may be identified as intact or damage criteria (or both). These criteria are listed using in a tree control on the left-hand side of the criteria dialog. only the applicable criteria are added to the report (although all are displayed in the Results table). only criteria that are applicable are added to the report. It is also possible for users to create their own custom sets of criteria.Chapter 4 Stability Criteria
Chapter 4 Stability Criteria
This chapter describes how stability criteria are used in Hydromax. A fixed sub-set of criteria is used for the Floodable length analysis and these criteria are accessed in their own. This makes it quick and easy to set which criteria should be included for analysis and to change criteria parameters. criteria evaluation results Nomenclature. This ensures that the correct criteria are evaluated and displayed during normal and batch analysis. This section also explains how all criteria can be divided up into two different criteria types: equilibrium and GZ curve based. Although all criteria are displayed in the criteria table.

Chapter 4 Stability Criteria
The criteria tree list
Parent Calculations This folder contains calculations that are required for certain criteria parameters. The Hydromax criteria list contains Parent Heeling Arms that can be copied into a custom criteria folder and then cross-referenced into the stability criteria.
Parent calculations in Hydromax Criteria dialog
Parent Heeling Arms In most cases a ship is subject to specific heeling moments. the roll-back angle required for the IMO IS code Severe wind and rolling (weather) criterion. for example. These calculations may be referenced in certain criteria. Those heeling moment are then used in a number of different criteria.
Page 164
.

These may be found in the “HMSpecificCriteria” folder. those that are not locked require your ship design data to be input. This ensures that all criteria which use a specific heeling arm use exactly the same heeling arm. Custom Criteria You can create your own set of criteria in the tree as well. since the heeling arm is defined in one place. This is because the parent criteria are intended for use as templates from which you can derive your own custom criteria. Most specific criteria are locked. it is only displayed once in the GZ graph and not duplicated for each criterion that uses it. To distinguish the Parent criteria from your derived criteria. they are displayed in bold text in the Criteria list.Chapter 4 Stability Criteria
The advantage of using cross-referenced Heeling Arms is that a heeling arm is now defined (and edited) in only one place. these are the fundamental criteria from which criteria for specific codes are derived. they will always revert to their default values when Hydromax is restarted. Predefined Custom Criteria A number of criteria files containing criteria for specific codes are supplied with Hydromax. Also the parent criteria settings cannot be saved. This is explained in the section on Working with Criteria on page 168. delete or add criteria to the Parent Criteria group. Parent Criteria The Parent Criteria group contains all the parent criteria types that are available in Hydromax. Parent criteria are special in that you cannot rename. Also see Working with Criteria Libraries on page 172 Appendix D: Specific Criteriaon page 291. Furthermore some newer heeling arm criteria are only available for cross-referenced heeling arms and a greater variety of heeling arm definitions are available through cross-referencing. Each parent criterion allows you to perform a specific calculation. Another benefit is that. This folder can be found in the Maxsurf root directory: c:\program files\Maxsurf.
Page 165
. This is done by dragging the required parent criteria in to the “My custom criteria” group or any other group you create.

once in the form of an Equilibrium criterion and again as a Large Angle Stability criterion. This type of criterion is also used by the Floodable Length analysis. in some criteria sets some criteria are included twice. This can be measured from the GZ curve by looking for an up-crossing of the GZ=0 axis. Note that there is some cross-over between the criteria types. Weather criterion. The equilibrium heel angle is also a fundamental output of the Equilibrium analysis. trim angle.g. See next: Criteria Procedures
Page 166
. Equilibrium criteria can be recognised by the icon. Criteria derived from measurements of the GZ curve. it must be a LAS criterion. notably angle of equilibrium heel. GZ criterion. area under GZ curve between specified limits. metacentric height. These icons are derived from the parent criterion type. You will notice that different icons are used to differentiate between different types of criteria. e. These criteria are often referred to as Large Angle Stability (LAS) or GZ criteria. These criteria are evaluated only after an equilibrium analysis has been performed. These are calculated after a Large Angle Stability analysis and during a Limiting KG analysis. Combined GZ heeling arm criterion.Chapter 4 Stability Criteria
Types of criteria
There are two fundamental types of criteria: Equilibrium criteria Equilibrium criteria are evaluated after an Equilibrium analysis and refer only to the condition of the vessel in its equilibrium state For example: margin line immersion tests. etc. These criteria make measurements from the GZ curved obtained from a Large Angle Stability analysis. Equilibrium criterion. These criteria perform several individual tests on the GZ curve including a heeling arm. These criteria perform several individual tests on the GZ curve. This is because it is only this type of criteria that is more likely to pass as VCG is reduced. All folders must have unique names (even if the parent folders have different names). For example. etc. STIX. but they cannot be included directly in the search algorithm. e. create separate folders to store related criteria. freeboard measurements. The different types of criteria and their icons are described below: Folder icon. GZ area criterion GZ criterion with heeling arm GZ area criterion with heeling arm GZ criterion with several heeling arms and their combinations GZ area criterion with several heeling arms and their combinations Combined GZ criterion. angle of maximum GZ.g. A check is also made to ensure that any selected Equilibrium criteria are passed. For this reason. The same also applies for GMt. For a criterion to be used in the search for maximum VCG in the Limiting KG analysis.

. To bring up the Criteria dialog. in the analysis toolbar:
Page 167
. select Criteria from the Analysis menu:
or use the Criteria button.
Starting the Criteria dialog Resizing the Criteria dialog Working with Criteria Editing Criteria Working with Criteria Libraries
Starting the Criteria dialog
The criteria dialog allows you to select which criteria are selected for inclusion in the analysis and change their parameters.Chapter 4 Stability Criteria
Criteria Procedures
This section describes how to work with the stability criteria dialog.

in the unlikely event that the dialog items vanish due to resizing the dialog.Chapter 4 Stability Criteria
The criteria dialog is shown below:
Note: The Floodable Length analysis uses its own set of criteria.
Resizing the Criteria dialog
The dialog may be resized and a vertical and horizontal slider can be used to resize the width of the Criteria List and the height of the Criterion Details areas.
Page 168
.
Working with Criteria
In the Concepts section it was explained how the criteria are listed in a tree list. This section explains how to create and customise your own criteria from the Parent Heeling Arms and Criteria provided with Hydromax. This behaviour is the same as all other resizing dialogs. The criteria command will bring up the Floodable Length Criteria dialog when the Floodable Length analysis is selected. the dialog size can be reset by holding down the “Shift” key when you open the dialog. Note that if.

click again on the on the item’s name to edit its name
Some short-cut keys for the tree list: Tree control smart keys Alt+Keypad * Right Arrow or Alt+Keypad + Left Arrow or Alt+ Keypad Up Arrow Down Arrow Space
Criteria Tree Right-click Context Menu
Function Recursively expands the current group completely Expands the current group Collapses the current group Move one item up tree Move one item down tree Include criterion for analysis
Several options are available by right-clicking on a criterion or criterion group:
Criterion right-click menu
Include for Analysis: Toggle whether the criterion (or all criteria within the group) should be evaluated.
Page 169
.Chapter 4 Stability Criteria
Using the Criteria Tree List
The tree works in much the same way as the file folders in Windows Explorer:
Click on the “+” sign to expand the folder (or double click on it). Click on the “-” sign to collapse the group (or double click on it). If a criterion is locked. Locking is used for criteria belonging to specific codes where the required values are fixed. Lock: Toggle whether the criterion (or all criteria within the group) are locked. this prevents inadvertent editing of its parameters. Intact: Toggle whether the criterion (or all criteria within the group) should be evaluated for intact conditions. Damage: Toggle whether the criterion (or all criteria within the group) should be evaluated for damaged conditions. Click on an item’s name or icon to select it Once selected.

Delete: Deletes the criterion or all the criteria and sub-groups within the group.
Copying criteria
You can use the Criteria Tree Right-click Context Menu to copy and paste criteria. Other functions are available from a menu activated when the right button is clicked on your mouse. Paste: Paste the criterion (or whole criterion group) from the clipboard to the selected location Rename: Renames the criterion or group. in which case a copy will be made regardless of whether the Ctrl key is held down or not). then clicking again in the label.Chapter 4 Stability Criteria
Add Group: Add a new criterion group. you can hold down the CTRL-key while moving the criteria you will copy the criteria. This may also be done by selecting the label. It is extremely important to ensure that all criteria groups have unique names.
Moving Criteria
Criteria may be moved from one group to another by dragging them with the left-mousebutton or by using the cut and paste functions in the right-click context menu (see above). If there are groups with the same name. Note that if you drag a criterion from the Parent Criteria group a copy will be made and the original will not be deleted. If duplicate group names exit.
Editing Criteria
The specific details for a criterion are displayed in the table in the top-right of the dialog:
Page 170
. As criteria (and new groups) are loaded they are inserted into the first group that is found with a name that matches the name of the group to which the criterion should belong. By holding down the Ctrl button a copy of the criterion being dragged is created (unless it is a parent criterion. To select an entire group. Alternatively use the Copy and Paste functions from the right-click context menu (see above). Alternatively.
Selecting the Criteria for Analysis
Criteria may be selected for analysis by ticking the tick box to the left of the criterion. all criteria that should be in a group of that name will end up in the first one and none in the second. This may then be pasted into another location in the tree. Copy: Copy the criterion (or whole criterion group) to the clipboard. then loading the criteria file may cause unexpected results.
Defining new Custom Criteria and Groups
New custom criteria sets may be created by first creating a new criterion group and then dragging the desired criteria into the criterion group. Cut: Cut the criterion (or whole criterion group) to the clipboard. right-click on the group and choose Include for Analysis from the menu. This may then be pasted into another location in the tree.

have a grey background. click on the criterion‟s name in the tree and the criterion‟s parameters will be displayed in the table on the right. The values that are required for passing a criterion are in bold. at least one must be selected.
In other cases. However. The parameters that may be adjusted have a white background. those which cannot be edited. where the items are mutually exclusive. Edit the parameters as required and then select the next criterion to be edited from the tree. For example the limits for an upper integration range or the individual criteria to be evaluated for a more complex criterion:
In both of these cases the selection is cumulative and none of the selections are mutually exclusive. If in doubt. Please note that the criteria are updated as you change their data and that there is no “Cancel” function for this dialog.Chapter 4 Stability Criteria
Criterion details table
To edit the parameters for a specific criterion.
Check Boxes in Criteria Properties Section of Criteria Dialog
There is some subtly different behaviour for the check boxes in the dialog depending on their context. the check boxes act as radio buttons and only one may be selected. or click the dialog‟s Close button. use the File | Save Criteria command to save a copy of your current criteria selection and data before making any changes in the Criteria dialog. This occurs. In most cases there will be group of related options used to define a criterion parameter. for example. with the “Value of GMt at” criterion:
Page 171
.

built into Hydromax are not saved.
Page 172
. Hydromax allows you to make this distinction by selecting the required comparison from a combo-box in the criterion row of the details table:
Description Shall be greater than Shall not be less than Shall be less than Shall not be greater than
Damage and Intact
Symbol > ≥ < ≤
Logical test Greater than Greater than or equal to Less than Less than or equal to
Criteria may be defined as intact or damage stability criteria (or both). A third option which is not yet implemented is WOD (Water on deck) this checkbox has no effect. If this file cannot be found. The parent criteria.
Working with Criteria Libraries
It is possible to load and save the criteria. Criteria that are defined for both are always evaluated. Hydromax will try to open the default criteria library file called: “Hydromax Criteria Library. GZ curve reduction in the wind heeling criteria:
Criterion Pass/Fail Test
There are some subtle differences between the wordings for different criteria. you will be prompted to locate a criteria file: You may select an alternative file or click the Cancel button to proceed and be given the default criteria.Chapter 4 Stability Criteria
Finally a check box can be used to select whether a specific effect should be included.hcr. for example. whereas another may state “Shall not be less than…”.hcr” from the directory in which the Hydromax program resides. These options may either be set using the right-click menu or by ticking the appropriate boxes in the bottom of the dialog:
Intact and Damage tick-boxes. For example one criterion may state “Shall be greater than…”. Intact criteria are only evaluated for the intact case and damage criteria are evaluated when a damage case has been selected (irrespective of whether there are actually any damaged compartments or tanks in the damage case). which consists of the Parent criteria and a “My Custom Criteria” group. only the criteria that you create or import will be saved. By default this is c:\program files\Maxsurf\ Hydromax Criteria Library.
Default Criteria Library File
When starting.

however. so if you want to save any further changes you will have to resave as described above. These may be found in the “HMSpecificCriteria” folder. If this does occur. continue to be saved to the default criteria library file that was opened when Hydromax was first started. See Saving Criteria below.
Saving Criteria
It is also possible to save the criteria into a new file. The default criteria library will be over-written with the new criteria so if you wish to keep any custom criteria that you may have added to your default criteria library. A number of criteria containing criteria for specific codes are supplied with Hydromax. Note It is good practise to save the criteria file with the project in the project folder. Choose Save Criteria As from the File menu. Further updates will. not in the new groups. when at a later stage you need to re-analyse the project. This will simply export all the custom criteria (parent criteria are not saved) to the specified file. This can be useful when you are defining new custom sets of criteria that you wish to keep separate or when defining criteria sets for different vessels.
Page 173
. You will then be asked if you wish to keep the existing criteria:
If you choose “Yes” your existing criteria will be kept. if you choose “No”.
Importing Criteria and Specific Criteria Files
New criteria may be added to your criteria list by importing them – choose Import Criteria from the File menu. Even if you loaded an alternative file. That way. or Ctrl select to select multiple files in the Open Hydromax Criteria dialog. Note that when keeping your existing criteria. updates will be saved in the default criteria library. you must save them in a new file first. it is important to ensure that the group names in the file you are importing are not the same as those that already exist. You can import several criteria files in one go using Shift.Chapter 4 Stability Criteria
The default criteria library will be automatically updated every time the criteria dialog is closed. the imported criteria will be found in the original groups. all existing criteria except the parent criteria will be removed and replaced by those in the file you are opening. all criteria are still available. either overwriting the existing one or creating a new one.

Intermediate values are displayed. e.html.
Criteria Results Table
The tested criteria are listed one above the other.Chapter 4 Stability Criteria
Criteria File Format
The criteria are saved in a Hydromax criteria file with the extension . Results may be displayed in “Verbose” or “Compact” format (see above). Chose the Display | Data Format command when the Stability Criteria results are displayed:
Page 174
. criteria are evaluated and the results displayed in the Stability Criteria table in the Results window.hcr. The file is a normal PC text file. Values that could not be calculated.. Editing this file will also allow you to add your own help text or associate rich text format help files (rtf) files with your criteria. The typical format of the file is given in the following file: c:\Program Files\Maxsurf\\HMCriteriaHelp\CriteriaHelp. have n/a in the Actual and/or Value column. angle of equilibrium. Criteria can also be re-evaluated without having to redo the analysis when “Close and Recalculate” is selected in the criteria dialog.
Criteria Results
After a Large Angle Stability or Equilibrium analysis.g. After calculation the relevant criteria are also added to the Report. which may be edited manually so as to generate custom criteria. The format for the results table and the report are specified separately. This is normally due to an insufficient range of heel angle having been used. etc. This allows you to edit criteria parameters or selected criteria and re-evaluate using the existing analysis results.: angle of vanishing stability.

Chapter 4 Stability Criteria
Stability criteria results window: compact format
Stability criteria results window: verbose format
Page 175
.

any criteria that have a “not analysed” result. These criteria are often referred to as Large Angle Stability (LAS) or GZ criteria. freeboard measurements. For example damage criteria during intact analysis or Equilibrium criteria during a Large Angle Stability analysis are not added to the report. only the relevant criteria results are added to the Report and/or Batch file. For example. etc. There are two distinct types of criteria: Equilibrium criteria Equilibrium criteria are evaluated after an Equilibrium analysis and refer only to the condition of the vessel in its equilibrium state For example: margin line immersion tests. metacentric height. Criteria derived from measurements of the GZ curve. Equilibrium criteria can be recognised by the icon. This type of criterion is also used by the Floodable Length analysis. trim angle.
Page 176
. area under GZ curve between specified limits. Note: The metacentre is always (even for Large Angle Stability criteria) computed directly from the vessel‟s hydrostatic properties (i. Criteria that are not relevant. water-plane inertia and immersed volume) at the specified heel angle and not from the slope of the GZ curve. angle of maximum GZ.e. Also see Reporting on page 155 Batch Analysis on page 138
Nomenclature
This section gives a brief description of the various values that are determined by Hydromax in the evaluation of criteria. These are calculated after a Large Angle Stability analysis and during a Limiting KG analysis.Chapter 4 Stability Criteria
Report and Batch Processing
As noted earlier. This gives an accurate result that is not dependent on the heel angles and intervals tested during the analysis. the third graph shows the GZ curve with a heeling arm overlayed. are not added to the Report (although they are displayed in the Criteria Results table).e.
Definitions of GZ curve features
Some typical GZ curves are shown below. etc. i.

Chapter 4 Stability Criteria
Typical GZ curve
Unusual GZ curve with double peak
Page 177
.

The equilibrium angle with a given heeling arm is the angle closest to zero where the GZ curve crosses the heel arm curve where the GZ-Heel Arm curve has positive slope. In some cases. The angle of the first peak is the lowest positive angle at which a local maximum in the GZ curve occurs. this often occurs if the vessel has a large watertight cabin.
Page 178
.Chapter 4 Stability Criteria
GZ curve with heeling arm superimposed GZ Definitions
The table below defines how Hydromax calculates the various features of the GZ curve: Angle of vanishing stability Angle of vanishing stability with heeling arm curve Downflooding angle Equilibrium angle Equilibrium angle with heeling arm curve First peak in GZ curve The angle of vanishing stability is the smallest positive angle where the GZ curve crosses the GZ=0 axis with negative slope. the GZ curve may have multiple peaks. The angle of vanishing stability with a given heeling arm is the smallest positive angle where the GZ curve crosses the heel arm curve and where the GZ-Heel Arm curve has negative slope. The downflooding angle is the smallest positive angle at which a downflooding point becomes immersed. The equilibrium angle is the angle closest to zero where the GZ curve crosses the GZ=0 axis with positive slope.

it is often necessary to calculate the GZ curve for negative angles of heel.
Page 179
. The heeling arms are never allowed to be negative. 1998 CODATA recommended value for standard acceleration of gravity A negative heel angle change.80665ms-2 Roll back angle The maximum slope of an initially horizontal. which is superimposed on the GZ curve. Often a roll back angle is measured from some equilibrium position. if the cos function goes negative. Depending on the moment that they represent. These include the effects of wind. etc. Commonly used in wind and weather criteria to account for the action of waves rolling the vessel into the wind. the resulting heel angle after the roll back has been applied is more negative than the original. rotated to the specified heel (and trim) angle.Chapter 4 Stability Criteria
GML or GMT
GZ Curve Heeling arm curve
Vertical separation of the longitudinal or transverse metacentre and centre of gravity. Deck Slope / maximum slope Gust Ratio g = 9. flat deck at the resultant vessel heel and trim. the Gust Ratio is the ratio of the magnitude of the gust wind heeling arm to the steady wind heeling arm. the heeling arm is made zero. The location of the metacentre is computed from the water-plane inertia.heel arm) is a maximum
Maximum GZ Maximum GZ above heeling arm curve
Glossary
The table below describes some commonly used terms: Angle of heel measured from upright. Note that the centre of gravity used is the upright centre of gravity corrected by the free surface moments of partially filled tanks in their upright condition. not the slope of the GZ curve. which are applied to the vessel. centripetal effects of tuning. the heeling arm is forced to be zero at heel angles greater than 90° and less than -90°. i. This is typically used to assess the effects of external heeling moments. The curve of vessel righting arm (GZ) plotted against vessel heel angle A curve of heeling lever. Positive angle at which the value of GZ is a maximum Positive angle at which the value of (GZ . If the heeling arm has a power of cos greater than zero. combined effect of heel and trim.e. passenger crowding. the heeling arm curves will have different shapes. Used for some wind heeling criteria. If a criterion uses a roll back angle.

Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference

**Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
**

This chapter contains brief descriptions of the tools available in Hydromax:

Windows Toolbars Menus

Windows

Hydromax uses a range of graphical, tabular, graph and report windows.

View Window Loadcase Window Damage Window Input Window Results Window Graph Window Report Window

Assembly View and Property Sheet

An assembly view has been added to Hydromax, this makes it easier to control the visibility of individual tanks and surfaces. The Properties sheet can be used to change tank properties of the tank currently selected in the Assembly or design View.

View Window

The View window displays the hull, frame of reference, immersed sections of the hull and any compartments, and the centroids of gravity, buoyancy, and flotation. These positions are represented by: cb cg cf K centre of buoyancy centre of gravity centre of flotation location of keel (K) for KN during KN analysis

You can choose which type of view is displayed by selecting from the Window menu or the View toolbar. The Zoom, Shrink, Pan and Home View commands from the View menu may be used and work in exactly the same way as in Maxsurf. If a Perspective view is shown, you may also use the Pitch, Roll and Yaw indicators to change the angle of view. Please refer to the Maxsurf manual if you are unfamiliar with these functions. You may set the visibility of the various display elements by using the Visibility command from the Display menu. Two sets of visibility flags are maintained, one is used for all analyses other than tank calibration and the other is used for when the tank calibration analysis is selected.

Page 181

Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference

If a view window is visible when an analysis is being carried out, it will display the hull shape using the correct heel trim and immersion for the current step of the analysis. After an analysis, the Select View from Data command in the Display menu may be used to move the hull to a selected position from the Results window. The view of the tanks, compartments and non-buoyant volumes can be toggled between an outline view and a view of the sections.

Perspective view

In the perspective view, the model may be rendered.

The rendered view also enables tanks and compartments to be more easily visualised, especially when the hull shell is made transparent.

The rendering options are to be found in the Display menu, with further lighting options in the Render toolbar. Please refer to the Maxsurf manual for more information on the different rendering options available in perspective view.

Page 182

Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference

Note: Fastest performance will be achieved by reducing the amount of redrawing that is required from Hydromax. For this reason, it is best to turn off sections, and especially waterlines, when performing an analysis. You may then turn them on again after the analysis has completed. For fastest performance, e.g. when running in Batch mode, minimise the Hydromax window so that no redrawing occurs.

Loadcase Window

In the Loadcase window a spreadsheet table of all loads and tanks is displayed.

Using the tabs on the bottom of the window allow you to quickly browse through the different loadcases. Hydromax allows you to improve the presentation of the Load Case window by adding blank, heading or sub-total lines in the table. For more information see Working with Loadcases on page 38. The columns that are displayed may be selected using the Display | Data Format dialog.

Damage Window

The Damage window is used to specify which tanks and compartments are flooded in each damage case. There is always an Intact case, which cannot be edited, this is the default condition. If flooded volumes are required in the intact case they should be defined as non-buoyant volumes.

Page 183

Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference

Input Window

The Input window contains tables where the additional Hydromax design data is entered. The tables in the Input window contain the:

Compartment Definition Sounding Pipes Key Points Margin Line Points Modulus Points Bulkhead locations

The input window contains tabs on the bottom that allow you to quickly browse through the different input tables.

Compartment Definition

This table can be used to define the tanks and compartments in the Hydromax models. For more information see Modelling Compartments on page 51 in the Analysis Input section.

Sounding Pipes

This table is used to define the tank sounding pipes and calibration intervals. Default values are provided but these may be edited if necessary.

Page 184

Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference

Key Points

**There are several types of Key Points:
**

Down Flooding points Potential Down flooding points Embarkation points Immersion Points

**Only downflooding points are used in determining the downflooding angle, which is used in criteria evaluation.
**

Margin Line Points

The margin line is used in a number of the criteria. Hydromax automatically calculates the position of the margin line 76mm below the deck edge when the hull is first read in. If necessary, the points on the margin line may be edited manually in the Margin Line Points window (the deck edge is automatically updated so that it is kept 76mm above the margin line).

Modulus Points

This table is used to define the allowable limits for shear force and bending moment during the longitudinal strength calculations.

Bulkheads

See Floodable Length Bulkheads on page 77. Results Window

The Results window contains ten tables, one for each of the different analysis types plus criteria results and key points results tables. When switching mode, the currently selected results table will change to reflect the current analysis mode. Note that results are never invalidated if analysis options are modified – it is up to the user to ensure that the results are recalculated as necessary.

Setting the Data Format

It is possible to configure Hydromax so that only the results that you wish to see are displayed. To do this, choose Data Format from the Display menu.

Page 185

For example. You may change the display format at any time after the analysis without having to redo the calculations. the data can be formatted so that each draft has a column of results.
To change the format.
Page 186
. but are not displayed. select Data Format from the Display menu. Items that are not selected are still calculated during the analysis cycle. with Upright Hydrostatics. The data available for display depends on the analysis. or so that each draft is on a separate row.
Key Points Data Result Window
Key points data is calculated for Large Angle Stability. The DF angle column is only visible when the analysis mode is set to Large Angle Stability and the Freeboard column is only displayed when the analysis mode is set to Equilibrium or Specified condition.
Data Layout
Most analysis data can be formatted vertically or horizontally to fit better on the screen or the printed page. Items that are selected with a tick will be displayed in the Results window and on any printed output. and select either the horizontal or vertical layout button.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
A dialog similar to the one above will appear. Equilibrium and Specified condition Analysis.

Limiting KG and Equilibrium analyses.
Page 187
. the results can be displayed in verbose format. where all the intermediate calculations are shown. they will be evaluated during Large Angle Stability.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
Stability Criteria Result Window
If stability criteria are turned on in the analysis menu. by selecting the desired format in the Display | Data format dialog. The results of the criteria evaluation are presented in this table after Large Angle Stability and Equilibrium analyses. The results may be displayed in compact format:
Alternatively. Criteria results are not displayed in this table after a Limiting KG analysis.

Alternatively you can select a specific graph using the Windows | Graphs menu item. different graphs are available. which show the results of the current analysis.
Page 188
. Upright Hydrostatics Analysis:
Hydrostatics Curves of Form Curve of areas – different graph for each draft tested (selected using Display|Select view from data)
Large angle stability Analysis
Righting Lever (GZ) Curve of areas – different graph for each heel angle tested (selected using Display|Select view from data) Max steady heel angle Large angle stability (hydrostatic data other than GZ) Curves of Form Dynamic stability (GZ area)
Equilibrium Analysis:
Curve of areas
Specified condition Analysis:
Curve of areas
KN Values Analysis:
Cross curves (KN)
Limiting KG Analysis:
Limiting KG
Floodable length Analysis:
Floodable length
Longitudinal strength Analysis:
Longitudinal strength Curve of areas
Tank Calibration
One graph for each tank
For many graphs you can select what is plotted and other options with the Display | Data Format dialog.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
Graph Window
The Graph window displays graphs. Only the graphs that are applicable to the current analysis can be displayed. Graphs can be copied using the Edit | Copy command. Hydromax will automatically display the graph that displays the result of the current analysis when you select Graph from the Windows menu or press the toolbar button. Depending on the analysis mode.

The area is integrated from zero heel angle to the location of the graph slider. Curves of Form. Click anywhere on the dashed line and drag it with the mouse.
Note: In case multiple curves are plotted in the same graph you can switch between the curves by clicking on them.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
Graph type
Hydromax can graph many types of data depending on the type of analysis being performed. The data in the lower left corner of the window will change to display the curve name and co-ordinates of the mouse on the curve.degrees and cannot be displayed in units of length. the slider data is displayed at the bottom of the Graph window.
GZ Graph
The GZ value. use the mouse to click anywhere on the curve. the area is always given in units of length. These can all be displayed via the Graphs item in the Windows menu.
Page 189
. These graphs include Upright Hydrostatics. Hydromax will ignore the exact position you click on the curve to allow reading all related interpolated values along the black dashed line. Floodable Length and Tank Capacities. Area and corresponding heel angle can be measured by using the slider.radians. Longitudinal Strength. as you move the cursor the interpolated values will be displayed.
Interpolating Graph Data
To display an interpolated value from one of the curves. Curve of Areas. Righting Lever (GZ curve). Tip: You can use the Select View from Analysis Data option (page 159) to see the Curve of Areas for each heel angle and/or intermediate stage during the analysis. Note: Because the horizontal axis scale is always in degrees.

Thus if you require the area between two limits. If this is the case. this double click can be extremely helpful to export the analysis data to for example Excel fro further processing.
Curve fitting for GZ graph
A curve fit will be performed if all the heel angle intervals are less than or equal to 10˚. Also see: Copying Tables on page 158. you must subtract the area at the lower limit from the area at the higher limit. The View | Font command allows you to change the text size and font size.
Graph Formatting
When you are in the Graph window you can use the View | Colours and lines dialog to change the colours of the curves in the graph as well as the background. This ensures that the fitted line goes exactly through the calculated GZ points. add a heel angle interval of greater than 10˚ as the final step. This can sometimes be useful if you expect a discontinuity in the GZ curve.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
Note The lower integration limit is always zero (irrespective of the equilibrium angle). If you wish to prevent this curve fitting.
Copying Graphs
You can copy the contents of the Graph window using the Copy command or Ctrl+C. a parametric cubic spline is used to fit a smooth curve through the calculated GZ data at the specified heel angles.
Page 190
. Note that the picture is placed in the clipboard as a meta-file which can be resized in Word or Excel. Since the graph data contains more data points than most tables in the results window.
Graph data
The graphed data can be obtained by double clicking on the graph. where there is no tabular data available. Especially in the case of the sectional area curve.

it is recommended that the report window be used only to accumulate the results.
Page 191
. these should be saved and opened in a word processor such as Microsoft Word or Open Office for formatting:
set the results tables up as you want them to appear in the report (the report uses the same column widths. However. fonts etc.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
Note When the graph is pasted in Microsoft Word®. once the tables have been placed into the report. printed. this will facilitate generating a table of contents and also allows you to re-format the various styles (or import a custom set of styles using the style organiser in Word). do the same for the graph widow.). so choosing a wide paper size will prevent all but the widest tables from being split). choose an appropriate paper size for the report (the tables will be split to fit this paper size. Use the Format | Autoformat function in Word (with the default settings) to set the correct styles for the different levels of heading in the document. saved to and recalled from a disk file. their formatting will not be changed by changes to the print set up. Once all the results have been gathered in the report window. both Loadcase and Criteria results tables will not be split. indentation and margin widths. as well as a ruler showing you tab stops. You can for example choose the landscape Page Setup prior to running an analysis to make the tables fit better. This is important because. As the built-in report window only has basic editing and formatting functionality. However.
Report Window Page Setup
When you are in the Report window. Copy and Paste. the File | Page setup command allows you to customise the page orientation and size you wish to use for reporting. Hydromax will split most results tables so they fit the specified page set up. This window is used to create a progressive summary of the analyses that have been carried out.
Report Window
Hydromax contains a Report window. Underneath all of this you have your actual editing area. This report can be edited via Cut. Hence it is often most convenient to select the desired report page set up before any analyses have been made. the graph can be edited by right clicking on the graph and selecting “edit picture”. inserted tables will be automatically formatted to fit the current page set up.
Editing a Report
The Report window has it's own toolbar permanently attached to the view. copy and paste the Hydromax report into Microsoft word.

in metric and in inches . The toolbar contains the following items: Font combo box Font Size combo box Bold Italic Underline Colour Left Justify Centre Justify Right Justify Bullet
Use this to change the current font Use this to change the current font size Use this to toggle the Bold style Use this to toggle the Italic style Use this to toggle the Underline style Use this to set Text Colour Use this to set Left Justification Use this to set Centre Justification Use this to set Right Justification Use this to toggle Bullet Points
The Ruler comes in two formats. but it is strongly recommended not to use any of the formatting commands in the Report window. or the section of text that is currently highlighted. The toolbar has a number of buttons that allow you to change either the current settings.
Page 192
.the format you have displayed on your screen depends on the current Dimension Units you have (use Units in the Display menu to change this). The format shown below is metric.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
The information below is provided for reference.

simply click the left mouse button on the tab symbol on the ruler.
Page 193
. if you highlight a block of text before initiating a tab command. click the right mouse button at the specified location on the ruler. The 'right' tab stop aligns the text at the current tab stop such that the text ends at the tab marker. To create a right tab stop. (Load in the old report. Normally. click the left mouse button at the specified location on the ruler. centre. drag the tab to the desired location and release the mouse button. However. the tab command is then applicable to all the lines in the highlighted block of text. the new results will be appended to the end of the report which may then be resaved). The 'centre' tab stop centres the text at the current tab position. To create a centre tab stop. To clear a tab position. To create a decimal tab stop. While the mouse button is depressed. A paragraph can have as many as 20 tab positions.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
The Ruler allows you to set left. The centre tab stop is indicated on the ruler by a straight arrow. simply click on the desired tab marker and drag it off the ruler. The tab stops are very useful for creating columns and tables. hold the shift key and click the left mouse button at the specified location on the ruler. This is useful if you wish to append an analysis to a report that had been calculated at some time in the past. The decimal tab stop is indicated on the ruler by a dot under a straight arrow. The right tab stop is indicated on the ruler by an arrow with a tail toward the left. and decimal tab stops. The 'left' tab stop indicates where the text following the tab character will start. To create a left tab stop. a tab command is applicable to every line of the current paragraph. perform the analyses. The left tab stop is indicated on the ruler by an arrow with a tail toward the right. The 'decimal' tab stop aligns the text at the decimal point.
Keyboard Support for Reports
In addition to menu support. right. These are listed below for convenience: Ctrl+B Toggle Bold on/off Ctrl+U Toggle Underline on/off Ctrl+PageUp Ctrl+PageDown Ctrl+Enter Position at the top of the report Position at the bottom of the report Insert a page break
Opening and Saving the Report
The report can be saved to a file or read in from a file using the Save and Open Menu commands with the report window highlighted. hold the shift key and click the right mouse button at the specified location on the ruler. To move a tab position using the mouse. there are also several useful keystrokes that are available while editing the report.

The image copied is as per the image displayed in the Hydromax view window. You can hold your mouse over an icon to reveal a pop-up tip of what the icon does. the image may not maintain its aspect ratio and may be pasted into the report as a square.Delete Row | Sort Loadcase Rows – Move Loadcase/Tank Row up – Move Loadcase/Tank Row Down
View Toolbar
The View toolbar contains icons that execute the following commands: Zoom – Shrink – Pan – Home View – Rotate – Assembly window. This is very easily done. paste the image into Microsoft Word first. To overcome this problem.
File Toolbar
The File toolbar contains icons that execute the following commands: New – Open – Save – Cut – Copy – Paste – Print
Edit Toolbar
The Edit toolbar contains icons that execute the following commands: Add Row . Depending on which Microsoft operating system you are using (notably Win98).Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
Pasting images into the report
Sometimes. then copy it from Word back into the Hydromax report window.
Toolbars
Hydromax has a number of icons arranged in toolbars to speed up access to some commonly used functions. Ensure that the colors selected will be easily visible in the white background of the report view. by copying an image from one of the design views and then pasting it into the report at the desired location. it is desirable to insert schematic images of the vessel into the report.
Page 194
.

– NBV – Tank Names – Tank Fluid Level – Tank Sections – Tank Outlines | Probabilistic Damage Zones * NBV = Non Buoyant Volume
Page 195
.
Window Toolbar
Allows quick switching between commonly used windows: Perspective – Plan – Profile – Body Plan | Loadcase – Damage Case | Compartment – Downflooding – Margin Line – Modulus – Bulkheads | Results for Current Analysis – Criteria Results – Key Point Results | Graph – Report
Design Grid Toolbar
The Design Grid toolbar contains icons that show or hide various items in the graphical views Frame of Reference (always on) | Toggle Design Grid Visibility Design Grid | Design Grid Labels | Design Grid Tickmarks
Visibility Toolbar
The Visibility toolbar contains icons that show or hide various items in the graphical views: Sections – Datum Waterline – Waterlines | Key Points – Margin Line | Loadcase mass items | Tanks – Damaged Tanks – Compartments – Damaged Compart.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
The Rotate command is only available in the Perspective window. loadcase and damage case: Analysis Type – Current Loadcase – Current Damage Case
The Analysis toolbar also contains icons that execute the following commands: Criteria (dialog) | Start Analysis – Pause Analysis – Resume Analysis | Update Tank Values in Loadcase The “Update Tank Values in Loadcase” is exactly the same as the menu command for “Recalculate Tanks and Compartments on page 206. The Assembly window is not available in Hydromax. – Linked Negative Compartment.
Analysis Toolbar
The Analysis toolbar contains icons for selecting the current analysis.

Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
Edge VIsibility Toolbar
The Visibility toolbar contains icons that show or hide various items in the graphical views: Hull Surface Edges – Internal Surface Edges – Feature Edges – Bonded Edges
Render Toolbar
Render – Render transparent – Toggle custom light 1 – Toggle custom light 2 – Toggle custom light 3 – Toggle custom light 4 – Customise light settings
Report Toolbar
Spool results to report
View (extended) Toolbar
Set Home View – Colour – Font – Preferences – Properties
Design Grid Toolbar
Display Frame of Reference (always on) – Display Design Grid – Show Grid – Show Labels – Show Ticks
Extra Buttons ToolbarToolbar
Add surface areas to loadcase – Preferences | Heel – Trim – Draft – Displacement – Displacement – Specified Condition – Permiability – Fluid simulation – Densities – Waveform – Grounding – Batch Analysis Data Format – Units – Coefficients – Set to DWL – Set View from Data –Visibility Dialog – Show Single Section
Page 196
.

click the Open button.
Open
When no design is open.
Save
Selecting Save will save the contents of the frontmost window to a file on the disk. the New command will create a new loading condition.g: when the Loadcase Condition is the frontmost window. Select the design you wish to open.
New
Creates a new table for whichever input table is frontmost. selecting the Open command will show a dialog box with a list of available Maxsurf designs.
Close
The Close command will delete the data in the frontmost window. Hydromax will ask whether you wish to save any changes. the Open command will open whichever file corresponds to the frontmost input window.
Import
Allows import of file types other than Maxsurf design files
Page 197
.
Save As
Selecting Save As performs the same function as save but allows you to specify a new filename preventing the original file from being overwritten.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
This toolbar provides a number of buttons for commonly used commands in case you should wish to customise your toolbars. e.
Menus
The following section describes all of the menu commands available in the Hydromax program. If a design is already open. New creates a new compartment definition. Selecting Close when one of the design view windows is frontmost will close the current Maxsurf design.
File Menu Edit Menu View Menu Case Menu Analysis Menu Display Menu Data Menu Window Menu Help Menu
File Menu
The File menu contains commands for opening and saving files and printing. The requested design will be read in and its hull shape calculated for use in Hydromax. When the Compartment Definition table is frontmost.

The buoyant hull is exported as a single part with a single buoyant component (Non-buoyant volumes are included in this part as components with negative effectiveness). The full model including critical points. three-dimensional model of the hull. bmp or png) file into the background of any of the Hydromax design views. A full GHS model file may be imported directly into Hydromax for analysis. Linked negative tanks are not supported in Hydromax. The DXF file will be displayed in the design views. GHS Allows direct import of a GHS geometry file. Import Image Background Enables you to import an image file (jpg. It is possible that this might cause problems for some models where the section through the hull at a certain location contains more than one closed contour. GHS If you have a Hydrolink license. the geometry is locked: the tank geometry is locked and tanks cannot be added to the model. IGES exports the NURB surface data. interconneceted. tanks and sounding pipes are read from the GHS file. compartment and non-buoyant volume is exported on a separate layer (the layer name being the same as the compartment name. In addition.
Hydromax supports only a single buoyant hull part with one byouant component. each tank.
Hydromax v8.
Page 198
. gif. The buoyant hull part with the most sections is loaded from the GHS file. In subsequent versions of Hydromax we will add the capability to divide the main buoyant hull into different components. To enable the export command. chose Edit | Activate GHS export. Any container parts with elements with negative effectiveness will be read in as tanks. but will be removed in subsequent versions:
Hydromax supports only a single buoyant hull part. you may export the Hydromax model to a GHS geometry file.0 file Also allows users to export Hydromax files that are compatible with earlier versions of Hydromax. All other cotainers are read in as tanks. The following limitations currently apply. Because the GHS file does not contain a full. tanks and compartments and key points are all exported.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
nuShallo Allows direct import of a nuShallo pan file. Sail parts are ignored
Import DXF Background Enables you to import a DXF file into Hydromax to use as construction lines. The hull. so it is important to have unique compartment names). See the Maxsurf manual for more information.
Export
Selecting Export enables you to export a Hydromax file as a variety of different file formats such as: DXF or IGES DXF exports sections as closed poly-lines.

out: Tank calibration results and compartment definitions . Fredyn mesh group definition When exporting from Hydromax to Fredyn you will be asked to name the .
Allows you to export the rendered image as a bitmap file at the specified Import Main Criteria
Imports criteria from the selected criteria files. The Export will generate 3 files. the following dialog will appear:
“Fredyn group definition” dialog
This dialog is where the user will specify the values for the variables used to generate the mesh file that defines the geometry of the hull. all with the name you specify in the “Fredyn Export XML” dialog. any number of groups may be added and for each group.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
Export Bitmap Allows you to export the rendered image as a bitmap file at the specified resolution. The following files will be generated . hull form and compartment definitions into Fredyn input files. To export use the File|Export|Fredyn… command. Current criteria may be kept or discarded. as this information is required for the export. In the group definition dialog. Contours will be formed through the selected surfaces and then trimmed back to the bounding box. The groups are defined by selecting the surfaces to be measured and defining a boundary box that defines the limiting extents of the group. Fredyn Hydromax is able to export data suitable for input into Fredyn. exporting Hydromax calibration results.xml file and also the location to which it should be saved. Before doing the Fredyn export ensure you have specified the desired trim and heel ranges.xml file name. This command is only available when the Perspective window is frontmost with rendering turned on. and performed a tank calibration.xml: Containing compartment definition . After assigning the .
Page 199
. For more information on each of the fields in the table click on the Help button on the right hand side of the dialog.txt: Mesh file representing the current hull shape. The most important part of the procedure is setting up the groups required in the mesh file.

input tables.
Copy
The Copy command allows you to copy data from any of the windows. The whole library may be saved by right clicking on the root “Criteria” branch.
Undo
Undo may be used with desk accessories. this is not normally necessary as this is done after any major changes to the criteria definition.
Cut
Cut may be used in the Report window but cannot be used on Hydromax drawing or data windows.
Load Densities
Loads density table data previously saved from Hydromax – can be useful for synchronising the densities on several computers.
Print
The Print command allows you to print the contents of the frontmost window on the screen. Note that a branch of the criteria tree may be saved in its own file by right-clicking on the branch folder in the Criteria dialog tree. which have not been saved to disk. see Density of Fluids on page 150.
Page Setup
The Page Setup dialog allows you to change page size and orientation for printing. It is good practice to save the criteria library with each project in a project folder.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
Save Main Criteria As
Exports the current criteria set to the specified file.
Page 200
.
Import Prob Damage Criteria
As for main criteria but applies to the probabilistic damage criteria.
Save Prob Damage Criteria As
As for main criteria but applies to the probabilistic damage criteria. including the design view.
Exit
Exit will close Hydromax and all the data windows. results tables and graph window. Hydromax will ask you if you wish to save them before quitting.
Rest Prob Damage Criteria to defaults
Results the probabilistic damage criteria to their default values. but cannot be used on Hydromax drawing windows or data windows.
Save Densities As
Saves the Fluid densities table data.
Edit Menu
The Edit menu contains commands for working with tables. If you have any data or results.

Paste cannot be used in the View. the last row in the window will be deleted. tank. Insert New Table Create a new table in the Report.
Table
Performs operations on Hydromax's Report window. Show Grid Toggle table grid lines in the Report.
Sort Items
Sorts the selected rows in the Loadcase window
Page 201
. otherwise all selected rows will be deleted.). Graph or Results windows. Insert Row Insert a new row into the current table in the Report. or the Report window. Delete Cells Delete current cell. Cell Shading Set Cell Shading Percentage for a single cell or a range of cells in the Report. column or row or a range of cells.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
Paste
Choose the Paste command to Paste data into the Loadcase window or other input tables. Merge Cells Merge the selected cells in a table into a single cell in the Report.
Fill Down
Copies text in a table down a column like a spreadsheet. margin line point etc. Split Cell Split the currently selected cell into two separate cells in a table in the Report. columns or rows in the Report. Cell Border Set Cell Border Width for a single cell or range of cells in the Report.
Add
The Add command is used to add an entry to the input tables (Load. If no rows are selected.
Select All
Selects the entire Report. Row Positioning Set Justification for the current table row or an entire table in the Report.
Delete
The Delete command will delete rows from the input tables.

To set the Home View.
Page 202
.
Rotate
Activates the Rotate command. It can also be used to release the Hydrolink license – a restart of Hydromax will be required for this to take effect.
Pan
Choosing Pan allows you to move the image around within the View window.
Add Surface Areas
This command automatically adds the surface areas and centres of gravity of all hull surfaces into the current loading condition.
Shrink
Choosing Shrink will reduce the size of the displayed image in the design view windows by a factor of two.
Zoom
The Zoom function allows you to examine the contents of the design view windows in detail by enlarging the selected area to fill the screen. and Pan to arrange the view. This is useful for estimating the initial weight of hull plating. use Zoom.
Set Home View
Choosing Set Home View allows you to set the Home View in the View window.
View Menu
The View menu contains commands for controlling the views in the graphics windows. Shrink. which is a virtual trackball which lets you freely rotate a design in the Perspective view window. Also see: Tolerances on page 146 Streaming results to Word on page 155.
Home View
Choosing Home View will set the image back to its Home View size. then select Set Home View from the View menu.
Activate / Deactivate GHS Export
This command activates the GHS Import command in the File menu if a Hydrolink License is available.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
Move Items Up
Moves the selected rows up (if possible) in the Loadcase and Compartment definition tables.
Preferences
The Hydromax preferences dialog allows you to set your analysis tolerances (or: error values) and select the option to stream the report to a Microsoft Word document.
Move Items Down
Moves the selected rows down (if possible) in the Loadcase and Compartment definition tables.

To change the colour click in the box and select a new colour from the palette. select the item whose colour you wish to change. To Change the thickness select the thickness from the drop down list.
The text style chosen will affect the display and printing of all text in the Report. Graph.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
Colours and lines
The Colours and lines function allows you to set the colour and thickness of the lines.
Toolbar
Allows you to turn the Toolbars on and off. which may be used to view parameters of selected objects (such as tanks). In general it is best to use a neutral background such as mid grey or dull blue and use lighter or darker shades of a colour rather than fully saturated hues. It is very easy to get carried away with bright colours and end up with a garish display that is uncomfortable to work with.
Font
Font command allows you to set the size and style of text. and Results windows.
Page 203
. From the scrollable list. Curve of Areas. Remember to always be careful when using colour. See Loadcase Colour Formatting on page 44. Colours for the loadcase items can be set.
Assembly
Show or hide the assembly tree view. The item‟s current colour will be displayed on the left of the dialog.
Status Bar
Allows you to turn the Status Bar on and off at the bottom of the screen. labels. and graphs.
Properties
Displays the properties sheet. When Loadcase window is frontmost. Loadcase.

number of Loadcases
Specify the number of loadcase tabs – this requires a restart to activate the changes made.
Analysis Menu
The Analysis menu can be used to change the current analysis mode.
Page 204
.
Create cases from Zone Damage
Automatically creates damage cases based on the zones that have been defined for Probabilistic damage analysis. the zone or sub-zone).Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
Full Screen
Maximises screen usage.
Add Damage case
Add another damage case
Delete Damage case
Delete the selected damage cases
Edit Damage case
Edit the properties of the selected damage case
Extent of Damage
Automatically finds the breached tanks and compartments due to a cuboid extent of damage (or in the case of Probabilisitic damage. opened and closed through the file menu. See Working with Loadcases on page 38. when running Probabilistic damage analysis. It also contains commands to set the input data and analysis settings and environment options required for the current analysis. (This is only required if you want to manually recreate some or all of the Proabilistic damage analysis conditions.
Case Menu
Commands associated with the Loadcases and Damage cases
Edit Loadcase
Edit the properties of the current Loadcase (name and whether it is a loadcase or Loadgroup). temporary damage conditionas are created automatically. Loadcases are created.)
Max.

Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
Note: It is good practice when preparing to run analysis to work down the Analysis menu starting at the top and checking all of the settings and environment options.
Fluids
Allows you to specify whether to use Corrected VCG method or Simulate Fluid Movement method when treating the fluid contained in slack tanks. Separate ranges are used for Large Angle Stability.
Permeability
The range of permeabilities used for the Floodable Length analysis are set using this command.
Draft
The range of drafts used for the analysis of upright hydrostatics can be set using this command. free-to-trim to loadcase.
Density
This command allows you to set the density of fluids used in the analysis. See Fluids Analysis Methods on page 148. This can be fixed trim.
Waveform
The Waveform command allows you to perform analysis for a flat waterplane or sinusoidal or trochoidal waveforms.
Page 205
. See Density on page 150.
Trim
Allows the specification of the trimming mode to be used for the analysis.
MARPOL Options
Select MARPOL Regulation and specify which tanks should be incuded in the MARPOL oil outflow analysis. Trim. CG.
Calibration Options
Specify whether compartments and non-buoyant volumes should also be calibrated. Displacement and Draft for the Specified Condition analysis. KG for the upright hydrostatics is also specified in this dialog. The vertical centre of gravity to be used for KN and Floodable Length analyses is specified here.
Heel
Selecting Heel allows you to specify the three ranges of heel angles that you wish Hydromax to step through. KN and Limiting KG analyses.
Specified Condition
Allows you to specify Heel. free-to-trim specifying initial trim value and free-totrim specifying LCG position. Limiting KG and Floodable Length can be set using this command.
Displacement
The range of displacements used for the analysis of KN values.

Update Loadcase
Checks for changed tanks and makes sure that any tanks and compartments that have not been formed are correctly calculated.
Recalculate Hull Sections
Deletes all existing hull.
Grounding
Specifies grounding on one or two points of variable length for use with the Equilibrium and Longitudinal Strength analyses.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
Criteria
The criteria menu item will bring up the criteria dialog. the criteria command will bring up a Floodable Length Criteria dialog with criteria that only apply to floodable length analysis. Also see: Margin Line Points on page 76. if you wish to recalculate at a different precision. This is particularly useful if the underlying Maxsurf model has been modified. This command also updates the loadcase. ensuring that the margin line follows the hull shape precisely. If any of the tank boundaries are made up from boundary surfaces. When the floodable length analysis is selected.
Set Analysis Type
Choose the analysis type you wish to use from the sub-menu. tank and compartment sections and recalculates them from the hull surface data and compartment definition. It then updates the loadcase with the correct capacities and free surface moments for the tanks. Note: To be able to update the Hydromax model to changes made in Maxsurf see Updating the Hydromax Model on page 26 for a step-by-step procedure you can follow. See Criteria on page 163. Also recalculates totals and subsubtotals after a row sorting or moving command. it is better to use “Recalculate Hull Sections” after re-opening the Maxsurf model to make sure the latest internal structure surfaces are being used as well. Also see: Tank Loads on page 46
Recalculate Tanks and Compartments
Forces all tanks and compartments to be re-formed from their initial definition. or if you wish to modify whether skin thickness or trimming options are applied.
Page 206
. This allows you to specify which criteria will be checked during the analysis.
Snap Margin Line to Hull
Project all of the margin line points horizontally onto the hull surface.

Start Batch Analysis
Hydromax will run the selected analyses for all combinations of load and damage cases using the batch processing command. See Setting the Data Format on page 185.
Resume Analysis
If you have halted analysis by choosing Stop Analysis. A dialog box allows you to choose from a range of stability variables.
Data Format
Data Format allows you to choose which data are tabulated and graphed (Upright Hydrostatics. also. Results are written to a tab delimited text file as specified by the user at the start of the analysis.
Stop Analysis
This command halts the analysis at the current iteration. Stability.
Hydrostatic results Data format dialog
Used to select display options for Criteria results:
Page 207
. equilibrium condition and KN values. Resume Analysis may be used to restart the calculation from the point where it was interrupted. Equilibrium and Specified Condition).
Display Menu
The Display menu contains commands for controlling the data.
Spool to Report
Send the results of the analysis to the report upon completion. any data displayed for the final iteration may be incorrect.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
Start Analysis
Selecting Start Analysis causes Hydromax to start performing the specified analysis. This should be turned on before commencing the analysis to ensure that results are added to the report when the analysis is completed. Note that the analysis may not have been completed and in the case of large angle stability. which are displayed in the graphics and other windows. The analysis may be halted at any time by choosing Stop Analysis from this menu.

Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
Criteria table Data format dialog
Used to select which columns are displayed in the Loadcase window:
Loadcase Data format dialog
When the Max. Safe heeling angle angles graph is shown as a result of a Large Angle Stability analysis the Data Format dialog may be used to customise the graph layout:
Page 208
.

This is required for automatic update of the Loadcase (note that if you do not rotate back to the DWL. the Design View will change to match the condition in the selected row or column in the Results window. labels.
Page 209
. hull contours.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
Max safe heeling angle Data format dialog
May be used to customise the Floodable length graph:
Floodable length Data format dialog Set Vessel to DWL
Rotates the vessel back to upright and to DWL after an analysis has been completed (or Select View from Data used). and other items in the design view may be set by using this dialog. the Loadcase will not update while editing – only when start another analysis). not for tanks with the vessel at the final heel and trim of the last analysis.
Visibility
The visibility of tanks.
Select View from Data
This function may be used to synchronise the display in the Design View window with one of the sets of data in Results window. Large Angle Stability or Equilibrium analyses. Simply highlight the column or row that corresponds to the condition you wish to view and select “Select View From Data”.
Prob damage zones
Toggle the visibility of the probabilistic damage zones. The view may be set from any of the results from Upright Hydrostatics. This is to ensure that tank data in the Loadacase are for the vessel in the upright condition. compartments.

Set Image Zero Point Sets the image zero point. Hide Image Hides the background image in the current view window.
Background
Controls whether the background DXF construction lines and the background images are displayed or not. Tools for positioning and scaling the background image are also here.
Show Single Hull Section in Body Plan
Selecting the Show Single Hull Section item from the Display menu will change the display in the Body Plan window to show only one section through the hull. a trimmed state at the end of an equilibrium analysis. as well as a control box. The commands in the submenu are only available when a background image or DXF has been imported. Switching analysis type puts the boat back into upright position on its design waterline.
Design Grid
The grid submenu allows you to hide the grid or show the grid with or without station grid labels. Show DXF Shows the DXF background. in the top right corner of the window. Show Image Shows the image in the current view window. Delete Image Deletes the background image in the current view window. similar to the one in Maxsurf. The background may be loaded from an existing DXF file using the Import function in the File menu. Also see: Show Single Hull Section on page 30
Page 210
. This command is not available for images in the perspective window. Set Image Reference Point Sets the image reference point. This allows you to rapidly step through the hull sections from bow to stern. The option to display the grid will be greyed out when the ship is currently displayed in. See the Maxsurf manual for more details Hide DXF Hides the DXF background. Alternatively. The section being displayed can be chosen by clicking on the section indicators at the top of the control box. The grid can only be displayed when the vessel is in upright position on its design waterline. for example. Delete DXF background Deletes the DXF background. the section chosen can be changed by pressing the left or right cursor keys on your keyboard.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
Individual Loadcase masses
Toggle the visibility of the individual mass items in the current loadcase..

If animation is chosen after an Equilibrium Analysis has been performed in waves. See Customising Coefficients on page 36 for more information. Clicking the mouse button will terminate the animation.
Frame of Reference
Access to the Frame of Reference is intended for information only. Selecting Animate will animate the stability sequence in the design View window.
Render Transparent
When the Perspective window is the current view for the model the Render Transparent option may be toggled on and off. Roll and Yaw indicators. Hold the shift key down while selecting the command to save the animation.
Data Menu
Units
The units used may be specified using the Units command.
Page 211
.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
Render
When the Perspective window is the current view for the model the Render option may be toggled on and off to render the surfaces. When Hydromax has finished calculating the frames the sequence may be replayed by moving the mouse from side to side. In addition to the length and mass units classes.
Animate
This command is available for any analysis that steps through several steps. You may set the initial viewing position in the Perspective View window using the Pitch. may also be set. You are not expected to change the Design Grid in Hydromax. giving a simple visual simulation of the motion of the hull through the wave. the animation will automatically cycle through the full range of wave phases. through the range of heel angles specified. when a waveform has been specified and an equilibrium analysis is selected or after a Large Angle Stability analysis over a heeling range. units for speed (used in wind heeling and heeling due to high-speed turn etc. For example. The angular units for measuring heel and trim angles are always degrees. Render Transparent makes the hull surfaces of the model semi transparent so that the rendered tanks and compartments within the model may be viewed.
Coefficients
Allows you to customise how you wish to calculate the coefficients as well as the display format for the LCB and LCF. See Setting Units on page 37 for more information.
Design Grid
Access to the Design Grid is intended for information only. criteria) and the angular units to be used for areas under GZ curves. You are not expected to change the Frame of Reference in Hydromax.

Input
Choose from the Input item to bring the desired Input window to the front and display the Compartment Definition.
Page 212
. These inputs are used to calculate the total Displacement and Centre of Gravity for Stability. This will ensure that a consistent frame of reference is used in all the programs. Selecting the item brings the appropriate window to the front. KN and Equilibrium analysis. Margin Line Points or Modulus table.
Window Menu
For the items in this menu.
Cascade
Displays all the Windows behind the active Windows. each represents a Hydromax window. together with their longitudinal and vertical distances from the zero point.
Hydromax Help
Invokes Hydromax Help. See: Setting the Frame of Reference on page 18.
Graph
Brings the selected Graph window to the front.
Tile Horizontal
Layout all visible windows across the screen.
Results
Choose from the Results item to bring the desired Results window to the front and display the desired table. they may be changed using the Frame of Reference command.
View Direction
Select the desired view direction from the sub-menu.
Tile Vertical
Layout all visible windows down the screen.
Arrange Icons
Rearranges the icons of any iconised window so that they are collected together at the bottom of the Maxsurf program window.Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
If the position(s) of the Baseline and/or Perpendiculars need to be changed from those defined in the Maxsurf model.
Loadcase
Brings the Loadcase window to the front.
Help Menu
Provides access to Hydromax Help. The selected design window will then be brought to the front. The Graph window displays a number of different graphs. It is highly recommended that the correct frame of reference be set in Maxsurf prior to loading the design into Hydromax. Key Points. The Loadcase window allows you to enter a series of component weights. depending on which analysis mode is currently active.

Chapter 5 Hydromax Reference
Hydromax Automation Reference
Invokes the Automation Reference help system.
Check for Updates
Provides access to our website with the most recent version listed.
Page 213
.
Online Support
Provides access to a wide range of support resources available on the internet.
About Hydromax
Displays information about the current version of Hydromax you are using.

Here the baseline is horizontal and the perpendiculars are vertical.
Page 214
. However. etc. World or trimmed frame of reference The “world” or “trimmed” reference frame is that of the trimmed vessel. Here the baseline is no longer horizontal and neither are the perpendiculars vertical. these axis systems are no longer parallel. AM. “Longitudinal” measurements are made parallel to the horizontal. CP. there are two frames of reference: Ship or upright frame of reference The “ship” or “upright” reference frame is that of the upright vessel with zero-trim.
Measurement Reference Frames
Results in Hydromax are given from the vessel‟s zero point.) is achieved in Hydromax.
Definition and calculation of form parameters
Below is a summary of the definitions of basic vessel particulars and form parameters used in Hydromax. and investigates why differences with other hydrostatics packages may occur. because Hydromax treats trim exactly (the hull is rotated not sheared when trim occurs). static waterline and “vertical” measurements are perpendicular to the waterline
Rotated reference frame (red) and measurements in the two reference frames: Measurements in the upright vessel reference frame (green) and trimmed reference frame (blue)
When the vessel is upright (zero trim and zero heel) these axis systems are parallel.Appendix A
Appendix A: Calculation of Form Parameters
This Appendix explains how the calculation of form parameters (CB. “Longitudinal” measurements are made parallel to the baseline and “vertical” measurements are perpendicular to the baseline. However if the vessel is trimmed or heeled or rotated in both directions simultaneously.

Thus the metacentre is always vertically (in the earth-fixed axis system) above the centre of buoyancy by a distance BM = I / vol where I is the second moment of area of the waterplane. and measurements from the keel such as KB and KG. The same is true of TCB and TCG if the vessel is heeled. are measured in the “world” frame of reference. that are explicitly vertical.Appendix A
Ship-Fixed and Earth-Fixed(world) axis systems
The majority of measurements are given in the “ship” frame of reference. LCF. It is for this reason that. and only if the vessel is upright are the axis systems parallel and hence the equation holds).
Page 215
. This is because if the vessel is trimmed and if the VCG and VCB are not the same. LCB).e. i. in general. Similarly. These include longitudinal centres of gravity. Measurements such as BM. then there will be a sin(trim angle) term introduced. KM is not equal to KB+BM (BM is in a different axis system to KB and KM. GM. in generally for the vessel to be in equilibrium. GM is the true vertical separation of the metacentre and the centre of gravity with the vessel inclined and are always measured normal to the water surface. LCG is not equal to LCB – if both LCB and LCG are measured in the ship-axis system (of course if they are measured in the earthfixed axis system then they are the same. floatation and buoyancy (LCG.

These can be modified in the Data | Coefficients dialog shown below:
Page 216
. Length of design waterline Length between perpendiculars length of waterline under investigation Draft from some arbitrary baseline (normally the lowest point on the design) Maximum immersed depth (draft) of hull Draft (immersed depth) of station under investigation Immersed volume of displacement at waterline under investigation
Coefficient parameters
There are several options for calculating hullform coefficients. Longitudinal Centre of Floatation. parallel to baseline. measured in upright reference frame. Distance from keel (baseline) to centre of gravity. Length overall Longitudinal Centre of Buoyancy. measured in the trimmed reference frame Distance from keel (baseline) to centre of buoyancy. parallel to baseline. measured normal to the baseline.Appendix A Nomenclature
Amax Ams A AWP BOA BWL B b GM
KB KG LOA LCB LCF LCG LWL LBP L T0 T t
Maximum immersed cross-sectional area to waterline under investigation Immersed cross-sectional area to waterline under investigation amidships Immersed cross-section area: Amax or Ams as selected by user Area of waterplane at the waterline under investigation Overall beam of whole vessel (above and below waterline) Maximum waterline beam at design waterline Maximum beam of waterline under investigation Waterline beam of station under investigation Metacentric height: vertical distance from centre of gravity to metacentre. measured in upright reference frame. Longitudinal Centre of Gravity. parallel to baseline. measured in upright reference frame. measured normal to the baseline.

The after perpendicular is normally defined as the position of the rudder post. or possibly the transom. particularly for resistance prediction purposes. The forward perpendicular is normally defined as the intersection of the DWL with the bow. for calculations at drafts other than the DWL. this may be different from the length of the DWL (LWL) and in general. it may be appropriate to use the actual waterline length at that draft (L). In addition. features such as bulbous bows and overhangs can make the LBP. In some cases.
In Hydromax you may choose between the length between perpendiculars and the waterline length for the calculation of Block. will also be different from the LOA (overall length). Prismatic and Waterplane Area Coefficients. Select Coefficients from the Display menu:
Page 217
. Several lengths may be defined: the LBP is the length between perpendiculars. LWL and LOA quite different. it may be more appropriate to define an effective length of the underwater body.Appendix A
Length
The datum/design waterline or DWL is a waterline near which the fully loaded design is intended to float under normal circumstances.
Some of the more common lengths that may be used to characterise a vessel.

the beam used would be the sum of B1.
Vessel with tumble-home
Catamarans and other multihull vessels pose another difficulty. you can select various beams:
Page 218
.
Multihull beams
You may choose which beam should be used from the following list:
In the reported hydrostatics. and this may be of the DWL or the waterline under consideration. For the calculation of section area coefficients it is normal practice to use the beam and draft of the section in question. B2 and B3. the beam of the individual hulls may be required. For the section shown below. For catamarans this will be twice the demihull beam (remember that the total displaced volume is used and hence the block coefficient is the same as that of a single demihull). vessel with tumble-home or blisters). In some cases the overall beam is of importance. For the case of a monohull this will be the normal waterline beam.g. there may be times when it is appropriate to use the maximum immersed beam (e. in others. However.Appendix A
Beam
It is normal to use the maximum waterline beam for calculation of coefficients. submarine. Hydromax uses the total waterline beam of immersed portions of the section for calculation of block coefficient and other form parameters.

this is often the case when form parameters are calculated. Normally this datum is the lowest part of the upright hull. For a catamaran this would be from the outside of the port demihull to the outside of the starboard demihull. this would simply be the distance from the port side to the starboard side. You may select which depth should be used for the calculation of form parameters. However. In Hydromax drafts are defined from the datum line. Both depths are measured in upright position. The other beam values are calculated by summing the breadth of waterline crossings as described above. It should be noted that the section area will. however.:
Page 219
. but for a multihull. For a monhull without tunnels. include the appendages. for vessels with raked keel lines or yachts. Hydromax uses these values for computing coefficients. it will be less than the extents value. including the option of measuring the draft to the baseline – this gives the option of ignoring appendages such as fin keels when determining the draft to be used to calculate the form parameter (if the baseline is defined to the bottom of the canoe body for example). Hydromax uses the depths that stations extend below the waterline for calculation of form coefficients.
Draft
The draft is normally specified from a nominal datum. the datum may be elsewhere. However. this will be the same as the extents value.Appendix A
Calculated beams
The values “Beam extents” are those that measure the beam across the maximum port and starboard extents of the vessel. For a monhull. there are also occasions when the immersed depth of the section is a more relevant measure of draft.

however for some vessels it is defined as the midpoint of the DWL. Essentially the draft is measured along the heeled and trimmed perpendiculars on the centreline.
Difference between “Immersed depth” and “Draft” measurements
Midship and Max Area Sections
It is current usual practice to define the midship section as midway between the perpendiculars. perpendicular to the heeled waterline (see figure below).
Page 220
. In Hydromax. the draft becomes very large. the draft is measured through the intersection of the upright waterline and the centreline.Appendix A
Draft measurements
Draft measurement at heel angle When the vessel is heeled. For vessels with no parallel mid-body. the section with greatest cross-sectional area may also be of particular interest. It is for this reason that as the heel approaches 90degrees.
Draft measured along the inclined perpendicular lines
Immersed depth and Draft measurements The images below show the difference between the draft measurements (which are made in the inclined centreline plane of the vessel) and the immersed depth measurements (which are made normal to the free-surface). the position midway between the perpendiculars is defined as midships.

the midship section coefficient can be greater than unity. The beam used is that obtained by summing the immersed waterline crossings of the specified section. you may select which section area should be used: Hydromax uses the station with the maximum immersed cross-sectional area at the waterline under consideration. Hydromax uses the length beam and draft as selected in the Coefficients dialog to compute the block coefficient." It should be noted that. the actual definitions of the length. such as CP and CM. for sections that have significant tumble-home or blisters below the waterline. or may be defined according to another standard – this may be important for hulls with significant tumble-home or blisters below the waterline." However. In Hydromax midships is midway between the perpendiculars. The section area coefficient used by Hydromax. The beam and immersed depth of the selected section is used unless the draft to baseline option has been selected in which case this draft is used.Appendix A
When computing form coefficients. LWL or some effective length.
Block Coefficient
Principles of Naval Architecture defines the block coefficient as: "the ratio of the volume of displacement of the moulded form up to any waterline to the volume of a rectangular prism with length. The beam may be at amidships or the maximum moulded beam of the waterline.
Options for Section area coefficient
CM
A b t
Prismatic Coefficient
Principles of Naval Architecture defines the prismatic coefficient as:
Page 221
. breadth and depth equal to the length. beam and draft used vary between authorities. breadth and mean draft of the ship at that waterline. is calculated at either the station with maximum cross-sectional area or the midship section area (as defined in the Coefficients dialog).
CB
L B T
Section Area Coefficient
Principles of Naval Architecture defines the midship coefficient as: "The ratio of the immersed area of the midship station to that of a rectangle of breadth equal to moulded breadth and depth equal to moulded draft at amidships. Length may be LBP.

When the vessel is free-to-trim. the LCG and LCB will be at the same longitudinal position in the global coordinate system. Therefore a difference between the LCG and the LCB value will occur when the vessel is trimmed. but not in the frame of reference.
CP
L A
Waterplane Area Coefficient
Principles of Naval Architecture defines the waterplane area coefficient as: "The ratio between the area of the waterplane and the area of a circumscribing rectangle. See Customising Coefficients on page 36 for more information. The LCG and LCB are calculated in the “ship” or “upright” frame of reference." Hydromax uses the length and beam as selected. Hydromax uses the selected length and the selected immersed cross-section area Amax or Ams. This is explained in the figure below:
Effect of vertical separation of CG and CB on LCG and LCB measured in the Ship reference frame
Page 222
.Appendix A
"The ratio between the volume of displacement and a prism whose length equals the length of the ship and whose cross-section equals the midship section area.
CWP
AWP L B
LCG and LCB
Hydromax allows you to fully customise how you want to display the LCB and LCF values. see Measurement Reference Frames on page 214." Again the definition of midship section and vessel length depend on the standard being used.

assuming the deck inclination is zero when the vessel is in upright position. Tf are the aft and forward drafts at the corresponding perpendiculars and LPP is the length between perpendiculars. That can be either cm or inch depending on your unit settings.
Page 223
.Appendix A
Note: LCG and LCB are calculated in the vessels‟ frame of reference and therefore will have different longitudinal positions when the vessel is trimmed then for when it is upright. Ta .
Maximum deck inclination
The inclination angle is a combination of heel and trim angle. This is the same for differences in TCG and TCB values due to heeling.
MTc or MTi
The required moment to make the vessel trim one unit-length. For example:
The Max deck inclination is the maximum slope of the deck when combining the trim and heel angle of the vessel. The unitlength can be either in cm or inch depending on your unit settings.
Immersion
The weight required to sink the model one unit-length below its current waterline. Hydromax calculates the steepest slope of the deck when the ship is trimmed and/or heeled. Deck camber and initial deck slope are not taken into account.
Trim angle
The trim angle as defined by:
tan
1
Ta
Tf L pp
where: is the trim angle.

due to the increased speed and accuracy with which these calculations may be carried out.
Page 224
2
. are under 0. and occur in both hand calculations. With hand calculations. These effects are noted from comparing the results of different hydrostatics packages on the same hullform. However. it may seem that wetted surface area may be calculated by simply integrating the station girth along the length of the hull. and hence the 2 2 R2 integration of section girths underestimates by error factor of 4/ 1. which are normally either based on Simpson's rule or the Trapezium rule. with computer calculations.5 2 R 2 A'
approximately 27%. Both methods use numerical integration techniques. in general. The integration method used: trapezium. Differences in derived form parameters may show considerable variation. it is quite feasible to use 200 sections or more with 10s of significant figures.27 . calculated by
RM
Displ *GMt * sin(1)
Potential for errors in hydrostatic calculations
There are a number of potential sources of error when calculating the hydrostatic properties of immersed shapes. the error due to integrating girths along the vessel length cannot be removed simply by increasing the number of integration stations. However. or higher order methods. Differences in the hull definition. These mainly occur from the integration method used. Simpson. and number of interpolation points used to define each section. As with all numerical integration schemes. where R is the radius of the circle. Where there are large changes in shape.5% (note that. The only accurate numerical method is to sum the areas of individual triangles interpolated on the parametric surface.5% error discrepancy noted above. the stations should be more closely spaced. differences for basic parameters such as displacement etc. The 0.
Integration of wetted surface area
At first glance. or 0. hence computer calculations offer an enormous advantage compared with hand calculations. Further. Different number of integration stations used. such as near the bow and stern.Appendix A RM at 1 deg
The righting Moment at 1 degree heel angle. and the wetted surface area can only be accurately found by summing elemental areas over the complete surface. This is given analytically by: A 2 R 2 . may be attributed to a number of causes:
Convergence limits when balancing a hull to a specified displacement or centre of gravity. The differences are easily shown by considering the surface area of half a sphere. This can be of particular importance if the waterline intersects the stem profile between two sections. the accuracy increases as the step size is reduced. agreement of hand calculations to within 2% is considered good). in a similar way that one might integrate the station cross-sectional area along the length of the hull to obtain the volume. this is primarily due to differences in the definitions used – see discussion above. note that this is with an infinite number of integration steps. In general. this is not the case. If the surface is exported as DXF poly-lines then the precision used and the number of straight-line sections used to make up the poly-line are important. and their distribution. It may be shown that the area obtained by integrating the girth of the sphere along its length is given by:
R2 . it is normal to use perhaps 21 sections and perhaps 3-5 significant figures. and most automatic calculations carried out by computers.

which use a number of vertical stations to define the hull.Appendix A
However. for normal ship hulls the differences will be much less. Those calculated by Hydromax and most other hydrodynamics packages. due to the greatly reduced longitudinal curvature. Surface areas calculated by the 'Calculate Areas' dialog in Maxsurf are the most accurate. will be subject to the error described above. since they are derived from the actual parametric definition of the surface.
Page 225
.

Hydromax Criteria File [units] LengthUnits = m MassUnits = tonne SpeedUnits = kts AngleUnits = deg GZAreaGMAngleUnits = deg [end] [criterionGroup] GroupName = Specific Criteria ParentGroupName = root [end] [criterionGroup] GroupName = My Custom Criteria ParentGroupName = root [end] [criterionGroup] GroupName = STIX input data ParentGroupName = Specific Criteria [end] [criterion] Type RuleName CritName CritInfo CritInfoFile Locked GroupName TestIntact TestDamage Test Compare UseLoHeel UseEquilibrium UseHiHeel UseFirstPeak UseMaxGZ UseFirstDF UseVanishingStab LoHeel HiHeel RequiredValue [end] = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CTStdAreaUnderGZBetweenLimits STIX input data GZ area to the lesser of downflooding or… Area under GZ curve between specified heel… HMCriteriaHelp\StixHelp.hcr.html for a full list of all the parameters for all the different criteria types.Appendix B
Appendix B: Criteria file format
The criteria are saved in a Hydromax criteria file with the extension .rtf true STIX input data true false false GreaterThan false true false false false true true 0.0 0. The file is a normal PC text file.000
Page 226
. which may be edited manually so as to generate custom criteria. The typical format of the file is given below: Please refer to the file C:\Program Files\Maxsurf\HMCriteriaHelp\CriteriaHelp.0 30.

There are two angular units: AngleUnits Specifies the units for angular measurements. range of stability GZAreaGMAngleUnits Specifies the angle units used for area under GZ graph and for GM.
Page 227
. The common parameters for all criteria are as follows: Type Describes the type of criterion RuleName Text which specifies the rule to which the criterion belongs CritName Text which specifies the criterion‟s name CritInfo Verbose description of the criterion Locked Whether the criterion may be edited in Hydromax or not. If Locked is set to true. it is not possible to edit the criterion‟s parameters in Hydromax The other parameters that may be set depend on the criterion type.rtf true STIX input data true false false GreaterThan 0. The first section of the file is the units section and this specifies the units that are to be used in the file.g. e.Appendix B
[criterion] Type RuleName CritName CritInfo CritInfoFile Locked GroupName TestIntact TestDamage Test Compare RequiredValue [end]
= = = = = = = = = = = =
CTStdAngleOfVanishingStab STIX input data Angle of vanishing stability Calculates the angle of vanishing stability… HMCriteriaHelp\StixHelp. The criteria then appear after the units section and as many criteria as required may be included.0
The file must have “Hydromax Criteria File” in the first row.

Selecting a calculation in a criterion
Using a calculation in a criterion is very similar to using a heel arm:
Define your custom calculation by copying it from the parent list. Currently this has only been implemented for the IMO roll-back angle calculation used in the IMO code on Intact Stability.com with details of the required calculations. The parent calculations are listed above the parent heeling arms:
Parent calculations in Hydromax Criteria dialog
As with other criteria and heeling arms. This allows for complex calculations to be cross referenced into criteria. please contact support@formsys.Appendix F
Appendix C: Criteria Help
In this Appendix all individual Parent Criteria are explained in detail.
Parent Calculations
Special calculations are provided for some criteria parameters. In this section:
Parent Calculations Minimum GM Calculators Parent Heeling Arms Parent Heeling Moments Parent Stability Criteria
For all general help on criteria or working with the criteria dialog. If there are any other calculations that you would like implemented. see Chapter 4 Stability Criteria on page 163. This information can also be found in the lower right of the Criteria Dialog in the Criteria Help section. In the criterion select the required calculation from the pull down list:
Angle calculators
These calculators produce an angular measurement and may be referenced by the following criteria:
Criteria that currently support roll-back angle calculations
Heeling arm criteria (xRef) Combined
Page 228
Ratio of areas type 2 Combined criteria (ratio of areas
XRefHeelRatioOfAreas2 XRefHeelGenericWindHeeling
. and the IMO required GM for vessels carrying grain in bulk. severe wind and rolling (weather) criterion. you should make a copy of the parent calculation by dragging it to your custom criteria folder.

The input parameters may be specified by the user or calculated by Hydromax for the vessel in the upright condition for the current loadcase.749(18) and MSC.267(85).wind heeling arm
CritHeelWindHeeling
IMO roll-back angle calculator
The IMO roll back angle calculator calculates the roll back angle as per the severe wind and rolling (weather) criterion as defined in the IMO Code on Intact Stability.Appendix B
heeling arm criteria (xRef) Heeling arm criteria (stand alone) Heeling arm.
Input parameters for: IMO roll-back angle calculation
GM calculators
These calculators produce a GM measurement and may be referenced by the following criteria:
Criteria that currently support roll-back angle calculations
GZ curve criteria
Value of GMt at (calc)
CTStdValueOfGMAt
Minimum GM calculator – Grain
The required GM for vessels carrying grain. “Sharp bilge: k = 0. The block coefficient is calculated with the current user settings for length and beam (not necessarily the waterline beam which another parameter required for the calculation).0”. This calculation follows the function defined in the Intact Stability codes A.7” or “Tabulated value for k” – these are auto completed so you only need to type the first letter.general wind heeling arm Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2) . The method used for the k-factor can be one of three options: “Round bilge: k = 1. combined criteria (stand alone)
type 2) Ratio of areas type 2 .0875 SF
Where (using consistent units): L is the combined length of all full compartments
Page 229
. is calculated as follows:
GM
L B Vd 0.645 B Vd
0.general wind heeling arm CritHeelRatioOfAreas2
CritHeelGenericWindHeeling
Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2) . combined criteria (stand alone) Heeling arm.23(59). as defined in IMO Resolution MSC.25 B
0.

h is height of the centroid of A above the zero point.036 t/m2 and k1 = 1309 m4/t For CFR 46. 170.170: service on partially protected water: k0 = 0. k0 and k1 are constants.005 Ton/ft2 and k1 = 14200 ft4/Ton k0 = 0.0033 Ton/ft2 and k1 = 14200 ft4/Ton k0 = 0. for example: For CFR 46.Appendix F
B is the moulded breadth of the vessel SF is the stowage factor Vd is the calculated average void depth Δ is the vessel displacement
Input parameters for: Grain heeling min. 170.170: service on protected water: k0 = 0. H is the height of the assumed centre of lateral resistance of the vessel.028 t/m2 and k1 = 1309 m4/t
Page 230
.055 t/m2 and k1 = 1309 m4/t For CFR 46. 170.170: ocean service: k0 = 0.0025 Ton/ft2 and k1 = 14200 ft4/Ton k0 = 0. required GM Minimum GM calculator – Wind pressure
The GM required to withstand wind pressure is calculated as follows:
k0 GM
L k1
2
A(h H ) cos n ( 0 ) sin( 0 )
Where (using consistent units): L is the waterline length of the vessel (if the criterion required LPP or LOA then enter the value directly rather than having it calculated by Hydromax. Δ is the vessel displacement 0 is a critical heel angle which may be a fixed angle or a fraction of the deck-edge or marginline immersion angle A is the windage area which may be specified as a total area or as an area additional to the area of the hull above the waterline.

Input parameters for: Constant min. n are the exponents for sine and cosine. b is their average transverse location and K is the number of passengers per unit mass. n = 1.0 K
Where N is the number of passengers. An example of where this calculation should be used is in CFR 46. 171. required GM Minimum GM calculator – Constant
The required GM is calculated as follows:
GM
a cos n ( 0 ) sin m ( 0 )
Where (using consistent units): a is a constant arm or moment (depending on whether the vessel displacement is used) 0 is a critical heel angle which may be a fixed angle or a fraction of the deck-edge or marginline immersion angle m. required GM Minimum GM calculator – Constant with freeboard
The required GM is calculated as follows:
GM
a f
B fa
cos n ( 0 ) sin m ( 0 )
Page 231
Where (using consistent units):
.Appendix B
Input parameters for: Wind pressure min.050:
GM
Nb with a K tan( 0 )
Nb and m.

typically the breadth of the watertight trunk b0 is a constant with the same units as b b1 is a dimensionless constant If desired.
Heeling Arm Definition
This section describes how to define heeling arms and is valid for both the parent heeling arms that can be cross referenced into the heeling arm criteria. and for the Old heeling arm criteria where the heeling arm is specified for each criterion separately.
Page 232
. a heel adjustment may be included: 0 is a critical heel angle which may be a fixed angle or a fraction of the deck-edge or marginline immersion angle m. fa is the additional freeboard allowance calculated as follows (additionally the freeboard allowance may be limited to a maximum specified value):
fa
k h
l L
2b b0 B
b1
Where (using consistent units): L is the waterline length of the vessel (if the criterion required LPP or LOA then enter the value directly rather than having it calculated by Hydromax. there is a list of parent heeling arms.
Parent Heeling Arms
As with the criteria. typically the height of the watertight trunk l is a length. n are the exponents for sine and cosine. typically the length of the watertight trunk b is a breadth. B is the same as that used in the expression for GM k is a dimensionless constant h is a height. from which custom heeling arms may be derived:
Available heeling arms and moments
To learn how to cross reference these heeling arms into criteria.Appendix F
a is a constant arm or moment (depending on whether the vessel displacement is used) B is the vessel beam f is the minimum freeboard for the upright (zero heel) condition to the deck-edge or marginline. please see Heeling arm criteria (xRef) on page 260.

make sure you copy them into a custom heeling arms folder before editing them. However. in this case n=0 should be used. For wind n=2 is often used for heeling because both the projected area as well as the lever decrease with the cosine of the heel angle.
Typically n=1 is used for passenger crowding and vessel turning since the horizontal lever for the passenger transverse location reduces with the cosine of the heel angle. the Parent heeling arms will be reset to their default values each time you start up Hydromax.
General heeling arm
The general form of the heeling arm is given below:
H( )
where:
A cos n ( )
is the heel angle.
A is the magnitude of the heeling arm. such as IMO Severe wind and rolling (weather criterion) have a heeling arm of constant magnitude. Make sure you read Important note: heeling arm criteria dependent on displacement on page 240. this is the ratio of the magnitude of the wind heeling arm during a gust to the magnitude of the wind heeling arm under steady wind.
GustRatio
H gust H steady
Both the steady and the gust heel arm have the same shape.
General heeling arm with gust
Some criteria require a Gust Ratio.Appendix B
There are several heeling arms that are used for the criteria. some criteria.
General heeling arm General heeling arm with gust General cos+sin heeling arm User Defined Heeling Arm Passenger crowding heeling arm Wind Turning Lifting heeling Towing heeling Forces heeling arm Trawling heeling arm Grain heeling arm Areas and leavers Important note: heeling arm criteria dependent on displacement
Note: When you are working with the parent heeling arms. cosn describes the shape of the curve. They are defined below.
H steady ( ) H gust ( )
A cosn ( ) A GustRatio cosn ( )
Page 233
. Same as for the Parent criteria.

Some criteria specify the ratio of the wind speeds. the same heeling arm form may be used for computing towing heeling arms of the form:
H( )
k A cos(
) B sin(
)
in this case a constant angle (in the case of towing.
Page 234
. 1. This heeling arm can then be cross-referenced into any of the heeling arm criteria.
General cos+sin heeling arm
Some criteria. notably lifting of weights. if only one value is supplied it is taken as the heel angle – and the magnitude is left unchanged. the ratio of the heel arms will be the square of the ratio of the wind speeds. R2
A2
B 2 and
tan
B A
Make sure you read Important note: heeling arm criteria dependent on displacement on page 240. the user can specify the number of points and the shape of the heeling arm curve.
It should be noted. the definition of gust ratio is the ratio of the heeling arms. First. (To aid input of the data. the number of points is specified and then for each point the angle and magnitude of the curve can be specified. this is taken as the magnitude – and the heel angle is left unchanged.
cosn describes the shape of the curve. the angle of the tow above the horizontal) is included. With the heeling arm.2> for a heeling arm magnitude of 1. if it is assumed that the wind pressure is proportional to the square of the wind seed. D
C tan(
) .Appendix F
where: is the heel angle. These should be comma delimited for example <45 .2 meters at 45 degrees angle of heel. and if a value preceded by a comma is given. require a heeling arm with both a sine and cosine component:
H( )
k A cos n ( )
B sin m ( )
It should be noted that provided the indices are both unity.
User Defined Heeling Arm
A user-defined heeling arm may be used in the criteria. It may be shown that this is equivalent to:
H( )
where:
k C cos( ) D sin( )
R2 1 tan 2 (
C
) . that in this case.) A single coefficient may be adjusted and this is used as a multiplication factor (whist the shape of the curve remains unchanged). A is the magnitude of the heeling arm.

the wind heeling arm is given by:
Hw( )
a
PA h H cosn ( ) g
where: a is a constant.defines shape
mass length none
In the case of the wind pressure based formulation. the wind heeling arm is given by:
Page 235
. theoretically unity A is the windage area at height h is the vessel mass P is the wind pressure H is the vertical centre of hydrodynamic resistance to the wind force In the case of the wind velocity based formulation.Appendix B
Passenger crowding heeling arm
The magnitude of the heel arm is given by:
H pc ( )
where:
n pas MD
cosn ( )
n pas is the number of passengers M is the average mass of a single passenger D is the average distance of passengers from the vessel centreline is the vessel mass (same units as M )
The heeling arm parameters are specified as follows: Option number of passengers: nPass passenger mass: M distance from centreline: D cosine power: n
Wind heeling arm
Description Number of passengers
Units none
Average mass of one passenger Average distance of the passengers from the centreline Cosine power for curve .

The heeling arm is thus given by:
Ht ( )
v2 a h cos n ( ) Rg
where (in consistent units): a is a constant. where ρair is the density of air and CD is an average drag coefficient for the windage area Pressure or Velocity (type “P” or “V”) Actual velocity of pressure . normally unity for pressure based formulation or 0. an area to be added to the windage area computed by Hydromax based on the hull sections There are four options for specifying H (all options are calculated with the vessel upright at the loadcase displacement and LCG): User specified H is taken as half the mean draft.5 ρair CD for the velocity formulation.defines shape
length
length length
length none
The magnitude of the heel arm is derived from the moment created by the centripetal force acting on the vessel during a high-speed turn and the vertical separation of the centres of gravity and hydrodynamic lateral resistance to the turn. The heeling arm is obtained by dividing the heeling moment by the vessel weight. centre of projected lat. theoretically unity v is the vessel velocity
Page 236
. u'water area H = waterline cosine power: n
Turning heeling arm
Height of user defined total or additional windage area User may specify either a total windage area Or. And the other parameters are described as above. mass/length3 for velocity based formulation
wind model wind pressure or velocity
area centroid height: h total area: A additional area: A
height of lateral resistance: H
H = mean draft / 2 H = vert. Option constant: a Description Constant which may be used to modify the magnitude of the heel arm.depends on wind model mass/(time2 length) or length/ time length length2 length2 Units none for pressure based formulation. H is taken as the waterline Cosine power for curve .Appendix F
Hw( )
a
v2 A h H cosn ( ) g
where: a is now effectively an average drag coefficient for the windage area multiplied by the air density and has units of density v is the wind speed. H is taken as the vertical centre of underwater lateral projected area.

mean draft / 2 h = KG .Appendix B
R is the radius of the turn h is the vertical separation of the centres of gravity and lateral resistance
The heeling arm parameters are specified as follows: Option constant: a vessel speed: v turn radius: R turn radius. as percentage of LWL Vertical lever: h Description Constant which may be used to modify the magnitude of the heel arm. i. as some criteria require.defines shape Units none length/time length % length
h = KG h = KG . but there is an effective change of its centre of gravity. Cosine power for curve . centre of projected lat. normally unity Vessel speed in turn Turn radius may be specified directly Or. as percentage of LWL There are four options for specifying h (all options are calculated with the vessel upright at the loadcase displacement and LCG): User specified h is taken as KG . the vessel displacement remains constant. u'water area cosine power: n
Lifting heeling arm
length length length
none
This is used to simulate the effect of lifting a weight from its stowage position. R.vert. (The weight is lifted from a stowage position onboard the vessel by a crane on the vessel.position of G above baseline in upright condition h is taken as KG less half the mean draft. h is taken as the vertical separation of the centres of gravity and underwater lateral projected area.) The magnitude of the heel arm is given by:
H lw ( )
M
h cos( ) v sin( )
where: M is the mass of the weight being lifted h is horizontal separation of the centre of gravity of the weight in its stowage position and the suspension position (upper tip of lifting boom) v is vertical separation of the centre of gravity of the weight in its stowage position and the suspension position (upper tip of lifting boom) is the vessel mass (same units as M )
Page 237
.e.

h is horizontal offset of the tow attachment position from the vessel centreline v is vertical separation tow attachment position from the vessel‟s vertical centre of thrust is the vessel mass is the power index for the cosine term which may be used to change the shape of the heeling n arm curve is the (constant) angle of the towline above the horizontal. Horizontal separation of suspension point (upper tip of lifting boom) from weight‟s original stowage position on the vessel This value is positive if the horizontal shift of the weight should produce a positive heeling moment. expressed as a force. This value is positive if the towline is above the thrust centre. Angle of tow above the horizontal Cosine power for curve . Units mass length
horizontal separation of suspension from stowage position: h
length
Towing heeling arm
The magnitude of the heel arm is given by:
H tow ( )
T v cosn ( g
) h sin(
)
where: T is the tension in the towline or vessel thrust. Horizontal offset of the tow attachment position from the vessel centreline. This value is positive if the suspension position (upper tip of lifting boom) is above the original stowage position. It is assumed that the towline is sufficiently long that this angle remains constant and does not vary as the vessel is heeled. such as those applied due fire-fighting or manoeuvring using thrusters. The heeling arm parameters are specified as follows: Option tension or thrust: T vertical separation of propeller centre and tow attachment: v horizontal offset of tow attachment: h Description Tension in towline or vessel thrust Vertical separation tow attachment position from the vessel‟s vertical centre of thrust.Appendix F
Just before lifting the weight off the vessel’s deck
The heeling arm parameters are specified as follows: Option Mass being lifted: M vertical separation of suspension from stowage position: v Description Mass of weight being lifted Vertical separation of suspension point from weight‟s original stowage position on the vessel.defines shape Units force length
length
angle of tow above horizontal: tau cosine power: n
Forces heeling arm
angle none
This heeling arm can be used to model up to two forces acting on the vessel forces. The magnitude of the heel arm is given by:
Page 238
. This value is positive if the offset is in the direction of the tow.

not a mass.e the heeling arm magnitude is reduced by a factor α at a heel angle of line is given below:
1. h1 and h2 are the vertical heights (from the zero point) at which these forces act. It is mirrored about the heel=0 axis and is not allowed to go below zero. λ0) Point B = ( 1 deg heel. y is the transverse distance of the line of action of the trawl wire from the vessel centreline n defines the shape of the heeling arm. B. α λ0) i. Point A = (0 deg heel.Appendix B
H forces ( )
1 A1 h1 g
H cosn1 ( )
A2 h 2
H cosn2 ( )
where: A1 and A2 are two forces acting on the vessel.23(59): The heeling arm is defined by a straight line through two points A. expressed as a force. is the vessel mass
Grain heeling arm
This heeling arm can be used model the effects of bulk grain shift as defined in IMO Resolution MSC. H is the assumed vertical position of the vessel‟s centre of lateral resistance (or the centre of
rotation from which the forces are applied) is the vessel mass g is acceleration due to gravity
Trawling heeling arm
This heeling arm can be used model the effects of trawl net snagging as defined in Annex G of the Australian NSCV requirements:
H trawling ( )
m y cosn ( ) m
where: m is a mass parameter determined from the breaking load of the trawl gear and the downwards angle of the trawl net.
n1 and n2 define the shapes of the heeling arms created by the two forces.
The equation of the
H grain ( )
0
1 abs
(1
1
)
Page 239
.

K.e. is given by:
0
volHM StowFact
Where: volHM is the assumed volumetric heeling moment due to transverse grain shift in units of Length3.: from the model‟s vertical datum.Length. where
M = heeling moment Δ = displacement.
Page 240
. The area is calculated from the hydrostatic sections used by Hydromax. These are in addition to the existing specific heeling arm curves for passenger crowding. is assumed to be at the baseline (as set up in the Frame of Reference dialog). In all cases the vertical centroids are given in the Maxsurf/Hydromax co-ordinate system. For example. and is the vessel mass
Areas and levers
Some criteria require the evaluation of above and below water lateral projected areas and their vertical centroids. further. the value “A” in:
H( )
M
A cos n ( )
. thus. positive upwards.is manually calculated from:
A
.“Structure” surfaces are ignored. only “Hull” surfaces are included in the calculation . The lateral projected area and its centroid of area are calculated for the upright vessel (zero heel) at the draft and trim defined in the loadcase or trim dialog. increasing the number of sections will increase the accuracy of the area calculation. For these types of heeling arms you should use the various heeling moment curves that are available – see below:
Heeling moment curves
Parent Heeling Moments
Heeling moments work the same way as the Minimum GM Calculations in that they can be cross referenced into criteria. even if the baseline does not correspond to the physical bottom of the vessel. which take account of the vessel displacement as required..
Important note: heeling arm criteria dependent on displacement
Some heeling arm criteria are dependent on the displacement of the vessel for the calculation of the Heeling Arm. The advantage of using heeling moments is that they provide a constant heeling moment (varying heeling arm) as the vessel displacement changes (due to different loadcases or during a limiting KG analysis). The vertical position of the keel. wind heeling etc. λ0.Appendix F
The heeling arm magnitude at zero heel. i. The user may also specify additional areas and vertical centroids or the total areas and vertical centroids. StowFact is the stowage factor in units of Length3/Mass.

It may be shown that this is equivalent to:
H( )
where:
k
C cos( )
D sin( )
C
R2 1 tan 2 (
) . However. some criteria. A is the magnitude of the heeling moment (mass. require a heeling moment with both a sine and cosine component:
H( )
where:
k
A cos n ( )
B sin m ( )
is the heel angle.Appendix B
The following heeling moments are available in the Hydromax criteria dialog:
General heeling moment General cos+sin heeling moment General heeling moment with gust User Defined Heeling Moment
General heeling moment
The general form of the heeling moment is given below.
Typically n=1 is used for passenger crowding and vessel turning since the horizontal lever for the passenger transverse location reduces with the cosine of the heel angle. the same heeling moment form may be used for computing towing heeling moments of the form:
H( )
k
A cos(
)
B sin(
)
in this case a constant angle (in the case of towing. R
2
A
2
B and
2
tan
B A
Page 241
. such as IMO Severe wind and rolling (weather criterion) have a heeling arm of constant magnitude. thus
the vessel displacement
A
is the magnitude of the heeling arm (length).
cosn describes the shape of the curve. (mass.length) and
A and B the magnitudes of the cosine and sine components of the heeling moment A B
the vessel displacement (mass).length) and (mass). thus and
are the magnitude of the
heeling arm (length). It should be noted that provided the n and m indices are both unity. For wind n=2 is often used for heeling because both the projected area as well as the lever decrease with the cosine of the heel angle. It allows you to specify a constant heeling moment as opposed to a constant heeling arm:
H( )
where:
A
cos n ( )
is the heel angle.
General cos+sin heeling moment
Some criteria. D
C tan(
). in this case n=0 should be used. the angle of the tow above the horizontal) is included. notably lifting of weights.

Some criteria specify the ratio of the wind speeds. thus
the vessel displacement
A
is the magnitude of the heeling arm (length).
It should be noted.
Maximum value of Heel.
User Defined Heeling Moment
With the User Defined Heeling Moment. It allows you to specify a constant heeling moment as opposed to a constant heeling arm. The equilibrium criteria are only displayed in the report if you run an equilibrium analysis. A is the magnitude of the heeling moment (mass. this is the ratio of the magnitude of the wind heeling arm during a gust to the magnitude of the wind heeling arm under steady wind. Defining User Defined Heeling Moments works in much the same as for User Defined Heeling Arm.
GustRatio
H gust H steady
The general form of the heeling moment is given below. Option The angle of Description Choose from the following (case insensitive auto-completion is used): Heel Pitch MaxSlope Units deg
Page 242
.
Parent Stability Criteria
The parent criteria are divided up into different categories depending on their basic types.
H steady ( ) H gust ( )
where:
A A
cos n ( ) GustRatio cos n ( )
is the heel angle. Both the steady and the gust heel moment have the same shape. if it is assumed that the wind pressure is proportional to the square of the wind seed. Trim or Slope at Equilibrium
This criterion may be used to check the value of maximum Heel.
Criteria at Equilibrium
These criteria are calculated after an equilibrium analysis and relate to the equilibrium position of the vessel after the analysis.
cosn describes the shape of the curve. This heeling moment can then be linked into a Heeling arm criteria (xRef) for evaluation. the ratio of the heel arms will be the square of the ratio of the wind speeds. the user can specify the number of points and the shape of the heeling moment curve. that in this case.length) and (mass). Pitch or Maximum Slope (compared with an originally horizontal and flat deck).Appendix F
General heeling moment with gust
Some criteria require a Gust Ratio. the definition of gust ratio is the ratio of the heeling arms.

This could be used to check that an embarkation point is sufficiently close to the waterline. are calculated from the Large Angle Stability analysis in Hydromax. calculated from the GZ curve. This could be used to check margin line or downflooding point immersion. Option The value of Description Choose from the following (case insensitive auto-completion is used): Marginline DeckEdge DownfloodingPoints PotentialDfloodingPoints EmbarkationPoints ImmersionPoints Permissible value Units length
Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than
length
Maximum Freeboard at Equilibrium
Check that the maximum freeboard is less than a maximum required value.Appendix B
Shall be less than / Shall not be greater than
Permissible value
deg
Minimum Freeboard at Equilibrium
Checks whether the minimum freeboard is greater than a minimum required value.
Value of GMT or GML at Equilibrium
This criterion is used to check that the GM (transverse or longitudinal) exceeds a specified minimum value. Option The value of Description Choose from the following (case insensitive auto-completion is used): Marginline DeckEdge DownfloodingPoints PotentialDfloodingPoints EmbarkationPoints ImmersionPoints Permissible value Units length
Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than
length
To check that the freeboard lies within a specified range.
Page 243
. use a combination of both forms of the minimum/maximum freeboard criteria. Option The value of Description Choose from the following (case insensitive auto-completion is used): GMtransverse GMlongitudinal) Permissible value Units length
Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than
length
GZ Curve Criteria (non-heeling arm)
These criteria.

the upper range heel angle specified in the criterion. Option specified heel angle angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than
Value of Maximum GZ
Description Value of GZ at either User specified heel angle See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature Permissible value
Units deg deg deg deg length
Finds the maximum value of GZ within a specified heel angle range. angle of maximum GZ or the downflooding angle. first peak in GZ curve. or exceeds. GMt is computed from waterplane inertia and immersed volume (not the slope of the GZ curve as this is inaccurate if the heel angle resolution is insufficient). then the criterion will fail. In addition to a fixed required value. The criterion is passed if the value of GZ is greater then the required value. Option specified heel angle angle of equilibrium Select calculation from list Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than
Value of GZ at
Description Value of GMt at either User specified heel angle See Nomenclature Chose a calculation for the minimum required GM from a copy of one of the Parent calculations Permissible value
Units deg deg length
length
Finds the value of GZ at either a specified heel angle. The criterion is passed if the value of GZ is greater than the required value. This functionality is to allow criteria such as “The maximum GZ at 30deg or greater”. If any of the calculated angles for the upper limit are less than the lower limit. the greater of the following: User specified heel angle See Nomenclature
Units
deg
.Appendix F
Value of GMt at
Finds the value of GMt at either a specified heel angle or the equilibrium angle. Note: Upper limit and analysis heel angle range It is required that the range of heel angles specified for the Large Angle Stability analysis is equal. The criterion is passed if the value of GMt is greater then the required value. they will be ignored when selecting the lowest. If you want to check the value of GZ at a certain angle you can set both specified angles as the required angle. Option in the range from the greater of specified heel angle angle of equilibrium
Page 244
Description Value of maximum GZ Lower limit for heel angle range. If all the upper limit values are less than the lower limit. you may also select a calculation to provide the required minimum GM.

this should normally be specified and be less than or equal to the upper limit of the range of heel angles used for the Large Angle Stability analysis. the lesser of the following: User specified heel angle. Otherwise the required value of maximum GZ varies as a hyperbolic function with the angle of maximum GZ. see graph below. Otherwise the value of maximum GZ is calculated. Option heel angle at which required GZ is constant Description If the angle of maximum GZ is greater than or equal to this value. the required value of GZ is constant and is taken at this specified angle. See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature Permissible value
deg
deg deg deg length
Value of Maximum GZ Value of GZ at Specified Angle or Maximum GZ below Specified Angle
If the angle at which maximum GZ occurs is greater than a specified value. The required GZ value depends on the angle at which the maximum occurs. This is 0 . Units deg
Page 245
.Appendix B
to the lesser of specified heel angle
angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than
Upper limit for heel angle range. the value of GZ at the specified angle is calculated.

0 GZ max
GZ max
0
then GZ max must be greater than
GZ
0
where: is the specified angle at which the required GZ value becomes a constant 0
GZ max
is the heel angle at which the maximum GZ of value occurs
0
GZ
is the GZ value at
0
and GZ max is the maximum value of GZ. The righting moment RM is given by:
RM
gGZ
where: is the vessel volume of displacement is the density of the liquid the vessel is floating in is acceleration due to gravity = 9. constant value. Angle at which GZ is measured may be limited to the location of the first peak in the GZ curve. Permissible value.Appendix F
Option required value of GZ at this angle is limited by first GZ peak angle limited by first downflooding angle Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than If If
GZ max 0
Description Required value of GZ at the heel angle specified above.
Units length deg
deg length
then GZ
0
must be greater than the specified.
Value of RM at Specified Angle or Maximum RM Below Specified Angle
As above (Value of GZ at specified angle or maximum GZ below specified angle) except the righting moment rather than the righting lever is specified.
Page 246
. Angle at which GZ is measured may be limited to first downflooding angle.
Variation of required GZ with angle of maximum GZ
The angle at which the GZ was measured is listed in the results.80665m/s2 g GZ is the righting lever. measured and compared. This is GZ 0 .

the lesser of specified heel angle angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle Phi2. first heel angle. the lesser of specified heel angle angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle Shall be less than / Shall not be greater than
Description Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 First heel angle. the lesser of the following: User specified heel angle See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature Second heel angle. second heel angle.Appendix B
Ratio of GZ Values at Phi1 and Phi2
Calculates the ratio of the GZ values at two specified heel angles. The criterion is passed if the ratio is less then the required value.
Ratio
Option
GZ GZ
1 2
Phi1. the lesser of the following: User specified heel angle See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature Permissible value
Units
deg deg deg deg
deg deg deg deg %
Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2
Page 247
.

If the ratio is less than the required value. potential downflooding point.Appendix F
Angle of Maximum GZ
Finds the angle at which the value of GZ is a maximum positive value. The user may choose the type of Key point to define the downflooding angle (downflooding point. heel angle angle of margin line immersion angle of deck edge immersion first flooding angle of the angle of first GZ peak angle of max. Option Shall be less than / Shall not be greater than Description Angle of equilibrium Permissible value Units deg
Ratio of equilibrium heel angle to the lesser of
The equilibrium angle and the lesser of the selected angles are compared. immersion point). The criterion is passed if the angle is greater then the required value. The criterion is passed if the equilibrium angle is less then the required value.g. If the equilibrium angle is negative. GZ angle of vanishing stability Shall be less than / Shall not be greater than Description Ratio of equilibrium angle to the lesser of: Specified heel angle Angle of first immersion of the margin line Angle of first immersion of the deck edge Smallest immersion angle of the specified type of Key Point Angle of first local peak in GZ curve Angle at which maximum GZ occurs Angle of vanishing stability Permissible value Units deg deg deg deg deg deg deg %
Page 248
. e. Option limited by first GZ peak angle limited by first downflooding angle Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than
Angle of Equilibrium
Description Angle of maximum GZ The angle of maximum GZ shall not be greater than the angle at which the first GZ peak occurs The angle of maximum GZ shall not be greater than the angle at which the first downflooding occurs Permissible value
Units deg
deg
deg
Finds the angle of equilibrium from the intersection of the GZ curve with the GZ=0 axis. the user is advised that the vessel should be heeled in the opposite direction and the criterion is failed. then the criterion is passed. Using a ratio gives more flexibility. Option spec. embarkation point. heel angle can be limited by first peak in GZ curve and/or first downflooding angle.: it is possible to check that the equilibrium angle does not exceed half (or any other fraction) the downflooding angle.

Option Shall be less than / Shall not be greater than Description Angle of vanishing stability Permissible value Units deg
Range of Positive Stability
The angular range for which the GZ curve is positive is computed. Option Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than Description Angle of deck edge immersion Permissible value Units deg
Angle of Vanishing Stability
Finds the angle of vanishing stability from the intersection of the GZ curve with the GZ=0 axis. The criterion is passed if the computed range is greater then the required value. but this can be allowed to increase to 17 degrees if the deck edge is not immersed.Appendix B
Equilibrium heel angle satisfies either
This criterion is nothing more than two “Ratio of equilibrium heel angle to the lesser of” criteria. The criterion is passed if the smallest angle at which the deck edge immerses is greater then the required value. The actual criterion is passed if either of the individual criteria is passed. The criterion is passed if the downflooding angle is greater then the required value. Option from the greater of Description Range of positive stability Lower limit Units
Page 249
.
Angle of Downflooding
Finds the angle of first downflooding. The criterion is passed if the angle of vanishing stability is greater then the required value. The criterion is passed if the smallest angle at which the margin line immerses is greater then the required value. Option Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than Description Angle of downflooding Permissible value Units deg
Angle of Margin Line Immersion
Finds the first/minimum angle at which the margin line immerses. This type of criterion is used to formulate criteria such as: The maximum allowable angle of equilibrium is 15 degrees in the damage condition. Option Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than Description Angle of margin line immersion Permissible value Units deg
Angle of Deck Edge Immersion
Finds the first/minimum angle at which the deck edge immerses.

angle
Page 250
. The criterion is passed if the area under the graph is greater than the required value. from greatest angle of User specified heel angle See Nomenclature Upper limit of integration. Option from the greater of specified heel angle angle of equilibrium to the lesser of specified heel angle spec.Appendix F
Option specified heel angle angle of equilibrium to the lesser of first downflooding angle angle of vanishing stability Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than
Description User specified heel angle See Nomenclature Upper limit of the range See Nomenclature See Nomenclature Permissible value
Units deg deg deg deg deg
GZ Area between Limits type 1 .standard Lower limit for integration. angle above equilibrium angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle immersion angle of Marginline or DeckEdge angle of vanishing stability Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than Description GZ area between limits type 1 .standard
The area below the GZ curve and above the GZ=0 axis is integrated between the selected limits and compared with a minimum required value. from lesser angle of User specified heel angle User specified heel angle above the equilibrium heel angle See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature Units
deg deg
deg deg deg deg deg deg
See Nomenclature Permissible value
deg length.

36(63) §2.
1:
A2
If 1 Where:
max is max 2
A1
2
A2
2 1 max
: required area =
.055 30 30 15
max
max
or simplifying:
0.07m.6.Appendix B
GZ area between limits type 1 .5.55 0.749(18) §4.1.3.001 30
Page 251
.55
0.rad and the upper angle was 30 and the required area at this angle was 0.
A1 is the area under the GZ curve required at the specified lower heel angle
area under the GZ curve required at the specified higher heel angle
2.07 0.rad. The required area is defined as follows: If If
max max 2
: required area = A2 . However the required minimum area depends on the upper integration limit. The criterion is passed if the computed area under the graph is greater then the required value.HSC monohull type
The area under the GZ curve is integrated between the specified limits.standard GZ area between limits type 2.
and A2 is the
For example.2. The required area is defined below and is based on the area required for IMO MSC.055m.2 and IMO A.
1.
the upper integration limit. if the lower angle was 15 and the required area at this angle was 0. required area = A1 .3. then the required area would be given by:
A
A
0.

angle above equilibrium angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle angle of vanishing stability lower heel angle
Description GZ area between limits type 2.. Until this angle the required GZ area is constant Value of GZ area that is required until the lower heel angle Angle from which the required GZ area remains constant onwards Value of GZ area that is required from the higher heel angle onwards Permissible value
Units
deg deg
deg deg deg deg deg deg deg
required GZ area at lower heel angle higher heel angle required GZ area at higher heel angle Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than
length.Appendix F
Variation of required area with upper integration limit
Option
from the greater of specified heel angle angle of equilibrium to the lesser of specified heel angle spec. from smallest angle of User specified heel angle User specified heel angle above the equilibrium heel angle See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature Minimum angle that requires a GZ area greater than.angle deg length.HSC monohull type Lower limit for integration.angle length..angle
Page 252
. from greatest angle of User specified heel angle See Nomenclature Upper limit of integration.

1.
the upper integration limit.
A1 is the area under the GZ curve required at the specified heel angle
For example.HSC multihull type
The area under the GZ curve is integrated between the specified limits. The criterion is passed if the computed area under the graph is greater than the required value. if the specified angle ( 1 ) was 30 and the required area at this angle ( A1 ) was 0.HSC monohull type GZ area between limits type 3 . The required area is defined below limit ( and is based on the area required for IMO MSC.055m. However the required minimum area depends on the upper integrationA1 1 / max).1.055 30 /
max
Page 253
. then the required area would be given by:
A
0.36 (63) Annex 7 §1. required area = A1 Where:
max is
1
/
max
.rad.Appendix B
GZ area between limits type 2 .

from greatest angle of User specified heel angle See Nomenclature Upper limit of integration. from lesser angle of User specified heel angle User specified heel angle above the equilibrium heel angle See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature Heel angle at which required GZ area is specified Value of GZ area that is required until the higher heel angle Permissible value
Units
deg deg
deg deg deg deg deg deg deg length.angle length.HSC multihull type Lower limit for integration.angle
Page 254
. angle above equilibrium angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle angle of vanishing stability higher heel angle required GZ area at higher heel angle Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than
Description GZ area between limits type 3 .Appendix F
Variation of required area with upper integration limit
Option
from the greater of specified heel angle angle of equilibrium to the lesser of specified heel angle spec.

User specified heel angle See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature Area 2 lower integration limit.
2
GZ
d
.
Area 1 Ratio = = abs Area 2
1 4
abs
3
GZ
d
Option Area 1 from the greater of specified heel angle angle of equilibrium Area 1 to the lesser of specified heel angle angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle angle of vanishing stability Area 2 from the lesser of specified heel angle angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle angle of vanishing stability
Description Ratio of GZ area between limits Area 1 lower integration limit.HSC multihull type Ratio of GZ area between limits
This criterion calculates the ratio of the two areas between the GZ curve and the GZ=0 axis. User specified heel angle See Nomenclature Area 1 upper integration limit. where “abs” means the absolute value of. User specified heel angle See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature
3
Units
1
2
deg deg deg deg deg deg deg deg deg deg deg deg deg
Page 255
.Appendix B
GZ area between limits type 3 .

The limits for Area 2 remain unchanged. see graph below. Typically. In the example below. respectively and the limits for Area 2 are vanishing stability and 180 deg. Area 1 would be from equilibrium to vanishing stability and Area 2 would be from vanishing stability to 180 deg. GZ areas below the GZ=0 axis on the negative heel angle side of the GZ curve are not considered positive. User specified heel angle Permissible value
4
Units deg %
This criterion is designed to be calculated on the positive side of the GZ curve only.
Ratio of GZ area between limits – Example 1
In the following example the upper limit for Area 1 has been set to the downflooding angle.Appendix F
Option Area 2 to specified heel angle Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than
Description Area 1 upper integration limit. the lower and upper integration limits for Area 1 are equilibrium and vanishing stability.
Page 256
.

Appendix B
Ratio of GZ area between limits – Example 2
In the final example.
Ratio of GZ area between limits – Example 3 Ratio of positive to negative GZ area between limits
This criterion calculates the ratio of GZ area above the GZ=0 axis to that below the axis in the given heel angle range. Note that Area 2 is now A1 – A2. the lower integration range for Area 2 has been reduced to the downflooding angle. Option Description Units
Page 257
.

Ratio of positive to negative GZ area between limits.
If both heel angle limits are < zero: Area 1 is the total area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis. And the areas are defined as follows: If both heel angle limits are ≥ zero: Area 1 is the total area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis. where the value of GZ > 0.
Page 258
. where the value of GZ > 0.Appendix F
Option
in the heel angle range from to Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than
Description Ratio of positive to negative GZ area between limits User specified lower limit heel angle User specified upper limit heel angle Permissible value
Units
deg deg %
Ratio =
Area 1 . Area 2 is the total area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis. Area 1 is positive. upper limit = 180deg. Area 2 is negative. where the value of GZ < 0. Area 2 is the total area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis. Area 2 is negative. abs Area 2
where “abs” means the absolute value of. where the value of GZ < 0. Positive heel: lower limit = 0deg. Area 1 is positive.

Appendix B
Ratio of positive to negative GZ area between limits. Area 1 is positive.
Ratio of positive to negative GZ area between limits. and the upper heel angle limit > zero (the upper limit is assumed to be greater than the lower limit): Area 1 is the total area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis. Negative heel: lower limit = -180deg. where the value of GZ > 0 for heel angles ≥ 0 plus the area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis. Area 2 is negative. upper limit = 180deg. Area 2 is the total area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis. where the value of GZ < 0 for heel angles < 0. Positive and negative heel: lower limit = -180deg. upper limit = 0deg.
If the lower heel angle limit < zero. where the value of GZ < 0 for heel angles ≥ 0 plus the area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis. where the value of GZ > 0 for heel angles < 0.
Page 259
.

The criteria themselves work much the same as the Heeling arm criteria (page 264). these can be cross-referenced into new heeling arm criteria:
Page 260
.Appendix F
Subdivision Index s-factor . User specified heel angle See Nomenclature The lowest of the selected angles is be to specify the upper limit of the range of positive stability and the range in which the maximum value of GZ should be found. except for the fact that you don‟t have to specify the heeling arm for each criterion separately. See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature Upper limit of allowable maximum GZ value when computing s Upper limit of allowable range of positive stability when computing s Units
specified heel angle angle of equilibrium Upper angle of range: lesser of
deg deg
specified heel angle spec. range) Both the values of maximum GZ and range of positive stability can be clipped.
Heeling arm criteria (xRef)
The cross-reference heeling arm criteria are set up to allow you to define heeling arms or heeling moments in a central location and then cross-reference or link them into the criteria. but can simply select which heeling arm you wish to apply.MSC 19(58)
Probabilistic damage s-factor according to MSC 19(58) Option Lower angle of range : the greater of Description The greater of the selected angles is be to specify the lower limit of the range of positive stability and the range in which the maximum value of GZ should be found.5 GZmax . angle above equilibrium angle of first GZ peak angle of maximum GZ first downflooding angle immersion angle of Marginline or DeckEdge angle of vanishing stability Max. After you have defined your heeling arms. GZ limit Range limit
deg deg deg deg deg deg deg length deg
S = C sqrt( 0.

see Minimum GM calculator – Grain The required GM for vessels carrying grain.645 B Vd
0. as defined in IMO Resolution MSC.0875 SF
Where (using consistent units): L is the combined length of all full compartments B is the moulded breadth of the vessel SF is the stowage factor Vd is the calculated average void depth Δ is the vessel displacement
Input parameters for: Grain heeling min.25 B
0.23(59).Appendix B
The heeling arms are cross-referenced simply by selecting the desired heeling arm from the pull-down list:
For information on defining heeling arms or moments. is calculated as follows:
GM
L B Vd 0. required GM
Page 261
.

170.Appendix F
Minimum GM calculator – Wind pressure
The GM required to withstand wind pressure is calculated as follows:
k0 GM
L k1
2
A(h H ) cos n ( 0 ) sin( 0 )
Where (using consistent units): L is the waterline length of the vessel (if the criterion required LPP or LOA then enter the value directly rather than having it calculated by Hydromax. 170.170: service on partially protected water: k0 = 0. 170.0033 Ton/ft2 and k1 = 14200 ft4/Ton k0 = 0. for example: For CFR 46.036 t/m2 and k1 = 1309 m4/t For CFR 46. H is the height of the assumed centre of lateral resistance of the vessel.170: ocean service: k0 = 0.028 t/m2 and k1 = 1309 m4/t
Input parameters for: Wind pressure min.005 Ton/ft2 and k1 = 14200 ft4/Ton k0 = 0. k0 and k1 are constants.055 t/m2 and k1 = 1309 m4/t For CFR 46. Δ is the vessel displacement 0 is a critical heel angle which may be a fixed angle or a fraction of the deck-edge or marginline immersion angle A is the windage area which may be specified as a total area or as an area additional to the area of the hull above the waterline. h is height of the centroid of A above the zero point.0025 Ton/ft2 and k1 = 14200 ft4/Ton k0 = 0. required GM Minimum GM calculator – Constant
The required GM is calculated as follows:
GM
a cos n ( 0 ) sin m ( 0 )
Where (using consistent units): a is a constant arm or moment (depending on whether the vessel displacement is used) 0 is a critical heel angle which may be a fixed angle or a fraction of the deck-edge or marginline immersion angle
Page 262
.170: service on protected water: k0 = 0.

Page 263
. a heel adjustment may be included: 0 is a critical heel angle which may be a fixed angle or a fraction of the deck-edge or marginline immersion angle m. An example of where this calculation should be used is in CFR 46.0 K
Where N is the number of passengers.050:
GM
Nb with a K tan( 0 )
Nb and m. typically the breadth of the watertight trunk b0 is a constant with the same units as b b1 is a dimensionless constant If desired. n = 1. Parent Heeling Arms on page 229. B is the same as that used in the expression for GM k is a dimensionless constant h is a height. b is their average transverse location and K is the number of passengers per unit mass. n are the exponents for sine and cosine. fa is the additional freeboard allowance calculated as follows (additionally the freeboard allowance may be limited to a maximum specified value):
fa
k h
l L
2b b0 B
b1
Where (using consistent units): L is the waterline length of the vessel (if the criterion required LPP or LOA then enter the value directly rather than having it calculated by Hydromax. typically the length of the watertight trunk b is a breadth. 171. n are the exponents for sine and cosine.
Input parameters for: Constant min. required GM Minimum GM calculator – Constant with freeboard
The required GM is calculated as follows:
GM
a f
B fa
cos n ( 0 ) sin m ( 0 )
Where (using consistent units): a is a constant arm or moment (depending on whether the vessel displacement is used) B is the vessel beam f is the minimum freeboard for the upright (zero heel) condition to the deck-edge or marginline. typically the height of the watertight trunk l is a length.Appendix B
m.

The transverse GM is taken at a user-specified heel angle or angle of equilibrium (without heel arm).general heeling arm
Calculates the value of the GZ curve at the equilibrium intersection of the GZ and heel arm curves.Appendix F Heeling arm criteria
The preferred method is to use the xRef heeling arm criteria rather than the stand alone heeling arm criteria.
GM sin( )
HA( )
Where the heel angle. This is because a wider range of heeling arm formulations is available and for some criteria. or first flooding angle of the specified key point type.general heeling arm
Calculates the transverse metacentric height (GMT) at the intersection of the GZ and heel arm curves. Finally. they only exist in xRef form.
Ratio of GMT and heeling arm
Calculates the following ratio and the criterion is passed if the ratio exceeds the specified value. combined criteria. these are where several criteria are applied to the same heeling arm
Value of GMT at equilibrium .
Page 264
. Also available are:
Multiple heeling arm criteria. The specified cross-referenced heel arm is then evaluated at this heel angle to give: HA( ) .
Ratio of GMt and heel arm criterion Value of GZ at equilibrium . angle of margin line immersion. In addition. The heeling arm criteria available in the Hydromax Criteria dialog are listed below. The criterion is passed if the GZ value is greater then the required value. . angle of deck edge immersion. this angle may also be multiplied by a user-specified factor. The criterion is passed if the GMT value is greater then the required value. GMT is computed from the waterplane inertia and the displaced volume at the equilibrium heel angle. these are where the same criterion is applied to up to three heeling arms and/or combinations of these heeling arms Heeling Arm. is the lesser of: a user-specified heel angle.

Page 265
. The criterion is passed if the value of (GZ .general heeling arm Value of maximum GZ above heeling arm
Finds the maximum value of (GZ . The first downflooding angle may be selected as an upper limit.heel arm) is greater then the required value.Appendix B
Value of GZ at equilibrium .heel arm) at or above a specified heel angle.

then the point with maximum positive GZ (where the heeling arm 0.553m and the heel arm 0. the maximum ratio of GZ:heel arm occurs at 21. If the heeling arm is zero or negative in the range. This is applied to all selected upper angle limits. However this option would normally be used to specify an upper limiting angle of “half the angle of margin line immersion”. Examples:
Upper limit is 50% of angle of margin line immersion (43 / 2 = 21.Appendix F
Value of maximum GZ above heeling arm
The upper limit may be specified as a certain percentage of the selected limits.
Page 266
.930m giving a ratio of 59%.
Maximum ratio of GZ to heeling arm
This criterion calculates the maximum ratio of GZ : Heeling arm (for the same heel angle) within the range of heel angles specified.0) will be selected. The upper limit may be specified as a certain percentage of the selected limits. However this option would normally be used to specify an upper limiting angle of “half the angle of margin line immersion”.5 . This is applied to all selected upper angle limits. including “specified heel angle”. including “specified heel angle”.5 ). In the range 0 to 21. The value of GZ at this heel angle must be greater than zero.5 . At this heel angle the value of GZ is 0.

122m and the heel arm 0. the downflooding angle is 94.5m giving a ratio of 224%. The angle and value of GZ is given for the location where it is a maximum (in the region where the heel arm is zero.Appendix B
In this case a constant heeling arm is used.
Finally. thus the maximum ratio occurs at the angle of maximum GZ (62. Hence the criterion is passed.4 ). the exact value will depend slightly on the heel angles tested in the Large Angle Stability analysis. at this heel angle the heel arm is zero (thus the ratio infinite).)
Page 267
. At this heel angle the value of GZ is 1.3 .

This is applied to all selected upper angle limits.Appendix F
The same is true if an unusual user-defined heeling arm is used.heel arm) is maximum.general heeling arm
Used to check the ratio of GZ values at two points on the GZ curve. The heel arm is used to define the equilibrium angle and the heel angle where (GZ . The criterion is passed if the ratio is less than the required value. the same criterion may be used to check that the GZ is positive over the specified range.
Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 . Hence the maximum ratio reported is infinity and occurs at the angle where GZ is maximum in this heel angle range. However this option would normally be used to specify an upper limiting angle of “half the angle of margin line immersion”. positive). The criterion is passed if the angle is greater then the required value. If a heeling arm with zero amplitude is used.
Page 268
. And checks that this ratio is greater than a specified value. Minimum ratio of GZ to heeling arm
This criterion calculates the minimum ratio of GZ : Heeling arm (for the same heel angle) within the range of heel angles specified. The upper limit may be specified as a certain percentage of the selected limits. including “specified heel angle”. In this case the heeling arm is zero between 50 and 70 . This criterion can be used to check that the GZ is at least as great as the heeling arm over the specified range.
GZ Ratio = GZ
1 2
Angle of maximum GZ above heeling arm
Calculates the heel angle at which the difference between the GZ curve and the heeling arm is greatest (GZ .Heel Arm is maximum.

general heeling arm
Calculates the angle of equilibrium with the specified heeling arm.
Angle of equilibrium . The criterion is passed if the equilibrium angle is less then the required value.general heeling arm Angle of equilibrium . The equilibrium angle is the smallest positive angle where the GZ and heeling arm curves intersect and the GZ curve has positive slope.Appendix B
Angle of maximum GZ above heeling arm .general heeling arm
Page 269
.

general heeling arm
Calculates the ratio of the angle of equilibrium (with the specified heeling arm) to another.Appendix F
Angle of equilibrium ratio .general heeling arm
Calculates the location of the first intersection of the GZ curve and heel arm curve where the slope of the GZ curve is negative. [Range of stability] = [Angle of vanishing stability] – [Angle of equilibrium] The criterion is passed if the value of range of stability is greater then the required value. The angle of equilibrium is computed as described in §Angle of equilibrium general heeling arm. Ratio =
equilibriu m specified
The other angle used to compute the ratio may be one of the following: Required angle for ratio calculation Auto complete text Marginline immersion angle MarginlineImmersionAngle Deck edge immersion angle DeckEdgeImmersionAngle Angle of first GZ peak DownfloodingAngle Angle of maximum GZ MaximumGZAngle First downflooding angle FirstGZPeakAngle Angle of vanishing stability with heel arm VanishingStabilityWithHeelArmAngle
Angle of vanishing stability . The criterion is passed if the angle is greater then the required value. selectable angle.general heeling arm
Computes the range of positive stability with the heeling arm. This criterion should not be confused with the range of positive stability.general heeling arm Range of positive stability .
Page 270
.
Angle of vanishing stability .

general heeling arm
Computes the area below the GZ curve and above the heel arm curve between the specified heel angles. The criterion is passed if the area is greater than the required value.general heeling arm GZ area between limits type 1 .
2
Area =
GZ ( ) heel arm( ) d
1
GZ area between limits type 1 .general heeling arm
Page 271
.Appendix B
Range of positive stability .

4 3
GZ ( )d
.
Area 1 constant kArea 2
GZ area between limits type 2 . The criterion is passed if the ratio is greater than the required value. Type 1 stands for which areas are being integrated to calculate the ratio (see graph). The required value is based on a constant plus a proportion of the area under the GZ curve (Area 2). This criterion is based on the area ratio required by various Navies‟ turning and passenger crowding criteria.Appendix F
GZ area between limits type 2 .general heeling arm
The area between the GZ curve and heel arm and the area under the GZ curve is computed (Area 1). The criterion is passed if the ratio is greater than the required value.general heeling arm Ratio of areas type 1 .general heeling arm
The ratio of the area between the GZ curve and heel arm and the area under the GZ curve is computed.
2
Area 1 = Area 2 =
GZ ( ) heel arm( ) d
1
.
2
Area 1 = Area 2 =
GZ ( ) heel arm( ) d
1
.
4 3
GZ ( )d
.
Page 272
.

general heeling arm
This criterion is used to simulate the effects of wind heeling whilst the vessel is rolling in waves.: where the GZ curve crosses the GZ=0 axis with positive slope). Because of the many different ways in which this criterion is used it has several options for defining the way in which the areas are calculated.0 is used.Appendix B
Area 1 Ratio = Area 2
Ratio of areas type 1 . but the integration for Area 1 is taken from the equilibrium with the gust wind heeling arm. Hence the rollback angle is taken from the equilibrium angle with the steady wind heeling arm. Note The Large Angle Stability analysis heel angle range should include a sufficient negative range to allow for the rollback angle. For more information see: §Heel.
2
Area 1 = Area 2 =
GZ ( ) gust heel arm( ) d
gust heel arm( ) GZ ( ) d
Page 273
1
2 1
. the vessel is assumed to roll to windward (under the action of waves with the steady wind pressure acting on it. If a gust ratio of greater than 1.e. The roll back may be specified as either a fixed angular roll back from the angle of equilibrium with the steady wind heel arm or can be rolled back to the vessel equilibrium angle ignoring the wind heeling arms (i.general heeling arm Ratio of areas type 2 . then roll to leeward under a gust.

This criterion is based on the area ratio required by BS6349-6:1989.general heeling arm
The ratio of the area under the GZ curve to the area under the heel arm curve is computed. Area GZ = Area HA = Ratio =
2 1
GZ ( )d . Areas under the GZ=0 axis are counted as negative.
Area GZ Area HA
Page 274
.
2 1
heel arm( )d .general heeling arm Ratio of areas type 3 . The criterion is passed if the ratio is greater than the required value.Appendix F
Area 1 Ratio = Area 2
Ratio of areas type 2 .

for example passenger crowding. The combined heeling arms are computed by adding the values of the individual heeling arms at each heel angle.
Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 .Appendix B
Ratio of areas type 3 .multiple heeling arms
Checks the ratio of GZ values as per §Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 . wind.
Page 275
. turning.general heeling arm
Multiple heeling arm criteria
These criteria are used to check the effects of combinations of up to three heeling arms and their combinations.general heeling arm with the specified heeling arms.

Page 276
.general heeling arm with the specified heeling arms.multiple heeling arms Angle of equilibrium .multiple heeling arms
Checks the area under the heel angle as per §GZ area between limits type 1 .multiple heeling arms GZ area between limits type 1 .
Angle of equilibrium .multiple heeling arms
Checks the equilibrium heel angle as per §Angle of equilibrium .Appendix F
Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 .general heeling arm with the specified heeling arms.

4 3
GZ ( )d
.multiple heeling arms
Checks the area under the heel angle as per §GZ area between limits type 2 .
2
Area 1 = Area 2 =
GZ ( ) heel arm( ) d
1
.general heeling arm with the specified heeling arms.multiple heeling arms GZ area between limits type 2 .Appendix B
GZ area between limits type 1 .
Area 1 constant kArea 2
Page 277
.

general heeling arm Ratio of areas type 1 .general heeling arm with the specified heeling arms.multiple heeling arms
Checks the area under the heel angle as per §Ratio of areas type 1 .
Page 278
.Appendix F
GZ area between limits type 2 .

216(82) is computed.multiple heeling arms Subdivision Index s-factor .Appendix B
Ratio of areas type 1 . Several extra options are presented to the user.MSC_216(82)
The Subdivision Index s-factor as described in IMO MSC.
Page 279
.

This is used to determine default parameters and which s-factors should be computed. GZ limit Range limit
deg deg
Max.216(82) The type of vessel being analysed. Cargo.length length deg length deg
K-factor min. Parameters for computing the sMoment factor Displacement of the intact vessel at the subdivision draft Reduction to be applied to maximum GZ Link to passenger heeling moment mass length mass.Appendix F
Option
Description Subdivision Index s-factor – MSC. The lowest of the selected angles can be used to specify the upper limit of the range of positive stability. allowable equilibrium heel angle
deg
s-Moment intact displacement at subdivision draft GZ reduction Passenger heel
Page 280
. The beginning of the range of positive stability is taken as the first positive equilibrium angles See Nomenclature See Nomenclature See Nomenclature
Units
Vessel type : Passenger. If the equilibrium heel angle exceeds this value then sIntermediate is zero. User Upper angle of range: lesser of
first downflooding angle angle of vanishing stability Immersion angle of Marginline or DeckEdge s-Final Max. heel s-Intermediate Max. heel K-factor max. GZ limit Range limit
deg deg deg
Parameters for computing the s-Final factor Upper limit of allowable maximum GZ value when computing s-Final Upper limit of allowable range of positive stability when computing sFinal Theta_min used to determine K Theta_max used to determine K Parameters for computing the sIntermediate factor Upper limit of allowable maximum GZ value when computing s-Intermediate Upper limit of allowable range of positive stability when computing sIntermediate Maximum allowable equilibrium heel angle after damage.

the minimum and maximum heel angles are set to 7 and 15 deg. These are: 1.general heeling arm 3. combined criteria
Several criteria require the evaluation of several individual criteria components. If User is selected.Appendix B
moment Wind heel moment Select survival craft heel moment Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than Link to wind heeling moment Link to heeling moment that defines the effect of launching survival craft Permissible minimum value for sfactor mass. The result is the minimum of s-Intermediate and (s-Final * s-Moment). The area ratio must be greater than a specified value.length mass. then all three s-factors are computed as for the Passenger ship. respectively. For the s-Final factor. for simplicity the common combinations have been combined into single criteria.general heeling arm. Angle of steady heel must be less than a specified value.length
Vessel type: If Passenger is selected. If Cargo is selected. and any values for the s-Final factor minimum and maximum heel angles may be specified. Range / limitRange}1/4 if equilibrium heel > Max.general heeling arm
This is a combined criterion where three individual criteria must be met. respectively. then s-Intermediate and s-Moment factors are computed. the minimum and maximum heel angles are set to 25 and 30 deg. Range / limitRange}1/4 where: K = 1 if equilibrium heel <= Theta_min K = 0 if equilibrium heel >= Theta_max K = {(Theta_max – equilibrium heel) / (Theta_max – Theta_min)}1/2 s-Intermediate = {GZmax / limitGZmax . Displacement / Mheel where: Mheel is the maximum of the three selected heeling moments. 2. allowable equilibrium heel angle then s-Intermediate = 0 s-Moment = (GZmax – GZ reduction) . The criterion result is then the minimum value of s-Intermediate and (s-Final * s-Moment). The area ratio is evaluated as per § Ratio of areas type 1 . The ratio of the value of GZ at equilibrium to the value of maximum GZ must be less than a specified value. All s-factors are in the range 0 <= s <= 1
Heeling arm. then only the s-Final factor is computed and in this case. {GZmax / limitGZmax . Although it is possible to evaluate these criteria by evaluation of their individual components. Note: At least one of the individual criteria has to be selected. s-Final = K. The Angle of steady heel is obtained as per §Angle of equilibrium .
Page 281
.
Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) .

The area ratio is evaluated as per Ratio of areas type 2 . For more information see: §Heel.general wind heeling arm
This is a widely applicable wind heeling criterion in its most generic format.general heeling arm. The ratio of the value of GZ at equilibrium to the value of maximum GZ must be less than a specified value. Note The Large Angle Stability analysis heel angle range should include a sufficient negative range to allow for the rollback angle.general heeling arm Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2) . a gust wind can be applied. The heeling arm is specified simply by a magnitude and cosine power. Angle of steady heel must be less than a specified value. The angle of steady heel is obtained as per Angle of equilibrium .Appendix F
Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) . 1. The area ratio must be greater than a specified value.
Page 282
. Optionally.general heeling arm. 2. 3.

If this is done. all calculations are done using a reduced GZ‟ curve which is computed at each heel angle as follows:
GZ ' ( )
GZ ( ) B cos m ( )
This criterion may be used to evaluate the following specific criteria (as well as many others of similar format):
Page 283
.Appendix B
Area definition
If required. a reduction of the GZ curve may be applied.

3.4. §4.2. §4.general heeling arm
This criterion is based on the calculations required for the Bureau Veritas criterion that ensures safety when cargo is accidentally lost while lifting. §1.2.2 Initial impulse and Wind heeling criteria RAN A015866: §4.Appendix F
US Navy DDS079-1: §079-1-c(9) 1.2 IMO MSC.5 IMO A.3.1 ISO/FDIS 12217-1:2002(E) Small Non-Sailing Boats §6. §1.9. §079-1-c(9) 4. Royal Navy NES 109: §1.3.749(18) Code on intact stability: §3. PhiC is fixed at the angle of equilibrium with the heeling arm (first up-crossing intersection of GZ curve with heeling arm).2
Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2a) .5.phi3 must be greater than the required value
Page 284
.3.4.2. The criterion evaluates two checks: ratio of Area2 / Area1 and the remaining range of stability (phi3 – phi2).
Area2 / Area1 must be greater than the required value
phi2 .8.4.36(63) High-speed craft code §2.

The criterion is then evaluated by comparing some requirement of the derived heeling arm with a specified value. the magnitude of the heeling arm is derived (rather than specified directly) from a required relationship between the GZ curve and the heeling arm curve. The heeling arm is normally derived from a GZ value.
GZ derived heeling arm
This criterion is used to calculate the amplitude of a heeling arm derived from the value of GZ at a certain heel angle. GZ area or angle of equilibrium requirement. phi3 may be determined from a number of features of the GZ curve including being chosen such that Area3/Area1 is some specified value. fixed heel angle
Units
Area1 integrated from the greater of (phi1) spec.
Derived heeling arm criteria
For these criteria.3) must be specified. The lesser of the following three options A specified. heeling angle due to roll taken as the lesser of (phi3)
deg
A roll-back angle (positive) from the angle of equilibrium with the heeling arm (first up-crossing intersection of the GZ and heeling arm curves) Roll back to the angle of equilibrium of the vessel (ignoring the heeling arm) Upper integration limit of Area2 chosen from the lesser of the seven options. The required ratio of Area3/Area2 used to determine the angle phi3
deg
deg deg
deg
angle at which Area3 / Area1 is
deg
Note The Large Angle Stability analysis heel angle range should include a sufficient negative range to allow for the rollback angle. heel angle (equilibrium angle during lifting) roll back from angle of equilibrium with heeling arm angle of equilibrium (without heel arm) Area2 integrated to the lesser of (phi2) Max. The GZ value used to define the heeling arm is the GZ at one of the following heel angles:
Page 285
.Appendix B
Option
Description Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2a) Angle that defines the lower heel angle for the integration range of Area1. cos1. For more information see: §Heel. The shape of the heeling arm (e.g. This angle is used to evaluate the second part of the criterion: the difference phi2-phi3 must be greater than the required value.

1:
specified angle of heel angle of equilibrium
Upper integration limit. Lower integration limit. The area under both the GZ and heeling arm curves is integrated between the same specified limits. which satisfies the equation below arm is then found and compared with a minimum required value.Appendix F
specified angle of heel angle of first peak in GZ curve angle at which maximum GZ occurs angle of first downflooding immersion angle of margin line or deck edge
The heeling arm is then calculated as described by the equation below. GZ first downflooding angle angle of vanishing stability
It is also possible to specify a minimum heel angle for the upper integration limit.
spec. The amplitude of the heeling. angle above equilibrium angle of first GZ peak angle of max. see below. heel angle
2:
spec. and is then compared with a minimum required value.
A
where:
GZ cos n
Amplitude of heeling arm Shape of heeling arm (n = 0 for constant heeling arm) Specified heel angle Value of GZ at specified heel angle Required ratio = GZ / HA
A n
GZ
GZ area derived heeling arm type 1
This criterion is used to calculate the amplitude of a heeling arm derived from the area under the GZ curve between specified limits.
2 2 1
GZ d
A cos n
d
1
A n
GZ
Amplitude of heeling arm Shape of heeling arm (n = 0 for constant heeling arm) heel angle GZ curve Required ratio
Page 286
. Any negative areas (due to negative GZ) up to this minimum upper integration heel angle will be deducted from the total area under the GZ curve.

e. The steady heel arm is derived from a gust of specified ratio.GZ derived wind heeling arm
The derived wind heeling criterion is used to check that the steady heel angle due to wind pressure exceeds a certain value. A heeling arm of prescribed shape is found such that the specified area ratio is met. or roll back to a specified heel angle. The wind gust will cause the vessel to heel over to the lesser of a specified heel angle.
Note The Large Angle Stability analysis heel angle range should include a sufficient negative range to allow for the rollback angle.general heeling arm Angle of equilibrium . angle of maximum GZ or the first downflooding angle. The roll back may be specified as either:
a fixed angular roll back from the angle of equilibrium with the wind heel arm.Appendix B
GZ area derived heeling arm type 2
This criterion is used to simulate the effects of wind heeling whilst the vessel is rolling in waves. roll back to the vessel equilibrium angle ignoring the wind heeling arms (i. The rollback angle is taken from the equilibrium angle with the wind heeling arm. the vessel is assumed to roll to windward under the action of waves and then roll to leeward. With the wind pressure acting on it. angle of the first GZ peak. Area 1 =
2 1
GZ ( ) heel arm( ) d
Area 2 =
2 1
heel arm( ) GZ ( ) d
Area 1 Ratio = Area 2
GZ area derived heeling arm (type 2) .: where the GZ curve crosses the GZ=0 axis with positive slope). Because of the many different ways in which this criterion is used it has several options for defining the way in which the areas are calculated.
Page 287
. For more information see: §Heel. The amplitude of the heeling arm is then compared with a required minimum value.

This means that the lesser of: a specified heel angle.
Angle of equilibrium . The first equilibrium angle. A1 and A2. The second equilibrium angle. the same cosine power is used for both the specified and the derived heeling arms. The derived heeling arm is chosen such that the areas.
Page 288
. φ2. φ1. should be large enough to withstand a gust from a steady wind heeling angle larger than …. is the angle of equilibrium with a specified heeling arm.derived wind heeling arm Ratio of equilibrium angles .GZ area derived heeling arm
This criterion is used to compare the equilibrium angles with two different heeling arms. first peak in GZ curve.Appendix F
The vessel is assumed to be safe from gusts up to the specified ratio. angle of maximum GZ or the first downflooding angle. are in the specified ratio. The specified heeling arm is specified by an amplitude and cosine power. if the angle of steady heel is greater than the angle. There are several options which can be used to define the upper and lower ranges for the area integrations. is the angle of equilibrium with a derived heeling arm.

Option A n required area ratio Area1 / Area2 options options options Description Magnitude of specified heeling arm Cosine power to describe shape of both specified and derived heelning arms The required area ratio used to find the derived heeling arm magnitude Specify lower integration limit for Area1 Specify upper integration limit for Area1 Specify lower integration limit for Area2.derived heeling arm
Area 1 =
2 1
GZ ( ) heel arm( ) d
heel arm( ) GZ ( ) d
Area 2 =
2 1
Area 1 Ratio of areas = Area 2
φ1 = Angle of equilibrium with heeling arm derived from required area ratio (purple heeling arm) φ2 = Angle of equilibrium with specified heeling arm (orange heeling arm) The criterion is passed if the ratio φ2 : φ1 is less than the required value. Thus if it is required that φ2 be less than φ1. then the ratio φ2 : φ1 must be less than unity.Appendix B
Ratio of equilibrium angles . the upper integration limit is always the angle of Units length
deg deg deg
Page 289
.

sail area ISO 8666
length2
height of centroid of AS
length
LH. when fully flooded with water. For more information see: §Heel. zero trim condition. Option delta Description Adjustment to STIX rating. Please refer to ISO/FDIS 12217-2:2002(E) for exact definitions of parameters and how they should be calculated. which do not easily fall into the categories above. Sail area as defined in ISO 8666. zero trim condition.
Other combined criteria
Other criteria.Appendix F
required value
equilibrium with derived heel arm Specifies the maximum allowable ratio of equilibrium heel angle with the specified heel arm to the equilibrium heel angle with the derived heel arm (phi2 / phi1). this is not the same as the STIX variable hCE which is measured from the waterline.STIX
The stability index criterion or STIX criterion as described in ISO/FDIS 12217-2:2002(E) is used to assess the stability of sailing craft. Hull beam as defined by ISO 8666. are found here. The required input parameters are described below.
Other criteria . Units
AS. length
length
BH. indicating that the equilibrium heel angle with the specified heel arm must be less than the equilibrium heel angle with the derived heel arm
Note The Large Angle Stability analysis heel angle range should include a sufficient negative range to allow for the rollback angle. beam of hull
length
Page 290
. This may be either specified or calculated by Hydromax. Hydromax calculates this parameter as the overall length of the vessel (all hull surfaces) in the upright. Height of sail area centre of effort from model‟s vertical datum (not necessarily the waterline. positive up). either 0 or 5. has reserve buoyancy and positive righting lever at a heel angle of 90º 0 in all other cases. This may be either specified or calculated by Hydromax. Note that no additional windage areas are calculated by Hydromax for this criterion. . Hull length as defined by ISO 8666. 5 if the vessel. Hydromax calculates this parameter as the overall beam of the vessel (all hull surfaces) in the upright. This value is normally less than or equal to 100%.

This may be either specified or calculated by Hydromax. beam waterline
height of immersed profile area centroid
Shall be greater than / Shall not be less than
Description Hull waterline length in the current load condition as defined by ISO 8666.
Page 291
. this is not the same as the STIX variable hLP ). if the analysis is carried out freeto-trim.passenger crowding heeling arm
Calculates the angle of equilibrium with the heeling arm due to passenger crowding applied. Hull waterline beam in the current load condition as defined by ISO 8666. length waterline
BWL. or defined downflooding points do not immerse within the selected heel angle range.
Units length
length
length
Hydromax calculates the various factors and STIX rating according to ISO/FDIS 122172:2002(E). Hydromax calculates this parameter as the waterline length of the vessel (all hull surfaces) at zero heel and at the loadcase displacement and centre of gravity.
Specific stand alone heeling arm criteria
These criteria provide some specific stand alone heeling arm criteria. Hydromax calculates this parameter as the waterline beam of the vessel (all hull surfaces) at zero heel and at the loadcase displacement and centre of gravity. the waterline of the trimmed vessel is used. if no downflooding points are defined. The heeling arm is calculated from the number. Hence. weight and location of the passengers. This affects the calculation of the Wind Moment and Downflooding factors.
Stand alone heeling arm criteria
Angle of equilibrium . but it is highly recommended to use the equivalent xRef criteria with the desired heeling arms. the waterline of the trimmed vessel is used.Appendix B
Option LWL. Height of centre of the lateral projected immersed area of the hull from model‟s vertical datum (not necessarily the waterline. They are included for compatibility with criteria sets defined in earlier versions of Hydromax. may be specified or calculated by Hydromax. the waterline of the trimmed vessel is used. Hydromax uses the numerical STIX rating value rather than the STIX design category. Note that a downflooding angle is required to calculate the STIX index. This may be either specified or calculated by Hydromax. if the analysis is carried out freeto-trim. if the analysis is carried out freeto-trim. the angle of downflooding is taken to be the largest heel angle tested. Hydromax calculates this parameter at zero heel and at the loadcase displacement and centre of gravity. see §Passenger crowding.

vessel speed and height of the vessel‟s centre of gravity.
Page 292
.high-speed turn
This criterion is essentially the same as its generic form: Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) .general cos+sin heeling arm
This is a very similar criterion to § Ratio of areas type 1 . for further information also see §General cos+sin heeling arm
H( )
Area 1 = Area 2 =
k A cos n ( )
2 1
B sin m ( )
. In this criterion the heel arm has both a sine and a cosine component.passenger crowding
This criterion is essentially the same as its generic form: Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) . however the heel arm is the specific high-speed turning form. however the heel arm is the specific passenger crowding form. The heeling arm is calculated from the turn radius.
GZ ( ) heel arm( ) d
4 3
GZ ( )d
.
Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) .general heeling arm. the only difference being the shape of the heel arm.Appendix F
Angle of equilibrium . This is used to simulate the effects of lifting weights and is used by several Navies.
Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) .general heeling arm.
Area 1 Ratio = Area 2
Stand alone heeling arm combined criteria
Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) .
Ratio of areas type 1 .general heeling arm except that the heel arm has both a cos and sin component.general heeling arm. The modified form of the heeling arm is given below. see §Turning.general cos+sin heeling arm
The lifting criterion is the same as the Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) .high-speed turn heeling arm
Calculates the angle of equilibrium with the heeling arm due to high speed turning applied.

Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) .general cos+sin heeling arm.wind heeling arm
This criterion is exactly the same as §Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2) .Appendix B
Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) – cos+sin heeling arm Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) .towing
This criterion is essentially the same as its generic form: Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) .
Area definition
Page 293
.general cos+sin heeling arm. projected area and area lever information.lifting weight
This criterion is essentially the same as its generic form: Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) .general wind heeling arm except that the magnitude of the heeling arm is automatically calculated from the wind pressure (or velocity). however the heel arm is the specific towing form.
Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2) . however the heel arm is the specific lifting of a heavy weight form.

Page 294
. For more information see: §Heel.Appendix F
Note The Large Angle Stability analysis heel angle range should include a sufficient negative range to allow for the rollback angle.

In this section we look at some common criteria and demonstrate how they may be evaluated in Hydromax. is presented in quite different ways by different regulatory bodies. constants such as acceleration due to gravity are explicitly shown in the formulations and consistent units are used – thus removing the need for obscure constants with strange units.
From the figure above we can see that the slopes of both curves are the same at 1 and 2 .
Capsizing moment
Often a capsizing moment is determined from the dynamic stability curve by drawing a line through the origin which is tangent to the GZ area curve. we have tried to distil the essence of the various stability criteria and present them in their simplest form whilst preserving the physical significance of the stability characteristic under assessment. This is the integral of the GZ curve where the ordinate is the area under the GZ curve integrated from zero to the heel angle in question. The problem is to reformulate this so that this capsizing moment can be found from the GZ curve:
Dynamic stability curve and Dynamic heeling arm. Finally since the dynamic heeling arm is a straight line with constant slope we know that the corresponding heeling arm is a constant value. at 2 . Remembering this relationship and that the slope of the dynamic stability curve is the value of GZ it is often possible to reformulate the same criterion in terms of one based on the GZ curve. In Hydromax we have always sought to keep the physical significance transparent in the formulation – for this reason. In some cases. Furthermore. from this we can deduce that the value of GZ and Heeling arm are the same at these angles.Appendix B
Appendix D: Specific Criteria
In Hydromax.
Dynamic stability criteria
In some cases the criteria are expressed in terms of the so-called dynamic stability curve. From these facts we can derive the following GZ and heeling arm curves:
Page 295
. what is essentially the same criterion. The capsizing moment is taken as the magnitude of GZ at this tangent heel angle 2 . the values are the same indicating that the areas under each curve from 0 to 2 are the same. This is the dynamic heeling arm curve (blue) and is the integral of a constant value heeling arm.

Appendix F
Stability curve. Area 2 corresponds to the area under the GZ curve up to the second intercept
Knowing that Area1 = Area2 we can deduce that Area 3 = Area 4 in the figure below:
Page 296
. Area 1 corresponds to the area under the heeling arm curve up to the second intercept
Stability curve.

and in the case of “moments” in mass.Appendix B
The magnitude of the heeling arm must be chosen so that Area 3 = Area 4
So the capsizing moment can also be determined by finding the heeling moment that gives Area3 = Area4.75(69)
3. The approach that has been taken in Hydromax is to reflect the physics of what is generating the heeling moment. it is necessary to divide by vessel weight ( g ).749(18) amended to MSC.. 1929). m/s.51477333.Heeling due to turning Heeling moment defined by:
MR
Where:
0. This can easily be done in Hydromax using the GZ area derived heeling arm type 2 criterion. the conversions for some common criteria have been explained. it is necessary to divide by vessel mass..2.
Heeling arms for specific criteria . Hydromax uses an internal conversion of knots to m/s based on the International Nautical mile which is defined as exactly 1852m (International Hydrographic Conference.2
V02 L
tonne
KG
d [kNm] 2
MR
V0
L
tonne
= heeling moment in kNm = service speed in m/s = length of ship at waterline in m = displacement in tonne
Page 297
.184m.) In the following section.. (Note that the UK nautical mile is 6080ft = 1853.Note on unit conversion
There are quite a few different ways in which different authorities define their heeling arms. Be careful as some criteria specify heeling arms and some specify heeling moments or “moments” in mass. giving a conversion multiplier for knots to m/s of 0. Monaco.1. Thus 1 knot = 1852/3600 = 0.5144444. All Hydromax criteria use a heeling arm since this is what is ultimately plotted on the GZ curve.length..6 .length. To obtain the heeling arm from the heeling moment.
IMO Code on Intact Stability A.

2 510% 1.1:1 merely gives a constant approaching the theoretically correct value of unity.2
V02 KG L 1000
Where: = standard acceleration due to gravity = 9.2 V02 KG Lg d [m] 2
HR
g
0.
3.2 KG Lg
d 2
Equating similar terms:
h
V
R L
and
KG
V0
d 2
and assuming that the ratio of the turn radius to the vessel length is 5.Severe wind and rolling criterion (weather criterion) Heeling arm defined by:
L R
1. the choice of a ratio of 5.1:1.2 . H R
1000 M R / g [m].81
l w1
P
tonne
[m]
Where: = heeling arm in m = wind pressure in Pa
Page 298
.80665 m/s2 = displacement in kg
The heeling arm in Hydromax is defined as:
HR
a
V2 Rg
h
[m].02
Note that it suffices that a
a that satisfies this relationship may be chosen. is given by:
d 1000 2 g 0. we obtain:
a
V2 Rg
h
V02 0.02 and any ratio of turn radius to vessel length and constant
lw1
PAZ 1000 g9. we obtain:
510%
a
0.
Where: V R
h a
= vessel speed in m/s = radius of turn in m = height of centre of gravity above centre of lateral resistance in m = non-dimensional constant (theoretically unity)
Thus equating the required IMO heeling arm to the Hydromax heeling arm.Appendix F
d KG
= mean draft m = height of centre of gravity above keel in m
Hence the heeling arm.

4 .81m/s2
g9.80665 m/s2 = displacement in kg = height of centroid of A in m = height of centroid of underwater lateral area in m = non-dimensional constant (theoretically unity)
Where:
g
h H a
Thus equating the required IMO heeling arm to the Hydromax heeling arm. we obtain:
a
PA(h H ) g
PAZ 1000 g9.81
The heeling arm in Hydromax is defined as:
Hw
a
PA(h H ) g [m]
= standard acceleration due to gravity = 9.Heeling moment due to wind pressure Heeling moment defined by:
Mv
0.80665 m/s2 = displacement in kg
The heeling arm in Hydromax is defined as:
Page 299
.81
9.81
tonne
Equating similar terms:
h H
and
Z
a
g g9.80665 9.001PAZ [kNm]
= heeling moment in kNm = wind pressure in Pa = projected lateral windage in m2 = vertical separation of centroids of A and underwater lateral area in m
Where:
Mv
P A Z
Hence the heeling arm.99966
IMO HSC Code MSC.36(63)
Annex 6 1.001PAZ
1000 g
1000M v / g [m].9. is given by: PAZ g [m]
Where: = standard acceleration due to gravity = 9.1.81
0. H v
HR
g
0.Appendix B
A Z
tonne
= projected lateral windage in m2 = vertical separation of centroids of A and underwater lateral area in m = displacement in tonne = IMO assumed value of gravitational acceleration .

80665 m/s2 = displacement in kg = height of centroid of A in m = height of half the lightest service draft in m = non-dimensional constant (theoretically unity)
Where:
g
h H a
Thus equating the required IMO heeling arm to the Hydromax heeling arm.3 .Heeling due to wind Heeling arm defined by:
HL1
Where:
PAZ 9800 tonne [m]
= heeling arm in m = wind pressure in Pa = projected lateral windage in m2 = vertical separation of centroid of A and half the lightest service draft in = displacement in tonne
HL1
P A Z
m
tonne
The heeling arm in Hydromax is defined as:
Hw
a
PA(h H ) g [m]
= standard acceleration due to gravity = 9.80665 m/s2 = displacement in kg = height of centroid of A in m = height of centroid of underwater lateral area in m = non-dimensional constant (theoretically unity)
Where:
Thus equating the required IMO heeling arm to the Hydromax heeling arm. we obtain:
Equating similar terms: h H Z
Page 300
.Appendix F
Hw
g
h H a
a
PA(h H ) g [m]
= standard acceleration due to gravity = 9. 0
Annex 7 1. we obtain:
a
PA(h H ) g
PAZ g
Equating similar terms: h H Z and
a 1.

50102
USL code (Australia)
USL C.5.1.1.Appendix B
and
a
g 9800
tonne
9.000102 1000.Heeling moment due to turning USL wind heeling “moment” is specified as:
M
0. the factor a should be multiplied by the gust factor – typically 1. a becomes 1.0002783
USL C.m]
L
Where:
v kts
tonne
= vessel speed in knots = displacement in tonne
Page 301
.000102 PA(h H ) [tonne.80665 1.000102 PA(h H )
1000
simplifying and rearranging:
a
0.1.0053
2 vkts
tonnes
h
[tonne.1.m]
= height of centroid of A in m = height of centroid of underwater lateral area in m = wind pressure in Pa = projected lateral windage in m2
Where:
Thus the heeling arm is given by:
H
0.3 .4 .00068
Where the effect of wind plus gust is required.80665 9.0 g
0.000102 PA(h
H)
1000
[m]
The heeling arm in Hydromax is defined as:
H
a
PA(h H ) g [m]
= standard acceleration due to gravity = 9.8
1.Wind heeling moment USL wind heeling “moment” is specified as:
M
h H P A
0.80665 m/s2 = displacement in kg = non-dimensional constant (theoretically unity)
Where:
g
a
Thus equating:
H
a
PA(h H ) g
0.102 9. Hence. in the case of wind plus gust.

0
simplifying and rearranging:
a
5.80665 [ms-2]:
a
0.0
[m]
Where: = displacement in kg The heeling arm in Hydromax is defined as:
H
a
V2 Rg
h
[m].999798
a
Note that it suffices that .0053
2 vkts
tonnes
h1
L
1000. is assumed to be constant at all angles of heel and shall be calculated as follows:
Page 302
. using annex D. expressed in newton metres.196424
R L 509%
gives a value for a:
R Assuming that the ratio of the turn radius to the vessel length. The heeling moment due to wind.3g
2 R vkts L V2
tonnes
5. “6. L
a 0. MW.196424 509% 0.3g
R 1 1 2 L 0. and any ratio of turn radius to vessel length and constant a that satisfies this relationship may be chosen. whichever is the least.3.0053
2 vkts
tonnes
h1
L
1000. = vessel speed in m/s = radius of turn in m = height of centre of gravity above centre of lateral resistance in m = non-dimensional constant (theoretically unity)
Where:
V R h a
Thus equating the required USL heeling arm to the Hydromax heeling arm.5144 1000. the choice of a ratio of 509% merely gives a constant approaching the theoretically correct value of unity.2 Rolling in beam waves and wind The curve of righting moments of the boat shall be established up to the downflooding angle or the angle of vanishing stability or 50°.0
finally.Appendix F
h L
= height of centre of gravity above centre of lateral resistance in m = waterline length of vessel in m
Thus the heeling arm is given by:
H
0. we obtain:
a
V2 Rg
h
0. with g = 9.
ISO 12217-1:2002(E)
R L
0.196424
This section explains how the ISO 12217-1 code calculates the heeling arm and how you can replicate this calculation with a Hydromax criterion.

Appendix B
MW = 0. Hydromax‟ wind heeling arm calculation uses H for the vertical height of the hydrodynamic centre (underwater area) and h as the vertical height of the aerodynamic centre (windage area) – all measured consistently from the zero point. and the lever is (ALV / LWL + TM) This lever is a bit confusing so let‟s concentrate on that.3.3 ALV * (ALV / LWL + TM)* vW2 Where LWL is the waterline length.3 kg/m3 giving the expected result for heeling arm amplitude:
Page 303
. You can calculate (ALV / LWL + TM) manually and then make sure the (h-H) value in Hydromax is the same by specifying: Velocity based heeling arm. expressed in metres. Make sure you check your total windage lever in the intermediate results in the criteria results tab of the Results window.3 * ALV * vW2. vW = 28 m/s for design category A. where the force is calculated as 0. the heeling moment is given as: MW = 0.9 m vW 28 m/s for design category A ALV 72 m2 ( this is greater than 0.1 + 1.55*LH * BH.312 m. and 21 m/s for design category B. a = 0. a = 0.3 kg/m3 Note: the centre of the windage area -h.3 * 72 * (72 / 21. TM is the draft at the mid-point of the waterline length. but shall not be taken as less than 0. positive up.0.1 + 1.55 LH BH = 66 m2) Thus according to the ISO 12217 formula.9 = 5. H = 0. For example.1 m TM 1. supposing we have a vessel with the following characteristics: Displacement 105. Thus the lever is (h-H) in Hydromax should be the same as the (ALV / LWL + TM) lever from ISO.applies to the additional windage area or the total windage area depending on which option you have selected.0868 m The input for Hydromax requires: Total area A = 72 m2.7. h = (ALV / LWL + TM).7 tonne = 1037 kN LH 24 m BH 5 m LWL 21.9) * 282 = 89961 Nm Thus the heeling arm = MW / Displacement = 89961 / 1037000 = 0. ALV is the windage area as defined in 3. area centroid height: h = ALV / LWL + TM = 72 / 21.” Basically they are using moment = force * lever.

2: Downflooding height Minimum freeboard to downflooding points must be determined from Figures 2 and 3 (Section 6.3. 6.2) and entered into the required value field. An additional requirement in this section is that a specified freeboard must be exceeded. H.1. see Tables 3 and 4 (Sections 6. Verify that the angle of equilibrium does not exceed the maximum permissible value. there is no option for placing the height. Specify a loadcase with the offset load specified and carry out an equilibrium analysis. which depends on the category and length of vessel being tested.2). of the centre of lateral resistance at the bottom of the vessel. See also the note on converting units for the definition of the heeling arms in ISO 122171:2002(E).3: Resistance to wind and waves Determine the windage area and lever and enter them in the appropriate fields in the criterion. In Hydromax. the default value is set at 1.
This section gives some details on implementing the ISO 12217 stability criteria in Hydromax.1.3.7 6. 6.
Part 1: Non-sailing boats of hull length greater than or equal to 6m
In many cases the user must determine the required pass value for the criteria. 6.3: Resistance to waves This criterion comprises two parts. one to check that the righting moment is sufficient and a second to determine whether the righting lever is sufficient. The default value is set to 49. 6.1.
ISO 12217: Small craft – stability and buoyancy assessment and categorisation. Also determine the required wind speed and roll-back angle (depending on the design category) and enter these values.3: Downflooding angle Must be greater than a certain value as determined according to the design category. 6. 2. positive upwards). Define a heeling arm and calculate the intersection of the heeling arm with the GZ curve to determine the angle of equilibrium. In most cases the default required value would exceed the worst case.2: Offset-load test There are several ways of evaluating this criterion: 1. 6.4: Heel due to wind action
Page 304
.Appendix F
Intermediate results for the wind heeling arm.42m which is slightly greater than the height required for a category A vessel of 24m in length. so this must be specified manually (it is measured from the model zero point.1.

5: Knockdown-recovery test The test can be approximated by examining the angle of vanishing stability in the flooded condition.2. If the flooded vessel has positive GZ at the knockdown angle. 6.42m which is slightly greater than the height required for a category A vessel of 24m in length.9).6.6: Wind stiffness test
Page 305
. 6. 6. Calculate the GZ curve with the crew seated to windward. but note the different wind speeds to be used.2) and entered into the required value field.4. this criterion will then look at the angle of equilibrium of the vessel under the applied wind heeling arm. 7. see Table 5 (Section 6.3: Downflooding angle Must be greater than a certain value as determined according to the design category.42m which is slightly greater than the height required for a category A vessel of 24m in length.4: Stability index (STIX) Determine the required STIX value depending on the design category.2.6.2. Section 6.2)
Part 2: Sailing boats of hull length greater than or equal to 6m
6. Also specify the sail area and vertical position of the sail area centroid and enter these values in the appropriate fields in the criterion. see Tables 3 (Sections 6. Convert this to a heeling lever.2: Downflooding height Minimum freeboard to downflooding points must be determined from Figure 2 (Section 6. 6.2.3: Angle of vanishing stability Determine the required angle of vanishing stability which depends on design category and vessel displacement.2.3).3: Offset-load test This criterion is most effectively evaluated by performing an equilibrium analysis with the required offset loading condition Sailing Boats: 7.2: Downflooding-height tests Determine the required downflooding height and specify the appropriate loading condition. the default value is set at 1.6.7).3. The default value is set to 40 6.6. 6. If desired you can specify the other values or let Hydromax calculate them for you.6 for the wind speed of interest (Table 6.6: Wind stiffness test Determine the wind heeling moment as defined in 6. The default value is 130. Non-Sailing Boats: 6. The criterion is evaluated after an equilibrium analysis.5: Knockdown-recovery test The test can be approximated by examining the angle of vanishing stability in the flooded condition.2. Determine the limiting heel angle from Table 4 (Sections 6.Appendix B
Determine the parameters required for calculation of the wind heeling moment as per 6.
Part 3: Boats of hull length less than 6m
These criteria are evaluated after an equilibrium analysis under the specified loading condition. If the flooded vessel has positive GZ at the knockdown angle.2: Downflooding height Minimum freeboard to downflooding points must be determined from Figure 2 (Section 6. it should self right. it should self right. the default value is set at 1.2) and entered into the required value field. 7.

Convert this to a heeling lever.
Page 306
.Appendix F
Determine the wind heeling moment as defined in 6. Calculate the GZ curve with the crew seated to windward.6. this criterion will then look at the angle of equilibrium of the vessel under the applied wind heeling arm.7).6.6 for the wind speed of interest (Table 6. Section 6.

hcr
Description
The library is not related to the Hydromax Design File.Links to or information on the Stability Criteria Library . However. File
Maxsurf Design
Extension
.
Page 307
. E.e. if you wish to transfer loadcases or compartment definitions from one model to another. The .txt
Description
Result tables can be saved separately Results tables can not be opened in Hydromax The report can be saved separately
Report
.dcs . is not model related. flexibility. Downflooding/embarkation points. Contains hydrostatic sections information and all Input information that may also be stored separately in the files below The . sounding pipes and modulus
Output files
All Result Window tables
Extension
. not when the model is opened.Maxsurf surface information . The library is loaded when the program starts.htk . For more information see the section on criteria. margin lines.Appendix B
Appendix E: Reference Tables
This appendix contains the following reference tables:
File Extension Reference Table Analysis settings reference table
File Extension Reference Table
The following table lists files that are used in Hydromax.hmd file with the same name. thickness.Links to or information on the Results tables .g.msd file Hydromax looks for a .rtf
Library
Hydromax Criteria Library
Extension
. this can be done by going to the appropriate window and saving it to a separate file.Links to or information on the Report
Hydromax Design
.hmd file does not contain: .txt
Description
Each loadcase can be saved separately The compartment definition can be saved separately The damage case definition can be saved separately All tables in the input window can be saved as text files.hmd file contains all the additional information that defines the Hydromax model and you need only save this file when working in Hydromax.msd
Description
Contains control point and surface information. outside arrows.hml . i.hmd
Separate Input files
Loadcase Compartments Damage cases All Input window tables
Extension
. colour When opening a . precision. trimming.

result S R LC FTTLC FTT
Cannot be specified – they are a calculated resul Specific (fixed. LC LC S / LC S1 result2 S3 n/a
Where.
3
The VCG is required for the floodable length analysis because of its effect on trim.Appendix F
Analysis settings reference table
The following table can be used as a reference to the various analysis settings for each analyses type. Analysis Settings Analyses type Trim Heel Draft DisplaceLCG TCG VCG ment
Upright stability Large Angle Stability Equilibrium Specified Condition KN values Limiting KG Floodable Length Tank Calibration S S/ FTTLC result S S / FTT S / FTT FTT S Upright R result S R R Upright Upright R result result S result result result n/a result LC LC S / LC R R R n/a n/a LC LC S / LC S/ FTT S/ FTT FTT n/a n/a LC LC S / LC S/ LC4 S/ LC4 n/a n/a For GM etc.
4
The TCG may be specified directly of derived from the lost cargo / ballast water in damaged tanks from the current loadcase. During the floodable length analysis. a) The VCG only has an effect on the results if the analysis is free-to-trim. single) value to be set by user Varied within Range specified by user Calculates values from loadcase – specifies displacement and COG only Free-to-trim to loadcase CG Free-to-trim to LCG calculated from a specific initial trim angle or specified LCG (and VCG) 1 The VCG is used in two ways in the KN analysis. the trim can be substantial and the vertical separation of CG and CB needs to be taken into account.
2
The VCG is not required for the Limiting KG analysis. When calculating the LCG from a specified trim and displacement. the current VCG is used. b) The GZ curve is calculated for the specified VCG and then the normalised KN curve is calculated as KN = GZ + VCG*SIN(heel).
Page 308
.

This following explains how Formation Design Systems has verified that Hydromax gives accurate results and what steps we take to make sure that each version of the software we ship is as reliable as possible. data hiding and encapsulation and fault tolerant programming practices to enhance our software's reliability. verification of the underlying algorithms. Hydromax is a complex software system of over 400. testing of real world problems inhouse and beta testing in the field at Hydromax user sites.Appendix B
Appendix F: Quality Assurance
This appendix describes the quality assurance processes used to ensure Hydromax gives reliable and accurate results. we summarize by saying that we utilize structured code.
Quality Principles
While it is impossible to ensure that any software product is completely free of bugs.
Structured Programming
The best defence against bugs in software is to use structured programming techniques that have been proven to improve software reliability. testing of the computer implementation of those algorithms. Without going into the technical details of our software development methodology. object oriented design. we first carry out testing on the algorithms on Reference Designs – these are proven test cases with known analytical solutions. To this end we follow a development and testing path which includes use of structured programming techniques. we follow a series of engineering and testing principles and procedures to ensure that Hydromax will produce results which are consistent with the level of accuracy and thoroughness a professional engineer applies to design work. These designs are of simple geometric shapes and can be used to validate calculations performed by Hydromax.
Quality Assurance
Many Hydromax users ask us how we know that Hydromax produces the correct results.
Reference Designs
A folder of reference hull shapes is included with Maxsurf and Hydromax. see Reference Calculations.000 lines of code and we believe our history of reliability reflects the effort we have put into using reliable coding practices.
Page 309
. Below is a table of results derived analytically from these shapes compared with results obtained from Maxsurf and Hydromax at different precisions.
Verification of Algorithms
When new design or analysis algorithms are introduced into Hydromax.

333 833.56% -0.79939 261.02% -0.89 % error -0.257
833.00%
% error 0.33333 833.761 480.00% 0.105 WP Area m^2 78.39% -1. I 490.Appendix F
Reference Calculations
Hydrostatics calculations for various reference designs.00% 0.57 483.991 Maxsurf Hi Precision 392.874 -1.01% -0. I Long.00% 0.333333
833.04% -2.333 833.333333 833.33333 833. I m^4 Volume WP Area Trans.341 77.72%
% error 0.333
% error -0.874
WP Area m^2 100 100 100 100 100
VCB m -2.00%
% error 0.03%
Analytically derived Hydromax High Precision Hydromax Low Precision Maxsurf Hi Precision Maxsurf Low Precision
10m Cylinder 10m diam.873852 488.57% % error -0.333
833.357 78.05% -0.47% -0.875 -1. comparison of Maxsurf and Hydromax with analytical values sphere 10m diam at 5m draft Volume m^3 261.23% -0.564741 490.121 -2.522 Maxsurf Low Precision 389. I Long.10% -1.122 -2. I m^4 Long.00%
Page 310
.00% 0.871 LCB m 0 0 0 0 0 Trans.849 VCB m -1.06% -1. I m^4 Volume WP Area Trans. I m^4 Long.673 Hydromax High Precision Hydromax Low Precision 391.875 -1.6807269 488.118
LCB m 0 0 0 0 0
Trans.699 392.79% % error -0.87385 489.308 833.00% 0.191 490.25% -0.53982 78.18% -0. I 833.532 257.88% % error -0.00% 0.01% 0.34279 261.14247 488. at 5m draft Volume m^3 Analytically derived 392.93873 485.534 78.764 260.875 -1.01% -0.121 -2.00% 0.122 -2.01% -0.01% -0.00% 0.

351 14.666666 1666. I m^4 Long.667 % error 0.621 % error -0. I Long.00% 0.5 -2.26% -0.352 9.999 -0.98 -0.9375 Volume WP Area VCB m^3 m^2 m Analytically derived 9.6667 6666.00% 0.5 -2.Box 20m long 10m beam at 5m draft Volume m^3 Analytically derived 1000 Hydromax High Precision 1000 Hydromax Low Precision 1000 Maxsurf Hi Precision 1000 Maxsurf Low Precision 1000
WP Area m^2 200 200 200 200 200
VCB m -2.372 14.22% -0.92875 1.6667 6666.00% % error 0.5
LCB m 0 0 0 0 0
Trans.00% 0.01% -0.00% 0.666666 1666.00%
Parabolic Wigley type Hull.00% 0.00% 0. I Long.92418 1.667 6666.00% % error 0.D=0.B=1.63 167.01% -0.67%
Page 311
. I m^4 Long.00% 0.351 Maxsurf Low Precision 9.667 1666.5 -2.666666 1666.75 168.92527 1.998 -0.667 6666.00% 0.00% % error 0.09% -0.07% -0.4685 168.368 Hydromax High Precision 14.302 14.6667 6666.24% -0.00% 0.04% -0.78% % error -0.5m. I m^4 Volume WP Area Trans.00% 0.07% -0.01% -0.91 168.3773 168. LWL=15m.375 15 -0.13% -0. I 1.352 Hydromax Low Precision 9.03% -0.97% % error -0.351
LCB m 0 0 0 0 0
Trans.00% 0. I 1666.927 1. I m^4 Volume WP Area Trans.352 Maxsurf Hi Precision 9.00% 0.5 -2.942 -0.39% % error -0.

as with all complex software systems. These beta testers provide us with feedback on the reliability and accuracy of the program as well as its useability and suitability for everyday work. AutoShip etc. If you suspect a problem with Hydromax.5a2 The second alpha test release of version 1. However.64
But we're not Perfect
We make every effort to ensure that our software will meet our users' needs and perform accurately. To get accurate results from Hydromax. testing is then carried out on more complex sample problems to which a solution has already been established using a proven analysis program.
Page 312
. These results may either come from Naval Architecture and Marine Engineering texts such as well as from other results carried out by Formation Design Systems or other engineers using other software products such as NAPA. If the version is a development. This involves sending the software to practicing engineers and having them use it on design work in progress to determine its reliability for actual design use.com and explain what you believe the problem to be. It is mostly reliable but may contain some bugs. A beta release is a final test version of the program released for field testing prior to commercial release. In the unlikely event of a problem being found. Once the beta test program is completed and all testers are happy with the program. and send you a new corrected version of the program. For example 1. we will correct it as soon as practicable. At each release the results from these tests are compared with the results from the previous release to ensure conformance with answers which have been established as being correct. we begin shipping the commercial version. A development version is usually only for internal use and is a very early demonstration of a possible new product or feature.
Testing of Upgrades
As each new version of Hydromax is released we perform a series of tests to ensure it functions correctly. we conduct a beta test of the software. An alpha release is a first public release of a program for initial testing and comment.64 A commercial release of version 1. debugged program reliable and ready for professional use.6b2 The second beta test release of version 1. the version number may also include a letter and number suffix indicating the type and number of the release. it is necessary for you to model the problem correctly and to correctly interpret the results produced. it is not reliable.Appendix C
Testing of Implementation
Once the basic algorithms have been proven correct.6 1. it is possible for errors to occur. It is highly experimental and not reliable.
Version Control
Each new version of Hydromax displays a version number indicating the version and the date the software was first shipped.0 1. A commercial release is a completed. please contact our technical support staff by email at support@formsys.5 1. It is the users' responsibility to correctly model the structure and assume responsibility for the results.
Beta Testing
Immediately prior to the release of each new version of Hydromax.0d1 The first development release of version 1. alpha test or beta test release.

......... 211 Hydrostatic ....................................................................... calculation of...................... 70 Compartments...................................... 161 Select..... 108 Upright Hydrostatics ........................ 202 Allowable shears and moments ....................................................... 84 Curves of Form ......... add.......................................................................... 62 Convergence Error ......................... 84 Cut................... 77 Analysis Menu ......................................................................Index
Index
A About Hydromax ...................... 207
Page 313
...................................... 150 Create cases from Zone Damage ......... 313 Block Coefficient ............................................................ 213 Activate GHS Export ............................................................................ 216 Coefficients..................... 52 Saving ...................... 213 B Background ....................... 106 Specified Conditions ............................................................................................... 82 Limiting KG ............................. 155 Damage Case Add...... 78......... 159 Corrected VCG .............................................................................. 309 Toolbar ........................ 200 D Damage .............................................................................. 174 Criteria Libraries ............................................................ 139 Beam . 191 Copying Tables ......................... 71 Cascade ................... 74 Rename .... 52 Creating a new Loadcase File .............................. 200 Reset to defaults ................................ 70 Linked Tanks ....................... 73 Extent of damage .......................... 156 Settings.............. 42 Coefficient parameters ................................................................................................................................ 204 Creating a Compartment definition file ...................... 70 Linked ............................................................................................... 185 C Calibration Increment ............ 69 Compartments .................................................................................................................... 36 Colour .... 90 Analysis type Equilibrium ............................................................................. Main Import.......................... 70 Non-Buoyant Volumes ............................... 200 Copying Graphs ........................................................ 79 Animate ...................................................................................................................................72.......................................51............................................................................ 96 Longitudinal Strength ... 183 Data Format ...................................................................... 184 New ....................................................................................... 221 Boundary Box ...... 88 Floodable Length ................................................ 181 Centre of flotation ................................................. 212 Assembly View ..... 203 Compartment Definition .............. 52 Forming .......................... 204 Output ............................... 72 Display .............. 211 Arrange Icons ...................................... 72 Delete ... 73 Damage Window ................................................ 42 Add Surface Areas . 200 Save As ........................................... 212 Case Menu .............. 202 Add Damage case .............................................................................................................................................................................. 210 Batch Analysis ....................................... 172 Criteria.... 103 KN Values Analysis ... 201 Centre of buoyancy ................................................................................ Prob Damage Import................ 213 Closing a Loadcase ....... 161 Compartment types .......... 70 Tanks... 201 Cell Shading ....................................................................... 93 Large Angle Stability ............. 181 Centre of gravity ... 218 Beta Testing ............... 72 saving ........... 204 Add Load ....................................................................................................185.................. 204 Cell Border ..........158.......... delete ............................. 200 Criteria............................... 181 Check for Updates................................................................................. 91 Tank Calibrations ................................................... 200 Curve of Areas ................................................................... 39 Criteria ................................... 147 Coordinate system............... 199 Save As ........................ 195 Analysis in waves ...................................................................................................... 34 Copy ......................................................................................... 181 Automation Reference . 52 Bulkheads................. 205 Criteria File Format....................

........................ 89 Full Screen .............. 35....... 198 Graph ............. 194 Edit.. 214 Frame of Reference ........................................... 87 Downflooding points ............................................................................. 18 Design..............................Index
Data layout . 220 Draft marks .......
Page 314
Close ........................ 206 GZ ........... 211 Deactivate GHS Export.... 205 Display Background ............................................................. 198 Export Bitmap .................................. 210 Grounding ............ 201 Delete Damage case ....... 18............................................................................................................................... 211 Fredyn ................. Add........................................................ 207 Downflooding Angles ......................................... 197 File Toolbar....................... 146.......................................................................... 43 Hull Sections Recalculate .......... 210 Display Menu .......................................... 204 G GHS..... 200 Hydromax Version 8..... 206 Hydromax v8...................................................................................... Export..... 205 Heeling Moments .............. 190 Graph Printing to Scale .................................................... 189 Curves of Form ........................................................................... 198 Dynamic Stability ...................................................181........................................ 203 Form parameters ................................. 186 Data Menu............................................................................................................................................. 83 E Edge Visibility Toolbar......... Export .............. 190 Graph Formatting ........ 202 Move Items Up ........ 73 Fluid analysis method ...... 197 Fill Down ..................................................................................................... 201 Floodable Length ......................................... 189 double click ........... 308 File Menu ........................... 205 Font .......................................................................... 196 F File Extension Table ........................ 188 Graphs ....... 161 Extent of Damage ..................................18. 205..................................................... 197 Exit ................................... 195...............................................0 file........................ 145............................................................................ 88 Equilibrium Condition ...................... 189 Graph colours ....... Import................................................................. 151........................................ 202 Sort Items ...................................... Export.............................................................................. 201 Move Items Down............ 199 Free Surface Moment ..........51. 87 Equilibrium .... 151 Fluids ..........51............................................. 210 Density ....................................................................... 199 Exporting ............................................................................................................................................................. 190 get data ....................................... 240 Help Menu .......................................................................................... 211 Design Grid Toolbar ................... 189 Grid ... 219...................... 204 Edit Menu ................................................................................................... 190 Righting Lever (GZ) .................... 196 Design Preparation ....................................................154............................................................................... 204 Delete DXF background ................................................... 210 Home View ......... 185 Linking to tanks or compartments ........................ 9............... 198 GHS...... 212 Hide DXF............................................... 35 DWL ... 189 Type ......................................................................................................... 75. 76 Draft ............................... 202 Delete Cells . 202 Horizontal lever ............................................................ 212 Curve of Areas ................................ 201 Delete .........142.............. 12 Floodable Length Criteria dialog ....... 56 Extra Buttons Toolbar ............ 201 Emergence Angles ............................. 149 Fluid VCG...........80......................... 194 File.................. 150 Freeboard ..................................................................... 159 Graph Window ............................. 8 H Heel .................................................................... 9 Export....................... 197 Open ........................................ 196 Edit Damage case..... 20 Saving ............................................................................................................... 189 Data interpolation................................... 160 Displacement............................................................................ 162 New ............... 80 DXF export ............................. 205 Flooding ............................ 200 Edit Toolbar ... 204 Edit Loadcase ................ 205 Design Grid .........................21..0 .................................................... coherence ........................ 204 External Tanks . 162 DXF.......................... 198
................. 197 Save As ......................... 197 Save ...

.......................... formatting............ 202 Paste .......................................... 106 M Margin Line points.............................................. 96 Linked negative compartments ............. 44 Headings lines .................................. 183
Loadcase........ 198 O Online Support .............................................. Import ..... 186 KN Values..... 200 Pan .................... 43 Totals ............................................................................................. 240 LCB.......................... 113 MEPC..........117(52) Reg.......... 75....................................................... 49 Loadcase............................................................................................................ 146........... 198 Individual Loadcase ...... density ................. 40 Loadcase Window........... 303 K Key points ................. 159 Printing......... 47 Loadcase........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 51 nuShallo.......... 47 Loadcase Colour Formatting.................................... max........................................................ 201 Insert Row ............23................. 205 Perspective view ...... 84 lateral projected area ........ LCG .................................................................... 93 L Large Angle Stability ...... 58 Loadcase ..... 113 Merge Cells .............. Distributed Loads .................................................. 204 Loadcase........................................................... 185 Margin Line........... 43 Loadcase Template ...................... 185 adding.............................................................. 45 Loadcase........... 223 Maximum shears and moments ......... Area Section .......................... column selection ............... Tank loads ..........181............................... 201 Permeability . 59 P Page Setup..................................... 185 Modulus Window .............................................. saving ................................................ 11.................................................................................... 223 Immersion Angles ........................... 161 Update ............... 212 Input Tables............... 77 Measurement reference frames .......... 201 Midship Section .................................... 41 Longitudinal Strength .. 197 MEPC............. 220 Maximum deck inclination ......................................216(82) ... 222 Length ................. 206 MARPOL ..................... 212 Adding and Deleting loads......................................................... 198 Import Image Background .................... 217 Libraries ................................. Export ............................... 202 Print..... 116 MSC.... 116 N Non-Buoyant Volume Definition .................................12A.. 20 overlap ....................................Index
I IGES................................................... 210 Initial Conditions .... 42 Renaming ..........141(54) Reg........................... 46 Loadgroup ............................ 35................................................. 220 Modulus points .............................................. 14 MARPOL oil outflow .................................16................................ cross referencing ...................... 76 editing ........... 42 Distributed loads ....................... 201 Installing Hydromax ........ 41 saving ............................. 38......................................................................................................77................................ 34 Input .. 161 Input Window ....................... Workshop structure . 209
Page 315
........................ 182 Precision..............19(58) ................................................................................ 113 Max.......................... 43 Blank lines .................................. 82.. 58....................... 200 Print Preview.................. 172 Limiting KG ...................................................... 198 Immersed depth............................ number . 47 Loadgroup........ 87 Import.............................................. 221 Prob damage zones ......... 75 Data ......................................... 43 Grouping tanks .................... 159 Prismatic Coefficient .....................38....................................................................................................... Snap to hull ............. 197 Import DXF Background .............. 159 Printing to scale ............. 44 Loadcase.......................................13........................................................ 214 Menus................................................. 42 Free surface correction ........................................................................................................ 22 Preferences ... 87 deleting..... 213 Outside arrows ......... 220 Immersion .................. 76 Results ... 51 Loading a Saved Loadcase............................................................................................................................. 77 Moment to trim ...................................... 8.................. 10.........13.... 184 Insert New Table ...... 44 Loadcase Sorting.................................................. 16 ISO 12217-1 ........... 44 Loadcase Formatting...... 51 maximum number ....................... 45 Editing loads ........................................................................ 223 MSC...................... surface ..........

........... 151 Skin Thickness ............................... 84 Save ................................ 196 Report Window .. 116 Probabilistic Damage – Analysis ................. 138........passenger crowding .................. 282 Stability criteria....................... 91.......... saving .............. 60..... 19
Page 316
Sounding Pipes . 206 Righting Moment ........................................ 181.............................. Angle of equilibrium passenger crowding heeling arm .......................... 15..high-speed turn .................................. 249 Stability criteria..........highspeed turn heeling arm .............................. 288 Stability criteria........... 78 Stability Criteria Results .. 248 Stability criteria................................... 206 Set Home View .............. 248 Stability criteria..................... 296 Stability criteria....................................................... 161 Resume Analysis............................ Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) ........................... 181 Q Quality Assurance .......................... 270 Stability criteria...................... 250 Stability criteria.......... 151 Render ...... 150 Stability criteria.... Angle of equilibrium ....towing..... show single. Forming .......................general heeling arm .................................................................................... Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2) .......lifting weight .................... 228 Stability criteria....... 289 Reference Calculations ............................................................................................ 201 Spool to Report .................................................................................. 209 Set Analysis Type ............................................... 277 Stability criteria........... capsizing moment.. Angle of vanishing stability .............................. Areas and levers ................... angle calculators ................... Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) .... 294 Stability criteria........... Angle of equilibrium general heeling arm ................ 70 Specific Gravity . 268 Stability criteria............................................................................. 27 Select All............general cos+sin heeling arm ............. 294 Stability criteria....................................................... 184 Calibration Increment ........................................... Angle of maximum GZ ............ 201 S Safe steady heeling angles .... Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) ........ 209 Shift Key ........ Angle of equilibrium ................................. 202 Row Positioning ............................... 193 Reporting ................. 221 Section......................GZ derived wind heeling arm.................. 31 Sections........................................................ Angle of margin line immersion ............ 292 Stability criteria. Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) ............... 30 Shrink ........................ Angle of deck edge immersion .... 201 Show single hull section .........................269................ Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) ............................ Angle of maximum GZ above heeling arm ............... 270 Stability criteria.....general wind heeling arm 283
.... Angle of vanishing stability general heeling arm ............................... 224 Rotate ............ 240 Stability criteria... Angle of downflooding ............................................ 146 Split Cell ................................. 293 Stability criteria.... 171 Stability criteria....................... Angle of equilibrium ............................... 210 Show Grid ...............................70................ 250 Stability criteria..................... check boxes ... dialog ............................. 203 Property Sheet . 207 Stability booklet .......... 293 Stability criteria............................................. 191 Keystrokes...... 249 Stability criteria........... 151 Specified Condition ............. 119 Probabilistic Damage – log file.... 161 Saving Densities....... 201 Select View from Data ........ 160......................... 187 Stability criteria................. 156 Results ............................................................ 310 Quality Principles.................... 16 Show DXF ................................ 212 Results Window .....10............... 311 Reference Designs ........................................Index
Probabilistic Damage .......... 116 Probabilistic Damage – Saving input parameters . Angle of equilibrium multiple heeling arms .. 202 Simulate fluid movement .................... 293 Stability criteria.............................................................................. 152 Section Area Coefficient .................................. 136 Probabilistic Damage – Inputs ................ Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) ................ 293 Stability criteria................ 119 Properties ............ 310 R Ratio of equilibrium angles – GZ area derived heeling arm.............60........ 71 Edit ................................. 211 Render Transparent ................................................ 185 Results.... 205 Specified Conditions... 211 Report Toolbar ........................................... 210 Sectional Area Curve ..................................................................................... 310 Relative Density ....................................... 117 Probabilistic Damage – Principles ............................................................... 202 Set Vessel to DWL..................

....... 229 Stability criteria. 236 Stability criteria............... 250 Stability criteria.... pitch or slope at equilibrium ........................ Ratio of GZ area between limits ......... Heeling due to grain shift 239 Stability criteria..... 300 Stability criteria...general heeling arm ...165.. 305 Stability criteria....... Gust ratio ....................general heeling arm .......... 287 Stability criteria.. 264 Stability criteria.............................................................. 263 Stability criteria.... Heeling due to passenger crowding ........................... Heeling due to trawling ....................... 176 Stability criteria.... GZ area derived heeling arm type 1. Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2a) .. GZ........ 237 Stability criteria..231....................... GZ area between limits type 1 ..................... heeling arm units ........................ equilibrium ............. 239 Stability criteria.................. 278 Stability criteria............. ISO 12217 ............... heeling arm dependency on displacement .............. 240 Stability criteria.... 275 Stability criteria.....multiple heeling arms ... defining custom criteria. 291 Stability criteria.... 298 Stability criteria................. Heeling due to arbitrary forces .............. Heeling due to lifting of weights ....................... copying criteria.. non-healing arm ... importing ...... Ratio of areas type 2 general heeling arm ........229........ Minimum ratio of GZ to heeling arm ................................................... minimum GM calculator – Wind pressure . 271 Stability criteria...............................general heeling arm ......................... 242 Stability criteria.. Maximum ratio of GZ to heeling arm ....... parent criteria .......... 278 Stability criteria.......... 270 Stability criteria............. criteria library file ......... 239
Stability criteria..... GZ area between limits type 1 .. 229 Stability criteria... 298 Stability criteria.. list ................. minimum GM calculator – Constant ...........36(63 .. 238 Stability criteria....... GZ curve features ........................................... 163 Stability criteria............ 250 Stability criteria.......... damage and intact settings ... 266 Stability criteria....... glossary ................................231......................... 261 Stability criteria... GZ definitions ................... Ratio of areas type 3 general heeling arm ... GM calculators ....... 170 Stability criteria.....Index
Stability criteria....... GZ area between limits type 2 ...... 244 Stability criteria.... 293 Stability criteria................ 255 Stability criteria....... 170 Stability criteria........................172....... 170 Stability criteria... 272 Stability criteria.... Maximum Freeboard at equilibrium .... Heeling due to bollard-pull ............... General cos+sin heeling arm ........................... moving criteria ........................ IMO Code on Intact Stability A............................................ GZ area derived heeling arm type 2... GZ area between limits type 2. Maximum value of heel................. 235 Stability criteria...... GZ derived heeling arm ............................HSC monohull type ........................ 286 Stability criteria............... Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2) ........................................... Heeling due to turning......................... Heeling due to towing ...... 268 Stability criteria................ 172 Stability criteria. GZ area between limits type 1 ......... 172 Stability criteria............................wind heeling arm ....................................... 294 Stability criteria........................................... Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2.......................... 173 Stability criteria... 238 Stability criteria.................. 243 Stability criteria... minimum GM calculator – Constant with freeboard ......................... Ratio of GMT and heeling arm ....................... 172 Stability criteria.............. 232 Stability criteria...................................... Ratio of areas type 1 general cos+sin heeling arm...... Ratio of areas type 1 general heeling arm ..... Other criteria ..... 247
Page 317
............. 233 Stability criteria....... 251 Stability criteria..... pass/fail test .............................. 262 Stability criteria........... heeling arm definition ......................... 273 Stability criteria........................... 262 Stability criteria.......... 274 Stability criteria.multiple heeling arms ........... Range of positive stability .......... minimum GM calculator – Grain ..................... 242 Stability criteria............. Heeling due to wind ........... 178 Stability criteria.......................................................... 285 Stability criteria.............standard................... 179 Stability criteria. 243 Stability criteria........ Ratio of areas type 1 multiple heeling arms ... 233 Stability criteria......... IMO HSC Code MSC..... 234 Stability criteria..... 288 Stability criteria........ 279 Stability criteria..................................................... Range of positive stability general heeling arm ..................749(18) ..230.........STIX ......... General heeling arm .............. Minimum Freeboard at equilibrium .......... 235 Stability criteria....HSC multihull type .. 242 Stability criteria.. IMO roll back angle calculator ........ GZ area between limits type 2 ..... 253 Stability criteria........ GZ area between limits type 3 .........

................................. 211 Update Loadcase .....7......... 223 Trimmed surfaces................. 206 Start Batch Analysis. 246 Start Analysis ........ 264 Stability criteria.............13...................................... 145 Free-to-trim using a specified initial trim value ............143............... 244 Stability criteria....... 52 tapered..............................................Index
Stability criteria..................... 58 Tanks....... report and batch processing .................. Value of GZ at ...........195.............................................................................................................................. 54 Non-Buoyant Areas ......................... 138................................................ 61
Page 318
Tank Calibrations ........ 16 Status Bar ....................................................................................... 52 Fluids ..... 173 Stability criteria......... 61 Visibility ......... 153 trochoidal ............. 53 tanks overlap .............................. 154 Waveform ....... 195 TCG.......................................... 144 Free-to-trim to a specified LCG value ....... 245 Stability criteria.................................................. 181 Visibility ... 27 Trim ......... 268 Stability criteria...general heeling arm .............................................................................................................. 60 Saving .................................................... 54 simple .. selecting for analysis .............................................................. 170 Stability criteria... 153 Wave height ...... 79 V Validate Hydromax model ............................... 212 Tile Vertical ..................................... 302 Stability criteria........ 54 complex .................. 222 Wave definition............................... 257 Stability criteria... 145 View (extended)Toolbar ............. 201 Tank adding.......................... tree list ............................................................................ 169 Stability criteria................................................................................... 209 Visibility Toolbar .......... 161 Surface Thickness ...................................... KN ....... USL code............... 147 Toolbars ........ Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 ................................. 196 View Direction ................................ Subdivision Index s-factor MSC 19(58 . 196 W Waterplane Area Coefficient ................. 202 View Toolbar ........................................ 138................ 56 linked . Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 . Value of GMt at equilibrium ................. 145 Trim angle ................................................... 206 Tanks within Compartments .................................. 207 Starting Hydromax ................................... 145 Tile Horizontal .................. 58....................................... 176 Stability criteria.... 205 Fixed ......................... 153
......................................... 265 Stability criteria........................................... 200 Units ................... 61 Permeability ......................................................................... 264 Stability criteria.......................................... 234 Stability criteria........................................................................... Value of GMt or GMl at equilibrium ...... 244 Stability criteria...... Value of GZ at equilibrium general heeling arm ... deleting ...... 56 Recalculate ............37............................................................ Value of RM at specified angle or maximum RM below specified angle ............... 206 Upright Hydrostatics ......................................................... Value of GZ at specified angle or maximum GZ below specified angle ................. saving . 212 Tolerances ........................................... 203 Trapezoidal integration .... 20 U Undo......................... Limiting KG...... 59 Tanks Recalculate ..... Value of GMt at .... 260 Stability criteria............................... 194 View Window ............... Survivability Index MSC_216(82) . 60 Ordering .................................................. 243 Stability criteria............................... 207 Streaming results to Word ... 30 VCG for trim balance........................................ Value of maximum GZ ...................... User Defined Heeling Arm .. 108 Tank Type external........................................................................ 212 View Menu ... 203 Stop Analysis ......... 205 sinusoidal .......................................................................................multiple heeling arms..... boundary surfaces ..........194................................................ Value of maximum GZ above heeling arm ..............general heeling arm...................................................................................................................... 156 Surface Use ....................................................................................................... 244 Stability criteria. checking .... 280 Stability criteria........................ Ratio of positive to negative GZ area between limits ............................................... 174 Stability criteria.................. 19 T Table ...................................... results ............ 276 Stability criteria...................................................

................. 157 Z Zero Point ...........Index
Wavelength ............................. 212 Window Toolbar ............ 156 Word.................................. 195 Windows Registry........................... report streaming to ........... 202
Page 319
.... 18........................................................... 154 Wetted surface area....................... integration of .... 224 Window Menu .... report templates.............................. 181.... 43 Zoom .................................................... 35............... 16 Word.